order form / price list

Transcription

Engaged with you.
Dear Valued Professor
Cengage Technology Edition (CTE)
As the adoption of technology in educational institutions becomes ubiquitous, our new range of
Cengage Technology Edition (CTE) products will help expand your teaching repertoire. If you are
already using technology in your lessons, let CTE make your classes even better. If you are new to
technology, CTE is a great first step.
CTE combines either an e-book or digital solution with a print book for your convenience. This
hybrid learning product is available in all major subject disciplines such as business, economics,
mathematics, sciences, social sciences and humanities.
Digital simulations explain the concept of molecules, structure, and bonding visually. Virtual
manipulatives allow you to plot graphs or illustrate economic or mathematical theorems just by
changing variables. Use our multimedia resources to bring students to a whole new experience in
your class. These are just some examples of how our digital solutions help engage students, taking
them through the levels of application, analysis, and critical thinking. You can even track a student’s
progress using analytics for a better assessment.
By adopting CTE, you will be able to provide students with the content and tools they need to succeed
in the learning process anytime, anywhere. The possibilities are endless!
In this catalog, our complete list of CTEs is systematically arranged for your selection. New CTEs will
be published in the coming years. Take your time to ascertain the specific blended solution that best
meets your requirements and those of your students.
Thank you for your continuing support. We invite you to sample a Cengage Technology Edition e-book
or digital solution this coming semester. Please contact your Cengage Learning representative for
more information.
Sincerely,
Cengage Learning Asia Pte. Ltd.
Roy Lee
Managing Director & Vice President, Asia
Janet Lim
Senior Regional Director, Higher Education
CENGAGE
TECHNOLOGY
EDITION
Transforming Students’ Learning Experiences with
the Best in Print and Digital Learning Solutions!
enhanced student-teacher interactions
engaged students, improved learning experiences and better outcomes
a growing and interconnected pool of best-selling titles from
Cengage Learning
TAP INT
YOUR COURSE!
Cengage Learning solutions focus on engagement, taking students
through the levels of application, analysis, and critical thinking with
depth and context unmatched in the market.
ENGAGED WITH YOU.
Our integrations work with any LMS that supports IMS Basic LTI Open Standards. Enhanced features,
including grade synchronization, are the result of active collaborations with our LMS partners.
Contents
Communication Studies
Argumentation and Critical Thinking�� 2
Business and Professional Communication�� 3
Communication Theory�� 9
Gender Communication�� 10
Intercultural Communication�� 12
Interpersonal Communication�� 15
Introduction to Human Communication�� 23
Non-verbal Communication�� 34
Organizational Communication�� 35
Persuasion�� 37
Public Speaking�� 38
Research Methods in Communication Studies�� 61
Small Group Communication�� 63
Mass Communication
Advertising & Public Relations�� 64
Introduction to Mass Communication�� 73
Journalism�� 76
Mass Communication Law�� 79
Mass Communication Theory�� 81
Mass Media and Society�� 82
Mass Media History�� 85
Media Effects�� 86
Research Methods in Mass Communication�� 87
Visual Communication�� 89
Radio Television & Film
Aesthetics�� 90
Audio Production�� 92
Broadcast History�� 95
Electronic Media Management�� 96
Introduction to Film�� 99
Radio Production�� 100
Video & Film Production�� 101
Voice & Articulation�� 108
Writing for Radio, Television & Film�� 109
Theatre
Acting�� 113
Introduction to Theatre�� 116
Scene Design/Lighting�� 122
Combined Author/Title Index�� 125
Order form/pricelist is available upon request through Cengage Learning Representative.
Special price requests for class adoption are subject to approval. Please contact your Cengage
Learning Representative for details.
Information contained in this catalog is correct at the time of printing.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice.
COMMUNICATION
STUDIES
• There is discussion of contemporary argumentation
theory, from Perelman and Toulmin to an overview
of informal logic and pragma-dialectics.
• Chapters cover critical and ethical approaches
to debate and argumentation, as well as political
campaign debates, covering history, impact and
future with discussion of Presidential Campaign
debates from Nixon/Kennedy through January
2012.
• The authors have updated the research chapter
and provided a new appendix on debate and
technology.
• A complete scripted debate with flowsheets and
ballot is included.
ARGUMENTATION AND
CRITICAL THINKING
FEATURES
ARGUMENTATION AND DEBATE,
INTERNATIONAL EDITION, 13E
Austin J. Freeley, John Carroll University; David L. Steinberg,
University of Miami
Widely praised, ARGUMENTATION AND DEBATE,
13E, International Edition uses a clear, concise, and
engaging presentation that makes even complex
material easy for students to understand. The
authors have adapted the text over the years to
match changing practices in debate and teaching
while preserving classical and conventional
approaches to learning debate. This edition retains
its rhetorical roots with a flexible tone open to a
diverse array of debate styles that is appropriate in
the contemporary context. It values the importance
of inclusion and sensitivity to differences of culture,
gender, orientation, class and other factors as they
impact communicative choices and argumentation.
The authors have a preference for team topic
evidence-based policy debate; however, the text
strives to offer viable tools for a wide range of
readers interested in improving their critical thinking
for reasoned decision making.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The text is reorganized, beginning with foundations
and classical traditions, logic and reasoning,
progressing to the practice of academic debate,
and concluding with applied and public debate.
2
• ARGUMENTATION AND DEBATE is grounded
in classical argumentation theory and informed
by contemporary debate tournament practice. It
is appropriate for students whose formal debate
experience will begin and end with the debate
course, as well as those who may continue to
develop their debate experience by participating
in intercollegiate or competitive debate events.
• Mini-glossaries and text boxes in each chapter
highlight key vocabulary, concepts, lists, and
processes.
• Each chapter offers time-tested exercises for
experiential integration of student learning.
• Theory is exemplified with contemporary examples
of public argumentation and discourse, as well as
illustrations based in academic debate practice.
• Theory and critical-thinking tools will enrich
readers’ participation in public and professional
discourse, improve their skill set in public
argument, and enrich their critical-listening
capacities.
CONTENTS
1. Argumentation, Critical Thinking and Decision
Making.2. Foundations of Debate.3. Foundations
of Argument.4. Obstacles to Clear Thinking.5.
Ethical and Cultural Considerations.6. The Debate
Proposition.7. Analyzing the Proposition.8. Evidence
and Proof.9. Tests of Evidence.10. Gathering
and Organizing Support.11. Arguing for the
Proposition.12. Arguing Against the Proposition.13.
Cross-Examination.14. Refutation.15. Listening
www.cengageasia.com
and Evaluation.16. Debate as Public Speaking.17.
Formats in Academic Debate.18. Political Campaign
Debates.19. Applied Parliamentary Debate.20.
Public Debating.Appendix.A. Debate quick start.B.
Policy debate.C. Debate and technology.D. Debate
propositions.E. Debate bibliography.F. Glossary of
terms.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
Web Site for Freeley/Steinberg’s Argumentation
and Debate, 13th, 013e, 9781285083568
eBook: Argumentation and Debate, 013e,
9781285625591
3I-EBK: ISE FOR ARGUMENTATIONAND
DEBATE, 013e, 9781337008372
© 2014, 544pp, Paperback, 9781285083575
BUSINESS AND
PROFESSIONAL
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATING FOR RESULTS, 10E
A Guide for Business and the Professions, International
Edition
Cheryl Hamilton
This best-selling text introduces students to
the basic concepts and techniques needed to
successfully communicate in today’s business
world, regardless of their business experience.
Covering every aspect of the communication
process, from organizational theory to culturally
aware interpersonal communication obstacles
and strategies for critical listening, this text will
give students a competitive edge in any business
situation, from the interview to making skilled
presentations to assuming a leadership role. In
addition, COMMUNICATING FOR RESULTS: A
GUIDE FOR BUSINESS AND THE PROFESSIONS,
10E, International Edition offers students the chance
to view online video clips of common professional
scenarios and apply the concepts they are learning
to the real world. Cheryl Hamilton’s extensive
knowledge of the field ensures that each scenario
is realistic and offers an opportunity for students
to see how they can apply communications theory
outside the classroom to improve their chances for
career success.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW Chapter 14, “Polishing Your Written
Communications,” that walks readers through
the best practices of written communication,
helping to provide readers with critical information
for ensuring that their writing is effective and
professional. Writing tips, strategies, and examples
are shared for everyday writing of emails and
correspondence as well as more specialized forms
of writing including resumes, letters of information,
and letters of persuasion.
• UPDATED case studies in many chapters to
highlight recent cases that students are familiar
with and will then be able to refer back to and
evaluate based on the chapter reading.
• UPDATED “Ethics” boxes throughout the text to
now include “Ethics & Culture,” allowing readers
to critically evaluate the impact that culture and
ethics have on communication.
• UPDATED “It Really Works” boxed examples that
show how chapter content is used successfully in
the workplace.
• UPDATED: Technology in every chapter. For
example, in Chapter 3, “Technology Barrier”
has been added as well as a section on how
the “Customer” today has changed due to social
media, iPhones, YouTube, etc. Also, in Chapter
8, there is a section on how social media has
changed the process of interviewing.
• UPDATED and expanded sections and examples
of culture in each chapter. For example, see
the expanded section on cultural differences in
Chapter 3. Also, new and expanded sections in
Chapter 6.
• NEW Career Activities are found at the end of each
www.cengageasia.com
3
chapter to help readers put into practice what they
have learned in the text reading.
• Each chapter has been thoroughly revised to
reflect reviewer suggestions, current research,
and current examples.
•
FEATURES
• A new appendix on business writing includes
activities that can be completed in class, as a
group, or online for a grade. In addition, all written
communication pieces within the text are listed at
the end of the table of contents for easy reference.
• New and updated pedagogical features include
end-of-chapter group activities in each chapter,
chapter-opening case studies and “Revisiting the
Case Study” boxes, “Ethical Dilemma” boxes, and
“It Really Works” boxes.
•
•
•
CONTENTS
1. The Communication Process: An Introduction.2.
Communication in the Workplace.3. Conflict,
Culture, and Relationships.4. Effective Listening.5.
Nonverbal Communication.6. Overcoming
Obstacles to Communication in the Electronic
Age.7. Basic Information for All Types of
Interviews.8. The Employment Interview.9. SmallGroup Communication and Problem Solving.
10. Participation and Leadership in Teams.11.
Informative Presentations: Selecting, Researching,
Organizing, and Delivery.12. Verbal and Visual
Supporting Materials.13. Persuasive Presentations:
Individual and Team.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
4
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ with eBook Instant
Access Code for Hamilton’s Communicating
for Results: A Guide for Business and the
Professions, 010e, 9781285170732
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® with eBook,
1 term (6 months) Printed Access Card for
Business and the Professions, 10th, 010e,
9781285170763
CourseMate, SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0,
InfoTrac® 1-Semester Printed Access Card for
Hamilton’s Communicating for Results: A Guide
for Business and the Professions, 10th, 010e,
9781285170947
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ with eBook Printed
•
•
•
Access Card for Hamilton’s Communicating
Professions, 10th, 010e, 9781285171036
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® with eBook, 1
term (6 months) Instant Access for Hamilton’s
Communicating for Results: A Guide for Business
and the Professions, 010e, 9781285171050
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0,
InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card for Business and the Professions, 10th,
010e, 9781285171081
InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
for Hamilton’s Communicating for Results: A
Guide for Business and the Professions, 010e,
9781285171104
PowerLecture with ExamView®, JoinIn™
Student Response System for Hamilton’s
Communicating for Results: A Guide for
Business and the Professions, 10th, 010e,
9781285170640
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express™
3.0, InfoTrac® 1-Semester Instant Access,
Intl. Edition for Hamilton’s Communicating
Professions, International Edition, 010e,
9781285418155
eBook: Communicating for Results: A Guide
for Business and the Professions, 010e,
9781285668314
3I-EBK: ISE COMMUNICATING FORRESULTS,
010e, 9781337009690
© 2014, 528pp, Paperback, 9781285171838
www.cengageasia.com
BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL
COMMUNICATION IN A DIGITAL AGE,
INTERNATIONAL EDITION
Dr. Jennifer H. Waldeck, Chapman University; Patricia
Kearney, California State University, Long Beach; Tim Plax,
California State University, Long Beach
COMMUNICATION IN A DIGITAL AGE,
International Edition, is a comprehensive
instructional package designed to build students’
business and professional communication
competence. The interactive, multimedia nature of
this text emphasizes traditional and contemporary
topics germane to business and professional
contexts. The engaging online modules that
accompany this text create an interactive, mediaenhanced experience in the classroom, allowing
students to develop an in-depth understanding of
business and professional communication in the
21st century.
FEATURES
• The authors’ experience as business consultants
and solid understanding of the demands of the
contemporary workplace inform their commitment
to helping students understand the complex
and sensitive issues that today’s business
communicators face.
• The text’s approach is based on an understanding
of how new media and globalization have affected
business communication practices. Our nearconstant exposure to interactive media, and our
personal and professional relationships that often
span the globe, have changed the way we think,
listen, and articulate ourselves in our interactions
with employers, colleagues, and clients.
• The text supports today’s business realities:
an emphasis on learning and development in
organizations, and a reliance on web-enabled,
self-directed learning and collaborative initiatives
for training, development, and innovation.
• Three unique chapters on new media in the
workplace, business consulting, and training in the
workplace. The chapter on new media provides
in-depth information about how to competently
leverage what new communication technologies
offer, including social media.
• Accompanying online modules offer interactive
coverage of unique topics, such as how to navigate
office politics, how to balance professional and
personal lives, how to use social media for
professional networking, how to negotiate a
compensation package, and how to deal with job
rejection.
• Fully interactive e-book and other online resources
fully engage students who spend much of their
time in a media-rich existence that offers dynamic
and attractive content. The format and content
of this text model how media exposure has
influenced the way today’s audiences listen, think,
and relate to information.
• “Putting Your Skills to Work” boxes highlight how
students’ existing skills, such as being open to
criticism in class discussions or studying for tests,
can be applied in the workplace. These boxes
help you answer the question “Why do I need to
know this?”
• “Visualize! Practice!” interactive activities
encourage students to apply theory, practice
skills, and visualize themselves handling various
workplace situations.
• “Link Out” activities direct students to interesting
and relevant weblinks that illustrate and reinforce
concepts discussed in the text
• “Check This Out” activities direct students to video
and audio that illustrate and expand on chapter
and module content, often asking students to
answer critical thinking questions about what they
watch and listen to.
CONTENTS
1. Contemporary Business & Professional
Communication Competence: What Does the
Workplace Demand?2. Communicating at Work:
How Can I Make Every Word and Gesture Count?3.
www.cengageasia.com
5
Just How Important Is Listening at Work, Really?4.
The Job Interview: How Do I Get the Job?5.
Relationships in the Workplace: How Do I Get
Along?6. Mediated Communication: How Can New
Media Help Me at Work?7. Giving Presentations:
How Do I Prepare to Tell My Story?8. Giving
Presentations: How Can I Best Present My Ideas
at Work?9. Giving Presentations: How Can I Best
Sell My Ideas at Work?10. Sensory Aids: How Can
I Better Engage My Listeners?11. Making Meetings
Matter: How Can I Do That?12. Making Teams
Work: What Can I Do?13. Business & Professional
Writing: How Do I Best Present Myself in Writing?14.
Communication Consulting: What Skills Do I
Need?15. Communication Training: What Skills Do
I Need?Module 1: How Do I “Get In and Fit In” to
My Organization’s Unique Culture?Module 2: How
Can I Practice Ethical Communication Behavior
at Work?Module 3: How Do I Give Specialized
Presentations?Module 4: What Do I Need to Know
About Business Etiquette?Module 5: How Do I
Create Work-Life Balance?Module 6: You Gotta
Have Style: Using APA and MLA StylesModule
7: What Methods Can I Use to Analyze My
Audience?Module 8: What’s the Best Way to
Organize and Outline My Presentation?Module
9: How Do I Navigate Office Politics?Module
10: What Parliamentary Procedures Do I Really
Need to Know?Module 11: How Do I Use Social
Media for Professional Networking?Module 12:
What’s the Best Way to Negotiate a Compensation
Package?Module 13: How Do I Deal With Job
Search Rejection?Module 14: How Do I Prepare for
Phone and Video Interviews?Module 15: How Do I
Manage Time as a New Professional?Module 16:
What Makes a Winning Cover Letter and Resume?
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
6
WebTutor™ ToolBox on WebCT™ Printed
Access Card, 001e, 9780534274887
WebTutor™ ToolBox on Blackboard® Printed
Access Card, 001e, 9780534274894
WebTutor™ ToolBox for Blackboard® Instant
Access Code, 001e, 9780534274917
PowerLecture for Waldeck/Kearney/Plax’s
Business and Professional: Communication in
a Digital Age, 001e, 9780840030481
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Waldeck/
•
•
•
Kearney/Plax’s Business and Professional:
Communication in a Digital Age, 001e,
9780840030498
3.0, SpeechStudio 2.0, InfoTrac® 2-Semester
Instant Access, Intl. Edition for Waldeck/
Kearney/Plax’s Business and Professional
Communication in a Digital Age, International
Edition, 001e, 9781428275515
3.0, InfoTrac® 2-Semester Instant Access,
Intl. Edition for Waldeck/Kearney/Plax’s
Business and Professional Communication
in a Digital Age, International Edition, 001e,
9781428275522
eBook: Business and Professional
Communication in a Digital Age, 001e,
9781133974208
© 2013, 400pp, Paperback, 9781133309840
COMMUNICATING AS
PROFESSIONALS, 3E
Raymond Archee, University of Western Sydney; Myra
Gurney, University of Western Sydney; Terry Mohan
This text explains all the key communication
concepts and effective strategies students will use
to communicate as professionals, no matter what
career they ultimately choose. It covers modern
communication theory as well as essential practical
skills such as active listening, verbal and non-verbal
communication and negotiation.
FEATURES
• N E W c h a p t e r 5 d e d i c a t e d t o m e d i a t e d
communication, including social networking, with
increased integration of these new communication
www.cengageasia.com
forms throughout the text makes students aware
of the advantages and implications of using social
media.
• Opening vignettes: Each chapter begins with an
example or scenario introducing and illustrating
the chapter topics to give students real-world
context to modern communication theory and
essential communication skills.
• Case studies throughout the text provide students
with real-world scenarios of communication in
practice. Comments on these case studies in the
end of chapter material promote further discussion
of communication theory and skills.
• Discussion questions and exercises at the end
of each chapter help students link the concepts
they have learnt to real-world situations and can
be undertaken individually or in groups.
• Search Me! communication terms and relevant
websites at the end of each chapter, and
References at the end of the text enable readers
to investigate the concepts further.
• NEW CourseMate Express Premium Website
which brings course concepts to life with
interactive learning, study, and exam preparation
tools that support the textbook. Watch student
comprehension soar! CourseMate Express
Premium Website includes interactive teaching
and learning tools including quizzes, flashcards,
videos, and more, and Engagement Tracker,
a first-of-its-kind tool that monitors student
engagement in the course
CONTENTS
Part 1 Perspectives on professional communication1.
Communication theory and professional practice
2. Language and communication practice3.
Non-verbal communication: meanings without
words4. Intercultural communication 5. Mediated
communication6. Professional communication
researchPart 2 Communication in organisations7.
Concepts and applications in interpersonal
communication8. Communicating in groups
and teams to achieve professional goals9.
Interviewing and negotiating10. Oral reports and
presentationsPart 3 Writing skills in professional
life11. Writing professionally: process and style12.
Writing for the workplace: content and genre13.
Academic writin
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search Me! Communication, 1e, 9780170195201
Communicating as Professionals Instant Access
Code 12 Months, 3e, 9780170231862
Communicating as Professionals CL eBook, 3e,
9780170231879
CourseMate Premium Website, 3e,
9780170231886
Communicating as Professionals CengageNow
Assessment Instant Access Code 6 Months, 3e,
9780170231909
Communication as Professionals CengageNow
Assessment Only, 3e, 9780170231916
Instructor’s Manual, 3e, 9780170231923
PowerPoint Slides, 3e, 9780170231930
Communicating as Professionals ExamView
Test Bank, 3e, 9780170231947
Communicating as Professionals Instructor
Companion Website, 3e, 9780170231961
Artwork, 3e, 9780170231954
eBook: Communicating as Professionals, 3e,
9780170242813
eBook: Communicating as Professionals with
Student Resource Access, 3e, 9780170243315
Tourism : A Modern Synthesis VitalSource
eBook Institutional License, 4e, 9780170268028
Communicating as Professionals - CourseMate
Express, 3e, 9780170368322
Communicating as Professionals CourseMate
Express Instant Access Code for 12 Months,
3e, 9780170368339
© 2013, 416pp, Paperback, 9780170214971
www.cengageasia.com
7
COMMUNICATION IN THE GLOBAL
WORKPLACE, INTERNATIONAL
EDITION, 3E
H.L. Goodall, Jr., Director of the Hugh Downs School of
Communication, Arizona State University; Sandra Goodall
What communication skills are essential in today’s
global economy? BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL
COMMUNICATION IN THE GLOBAL WORKPLACE,
International Edition, provides a strong theoretical
foundation of organizational communication for the
business and professional communication course.
Featuring coverage of the most up-to-date skill set
available, the book considers the rapid changes
in professional communication due to the global
economy, advances in information technology, and
an increasingly diverse workforce. The authors’
engaging narrative style, the unique CCCD
model (Choosing, Creating, Coordinating, and
Delivering) for building presentation competencies,
and an integrated companion website combine to
provide today’s definitive resource on professional
communications.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• To get students thinking globally, the new
edition includes a “Global Profile for Success”
feature in each chapter. By highlighting actual
corporate policies and ideology espoused
on corporate websites, students see how the
techniques, strategies, processes, and concepts
for communicating they read about are being
practiced by the global companies they may work
for someday.
• “Focus on Ethics” boxes placed throughout the
text pose ethical situations that students may
encounter in the global workplace. Students
8
consider each situation from different viewpoints
and perspectives. The “Focus on Ethics” scenarios
can also be used as the base for writing, group,
or impromptu speaking assignments.
• “Thinking Globally” boxes emphasize specific
cultural situations that occur in the global
workplace. For example, students imagine they
are interviewing for a job in a different country
or with a company based in another country.
“Thinking Globally” questions can also be used as
the basis of a resume, writing, or group exercise.
• The detailed case studies in each chapter allow
students to put themselves in complex “real-world”
workplace situations. At the end of each case
study, students consider questions designed to
expand the discussion beyond the facts presented
so they learn to consider communication situations
from different viewpoints and look beyond the
obvious.
FEATURES
• A consistent model for building competencies is
used in each chapter, the CCCD system: Choose
(a communication goal and strategy), Create (the
message), Coordinate (with other people), and
Deliver (the message).
• Whether the task is an interview, an informative
presentation, or a persuasive presentation,
students can use the model to prepare for, and
improve upon, their performance.
• A focus on information technologies underscores
how tools such as email, cross-company
networking, the Internet, PowerPoint®, and the
telephone intersect with everyday interpersonal,
group, team, and presentational business
contexts.
• A “Focus on Ethics” feature in each chapter
poses an ethical dilemma and offers discussion
questions.
• Practical exercises are included throughout the
text, and actual business consulting experience
is emphasized.
CONTENTS
Preface.Unit One: COMMUNICATION
FOUNDATIONS.1. Breakthrough Skills for a Global
Workplace.2. The Evolution of Communication in
a Global Workplace.Unit Two: INTERPERSONAL
www.cengageasia.com
COMMUNICATION.3. The Power of Verbal
and Nonverbal Communication in the Global
Workplace.4. Listening in a Multilingual World.5.
Exploring Interpersonal Communication.Unit Three:
CAREER FUNDAMENTALS.6. Interviewing and
Conscious Communication.7. The Job Search
and Conscious Communication.Unit Four: TEAM
BUILDING.8. Information Technology and Identity
in a Global Workplace.9. Communicating in
Groups and Teams.Unit Five: PRESENTATIONS
AND PERSUASION.10. Presentation in a Global
Workplace.11. Persuasive Communication in a
Global Workplace.Appendix.Glossary.
•
Communication in the Global Workplace, 003e,
9781439064252
Communication in the Global Workplace, 003e,
9781133379904
© 2010, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495567400
COMMUNICATION THEORY
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Web Site for Goodall/Goodall’s Communicating
in Professional Contexts: Skills, Ethics, and
Technologies, 3rd, 003e, 9780495567417
PowerLecture with PowerPoint®, ExamView®,
and Instructor’s Resource Manual for Goodall/
Goodall’s Communicating in Professional
Contexts: Skills, Ethics, and Technologies, 3rd,
003e, 9780495567424
Resource Center Instant Access Code for
Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating in
Professional Contexts: Skills, Ethics, and
Technologies, 003e, 9780495793854
Resource Center Printed Access Card for
Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating in
Professional Contexts: Skills, Ethics, and
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® Instant Access
Code for Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating
Technologies, 003e, 9780495794646
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® Printed Access
Card for Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ Printed Access
Card for Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ Instant Access Code
for Goodall, Jr./Goodall’s Communicating
Technologies, 003e, 9780495794677
COMMUNICATION THEORIES IN
ACTION, 3E
An Introduction (with InfoTrac®)
Julia T. Wood, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill
This text introduces students to a select set of
leading theories in the communication field and
demonstrates how these theories apply to their
lives. Chapters group theories coherently so
that students can compare and contrast different
approaches to particular interests in the field (for
example: relationships, performance, language and
mass communication).
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New Chapter 13, “Frontiers of Theory,” includes
coverage of postmodern theory.
• More than 80 new references included to ensure
coverage of the most current theory and research
in the field.
• Chapter 10, “Theories about Communication
Communities,” has been thoroughly revised to
include new coverage of critical race theory and
standpoint theory.
• Chapter 11,”Theories of Mass Communication,”
now includes new information on technologies
pertaining to technological determinism theory.
• Chapter 12, “Critical Communication Theories,”
www.cengageasia.com
9
includes new coverage of third wave feminism
and multiracial feminist theories.
• New and updated coverage of dialectical theory.
FEATURES
• The author is highly regarded in her field. Wood
was the Council for Advancement and Support of
Education (CASE) and the Carnegie Foundation
for the Advancement of Teaching North Carolinas
1998 Professor of the Year. She received
the 1998 UNC Board of Governors Award for
Teaching Excellence and was named a National
Communication Associations (NCA) Distinguished
Scholar in 1998.
• First-person writing style of author combined with
unique “Opening” chapter and “Reflection” feature
gives the text a personal tone that has been
consistently praised by reviewers and students
alike.
• Chapters are grouped to emphasize connections
among theories in areas of the field. This prevents
disjointed or fragmented presentation.
• Balance of scholarship and skills with in-chapter
pedagogy: “Try It Out” activities show students
how to apply theories to their own activities.
CONTENTS
Part One: THINKING ABOUT COMMUNICATION
THEORY.Opening.1. Communication as a Field
of Study.2. Understanding Communication
Theories.3. Building and Testing Theory.Part
Two: COMMUNICATION THEORIES.4. An
Early Communication Theory.5. Theories about
Symbolic Activity.6. Theories about Performance.
7. Theories about How People Construct Meaning.
8. Theories of Interpersonal Dynamics.9. Theories
about Communication and the Evolution of
Relationships. 10. Theories about Communication
Communities.11. Theories of Mass Communication.
12. Critical Communication Theories.13. The
Frontiers of Theory.14. Communication Theories
in Action: A Final Look.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
10
Student Companion for Communication
Theories in Action, 002e, 9780534516291
Student Companion for Wood’s Communication
Theories in Action: An Introduction, 3rd, 003e,
•
•
9780534566418
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Wood’s
Communication Theories in Action: An
Introduction, 3rd, 003e, 9780534566425
Web Site for Wood’s Communication
Theories in Action: An Introduction, 3rd, 003e,
9780534566449
© 2004, 384pp, Paperback, 9780534566395
GENDER COMMUNICATION
GENDERED LIVES, 12E
Julia T. Wood, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill;
Natalie Fixmer-Oraiz
Written by leading gender communication
scholars Julia T. Wood and Natalie FixmerOraiz, GENDERED LIVES: COMMUNICATION,
GENDER, & CULTURE, 12E provides an engaging
introduction to the field, equipping students with the
tools, knowledge, and insight to think critically about
gender and society. Introducing the latest theories,
research, and pragmatic information, the text
demonstrates the multiple--and often interactive-ways that a person’s views of masculinity and
femininity are shaped within contemporary culture.
It uses a conversational, first-person writing style
and offers balanced coverage of different sexes,
genders, and sexual orientations. The 12th Edition
is packed with new references and coverage of new
topics, including work-life balance, transgender
issues on campus, bullying in school, gender and
health, reproductive violence, and more. It also
provides expanded coverage of gays, lesbians,
bisexuals, and transgender people throughout.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
www.cengageasia.com
• REFLECTING THE LATEST RESEARCH
AND DEVELOPMENTS, the 12th Edition is
completely up to date and incorporates more
than 250 new references. It offers thorough
coverage of numerous new topics, including
sustained attention to men’s and women’s
efforts to achieve work-life balance, transgender
issues on campus and beyond, bullying in school
settings, relationships between gender and
health, workplace equity for low-wage workers,
reproductive violence, and more.
• EXPANDED COVERAGE of gays, lesbians,
bisexuals, and transgender people is included
throughout the new edition.
• THOROUGHLY REVISED Chapter 11 on
“Gendered Media” includes more research,
discussion, and examples of mass media, social
media, and online environments, providing the
most current coverage available.
• NEW COVERAGE of men’s and women’s
movements now includes initiatives led by people
of color and LGBTQ peoples.
FEATURES
• GENDERED LIVES’ balanced presentation
of men’s and women’s communication issues
includes such topics as men’s movements;
initiatives like the Good Man Project; men’s
friendships; father/child relationships, including
single dads; and women’s issues concerning
family, career, and balance.
• C o v e r a g e o f t h e r o l e o f t e c h n o l o g y i n
communication—including the increasing use
of social media—is integrated throughout and
includes discussion of the effects of technology on
gender communication as well as the connections
between gender and media.
• Chapter-opening “Knowledge Challenge”
questions focus on commonly misunderstood
issues that are covered in the chapter. These
questions help students identify their assumptions
about gender, communication, and culture before
they begin the chapter.
• Student commentaries throughout the text
vividly illustrate how students relate to gender
communication issues, while “Exploring Gendered
Lives” boxes provide research, current events, and
myths for students to delve into. These exercises
conclude with “Take a Stand” questions that
encourage students to think about their response
to the issues covered in the feature._x000D_
• Questions for thought and discussion conclude
each chapter and may be assigned for students
to think about or to respond to in journal entries.
The questions also may be used as prompts for
lively class discussion.
• “Gender Online” features invites students to visit
websites related to chapter content as well as
search for relevant videos and information about
concepts and ideas discussed in the chapter.
CONTENTS
Part I: CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATIONS.1.
The Study of Communication, Gender, and
Culture.2. Theoretical Approaches to Gender
Development.3. The Rhetorical Shaping of Gender:
Competing Images of Women.4. The Rhetorical
Shaping of Gender: Competing Images of Men.5.
Gendered Verbal Communication.6. Gendered
Nonverbal Communication.Part II: GENDERED
COMMUNICATION IN PRACTICE.7. Becoming
Gendered.8. Gendered Education: Communication
in Schools.9. Gendered Close Relationships.10.
Gendered Organizational Communication.11.
Gendered Media.12. Gendered Power and Violence.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Web Site with PowerPoint®,
Cengage Learning Testing, powered by
Cognero, Instructor’s Resource Manual for
Wood/Fixmer-Oraiz’s Gendered Lives, 12th,
012e, 9781305505360
Cognero for Wood/Fixmer-Oraiz’s Gendered
Lives, 012e, 9781305505377
Cognero Instant Access for Wood/FixmerOraiz’s Gendered Lives, 012e, 9781305505384
Web Site for Wood/Fixmer-Oraiz’s Gendered
Lives, 12th, 012e, 9781305505391
3P-EBK:GENDERED LIVES, 012e,
9781305888128
CS-EBK: GENDERED LIVES, 012e,
9781305982949
eBook: Gendered Lives, 012e, 9781305984509
© 2017, 368pp, Paperback, 9781305280274
www.cengageasia.com
11
INTERCULTURAL
COMMUNICATION
offer insight into new directions for intercultural
communication in the coming decades.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Forty foundational essays selected from previous
editions, demonstrating how the field has evolved
and expanded its description of intercultural
communication.
• A final chapter containing five new essays by
leading intercultural communication scholars
demonstrating the field’s evolving directions.
FEATURES
INTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION,
14E
A Reader
Larry A. Samovar, San Diego State University, Emeritus;
Richard E. Porter, California State University, Long Beach,
Emeritus; Edwin R. McDaniel, San Diego State University;
Carolyn S. Roy, San Diego State University
This new special, anniversary edition of
INTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION: A READER,
celebrates 40 years of publication. In compiling this
Fortieth Anniversary Edition, the editors reviewed
over 600 articles from the previous 13 editions
and selected those essays that educators, both
in the United States and abroad, have considered
foundational to intercultural communication
teaching and research. These essays also illustrate
the growth and direction of the field since the early
1970s. This edition offers a series of essays that
enables students to gain an appreciation and
understanding of intercultural communication.
Material is presented in a context that assists
students in comprehending and then applying
course concepts to their lives.These core readings
also demonstrate the historical development and
philosophical evolution of the field. As with prior
editions, the Reader continues to convey the idea
that successful intercultural communication is a
matter of highest importance in this globalized,
interconnected world. The concluding chapter,
“New Perspectives: Prospects for the Future,”
contains five new essays by leading intercultural
communication scholars. These original works
12
• Discussion questions, following each article,
encouraging students to think critically about the
reading, deepen their understanding of key course
concepts, and reflect on personal communication
experiences in light of new ideas and insights.
• A diverse selection of articles written by authors
from a wide range of academic disciplines,
countries, and cultures, reflecting the global
diversity and perspectives that characterize
intercultural communication.
CONTENTS
Preface.1. Approaches to Intercultural
Communication. Using Intercultural Communication:
The Building Blocks. EDWIN R. MCDANIEL, LARRY
A. SAMOVAR, RICHARD E. PORTER. Intercultural
Communication in a Globalized World. BERNARD
SAINT-JACQUES.“Harmony Without Uniformity”:
Worldview and Its Communication Implications.
MIIKE YOSHITAKA. Relevance and Application of
Intercultural Communication Theory and Research.
FELIPE KORZENNY. 2. Cultural Identity: Issues
of Belonging. Cultural Identity and Intercultural
Communication. MARY JANE COLLIER. An
Alternative View of Identity. GUO-MING CHEN.
American Indian Identity: Communicating Indianness. STEVEN B. PRATT, MERRY B. PRATT,
LYNDA D. DIXON.Understanding Whiteness in
the United States. JUDITH N. MARTIN.Chicano/a
Ethnicity: A Concept in Search of Content. JAMES
STEVEN SAUCEDA. Straddling Cultural Borders:
Exploring Identity in Multiple Reacculturation.
CHUKA ONWUMECHILI, PETER O. NWOSUS,
AND RONALD L. JACKSON, II.3. International
Cultures: Understanding Diversity. The Impact of
www.cengageasia.com
Confucianism on Interpersonal Relationships and
Communication Patterns in East Asia. JUNE OCK
YUM. Some Basic Cultural Patterns of India. NEMI
C. JAIN. Communication with Egyptians. POLLY A.
BEGLEY.Russian Cultural Values and Workplace
Communication. MIRA BERGELSON.Cultural
Patterns of the Maasai. LISA SKOW, LARRY A.
SAMOVAR.4. Co-Cultures: Living in a Multicultural
World.“Who’s Got the Room at the Top? Issues
of Dominance and Nondominance in Intracultural
Communication. EDITH FOLB.“Which is My Good
Leg?”: Cultural Communication of Persons with
Disabilities. DAWN O. BRAITHWAITE, CHARLES
A. BRAITHWAITE. Gender and Communication:
Sex is More Than a Three-Letter Word. JUDY C.
PEARSON.An African American Communication
Perspective. SIDNEY A. RIBEAU, JOHN R.
BALDWIN, MICHAEL L. HECHT.In Plain Sight: Gay
and Lesbian Communication and Culture.WILLIAM
F. EADIE. 5. Intercultural Messages: Verbal and
Nonverbal Interaction.The Nexus of Language,
Communication, and Culture. MARY FONG.
Dialogue, Argument, and Cultural Communication
Codes Between Israeli-Jews and Palestinians.
DONALD G. ELLIS, IFAT MAOZ. Mexican Dichos:
Lessons through Language. CAROLYN ROY. In
Different Dimensions: Nonverbal Communication
and Culture. PETER ANDERSEN. Japanese
Nonverbal Communication: A Reflection of Cultural
Themes. EDWIN R. McDANIEL. Language
Matters.AARON CASTELAN CARGILE.6.
Cultural Contexts: The Influence of the Setting.
Japanese Style of Decision Making in Business
Organizations. KAZUO NISHIYAMA.Comparing
and Contrasting German and American Business
Cultures. MICHAEL B. HINNER.Intercultural
Communication in the University Classroom.
LISA M. SKOW, LAURIE STEPHAN.Culture and
Communication in the Classroom. GENEVA GAY.
Negotiating Cultural Understanding in Health Care
Communication. PATRICIA GEIST-MARTIN.“Halftruths” in Argentina, Brazil, and India: An Intercultural
Analysis of Physician–Patient Communication.
NAGESH RAO.7. Communicating Interculturally:
Becoming Competent.Intercultural Communication
Competence. BRIAN H. SPITZBERG. Managing
Intercultural Conflict Effectively. STELLA TING-
TOOMEY.Understanding Cultural Identities in
Intercultural Communication: A Ten-Step Inventory.
MARY JANE COLLIER.Adapting to a New Culture.
YOUNG YUN KIM.8. Ethical Considerations:
Changing Behavior.The Limits of Cultural
Diversity new. HARLAN CLEVELAND.Intercultural
Personhood: An Integration of Eastern and Western
Perspectives. YOUNG YUN KIM.Integration in
Intercultural Ethics. RICHARD EVANOFF.Ethics in
Intercultural Communication. DAVID W. KALE.9.
New Perspectives: Prospects for the Future.From
Culture to Interculture: Communication, Adaptation,
and Identity Transformation in the Globalizing World.
YOUNG YUN KIM.The Multiculturalism Dilemma.
BERNARD SAINT-JACQUES.Asiacentricity and
Shapes of the Future: Envisioning the Field of
Intercultural Communication in the Globalization Era.
YOSHITAKA MIIKE, JING YIN.Seeking Common
Ground While Accepting Differences Through
Tolerance: US-China Intercultural Communication
in the Global Community. GUO-MING CHEN.
The Promise of Intercultural New Media Studies.
ROBERT SHUTER.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Companion Web Site (with Quizzing,
Instructor’s Resource Manual) for Samovar/
Porter/McDaniel’s Intercultural Communication:
A Reader, 14th, 014e, 9781285446899
CS-EBK: INTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION
READER, 014e, 9781285804132
3P-EBK:INTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION
READER, 014e, 9781285965987
eBook: Intercultural Communication: A Reader,
014e, 9781305147669
© 2015, 528pp, Paperback, 9781285077390
www.cengageasia.com
13
NEW TO THIS EDITION
NEW EDITION TENTATIVELY IN
FEBRUARY 2016
CTE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN
CULTURES WITH CB VITALSOURCE
EBOOK, 8E
Larry A. Samovar, San Diego State University, Emeritus;
Richard E. Porter, California State University, Long Beach,
Emeritus; Edwin R. McDaniel, San Diego State University;
Carolyn S. Roy, San Diego State University
Please note that the digital access code that comes
with the print book is valid for use in a specific Asia
territory only.CB VitalSource eBook – The ultimate
eBook experience has arrived! Easily access our
eBooks with features that will improve your reading
experience, and tools to help you take notes and
organize your studies.This bestselling intercultural
communication text gives readers an understanding
and appreciation of different cultures and helps
them develop practical skills for improving their
communication with people from other cultures.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN CULTURES is
renowned for being the only text on the market to
consistently emphasize religion and history as key
variables in intercultural communication. Packed
with the latest research and filled with numerous
compelling examples that force readers to examine
their own assumptions and cultural biases, this
book helps students understand the subtle and
profound ways culture affects communication. The
book is divided into four interrelated parts: Part I
introduces the study of communication and culture;
Part II focuses on the ability of culture to shape and
modify our view of reality; Part III puts the theory of
intercultural communication into practice; and Part
IV converts knowledge into action.
14
• The values chapter has been completely revised.
Two new taxonomies have been added in addition
to a new section on American values.
• The worldview chapter has been expanded. There
is new information on Islam. Second, because of
the increased interest and growth in secularism,
this worldview has been greatly expanded.
• The impact of globalization on families, business,
education, and intercultural communication in
general has been expanded.
• There is a new section on the communication
theory.
• The language chapter has been made more
practical with added sections on taboo topics and
the different ways culture actually use language,
and an expanded the section on translation and
interpretation.
• Material on new technology is integrated into many
of the chapters.
CONTENTS
1. Intercultural Communication: Interaction in a
Multicultural World.2. Communication and Culture:
The Voice and the Echo.3. The Deep Structure
of Culture: Lessons from the Family.4. Cultural
History: Our Antecedents.5. Worldview: Cultural
Explanations of Life and Death.6. Cultural Values:
Guidelines for Behavior.7. Culture and Identity:
Situating the Individual.8. Verbal Messages:
Exchanging Ideas Through Language.9. Nonverbal
Communication: The Messages of Action, Space,
Time, and Silence.10. Cultural Influences on
Communication Contexts: Responding to the
Setting.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
CS-EBK: COMMUNICATION BETWEEN
CULTURES, 008e, 9781133345800
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Samovar/
Porter/McDaniel/Roy’s Communication
Between Cultures, 8th, 008e, 9781133490692
PowerLecture with ExamView®, PowerPoint®
for Samovar/Porter/McDaniel/Roy’s
Communication Between Cultures, 8th, 008e,
9781133491354
© 2013, Paperback, 9789814591959
www.cengageasia.com
INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION
IPC 3 (WITH ONLINE, 1 TERM (6
MONTHS) PRINTED ACCESS CARD),
3E
Richard West, Emerson College; Lynn H. Turner, Marquette
University
Through ongoing research into students’ workflows
and preferences, IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card) from 4LTR Press
combines an easy-reference, paperback textbook
with Chapter Review Cards, and an innovative
online experience – all at an affordable price.
New for this edition, students explore IPC 3 (with
Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access Card)
anywhere, anytime, and on most devices with
IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card) Online! With the intuitive StudyBits™
functionality, students study more effectively
and can visually monitor their own progress.
Coupled with straightforward course management,
assessment, and analytics for instructors, IPC 3
(with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card) with IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card) Online engages students of
all generations and learning styles, and integrates
seamlessly into your Interpersonal Communication
course.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW 4LTR PRESS ONLINE: Created through
a deep investigation of students’ challenges
and workflows both broadly and in Interpersonal
Communication, IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card) Online enables
students to study how and when they want−
including on their devices!
• With the unique StudyBits™ functionality, students
easily collect notes and create StudyBits™ from
interactive content to collect what’s important.
With intuitive tagging and filtering options, they
maximize their study efforts as they make and
review flashcards, take practice quizzes, view
related content and track their progress all in one
place!
• Coupled with straightforward course management,
assessment, and analytics for instructors, IPC 3
(with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card) with IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card) Online engages students of
all generations and learning styles, and integrates
seamlessly into your Interpersonal Communication
Course and sets the stage for thinking critically.
FEATURES
• Every 4LTR Press solution comes complete with
an engaging print textbook, tear-out review cards,
an interactive digital solution, which offers study
tools and the full text narrative, all delivered and
influenced by a deep understanding of student’s
workflow and learning styles. Available as print
with online, print only, or online only, students
have their choice of format all at the same
affordable price.
• Shorter, comprehensive chapters in a modern
design present content in a more engaging and
accessible format that increases the number of
students who read the chapter without minimizing
coverage for your course.
• Tear-Out Review Cards at the back of the Student
Editions provide students a portable study tool
containing all of the pertinent information for class
and test preparation.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Interpersonal Communication.2.
C o m m u n i c a t i o n , C u l t u r e , a n d I d e n t i t y .3 .
Communication, Perception, and the Self.4.
Communicating Verbally.5. Communicating
Nonverbally.6. Listening and Responding
Effectively.7. Communicating and Emotion.8. Sharing
Personal Information.9. Communicating Conflict.10.
Communicating in Close Relationships.11.
www.cengageasia.com
15
Communicating in Context: Families, Friends, and
Romantic Partners.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cognero® for West/Turner’s IPC, 003e,
9781305668829
Cognero for West/Turner’s IPC 3, 003e,
9781305668812
Bind-In Printed Access Card for West/Turner’s
IPC, 3rd, 003e, 9781305668720
SSO ONLINE IPC 3, 003e, 9781305668706
Online, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
West/Turner’s IPC, 003e, 9781305668799
Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access Card for
West/Turner’s IPC, 3rd, 003e, 9781305668805
Instructor’s Companion Website for West/
Turner’s IPC, 003e, 9781305670617
LMS Integrated for IPC Online, 1 term (6
months) Instant Access for West/Turner’s IPC,
003e, 9781305868861
CS-EBK: IPC 3, 003e, 9781305982833
© 2017, 272pp, Paperback, 9781305668775
LOOKING OUT, LOOKING IN, 15E
Ronald B. Adler, Santa Barbara City College; Russell F.
Proctor II, Northern Kentucky University
A longtime favorite with millions of students and
instructors, LOOKING OUT, LOOKING IN, 15th
Edition maintains its market-leading tradition of
linking the latest research and theory to readers’
everyday lives. Its user-friendly approach motivates
students to learn and apply communication
principles in both personal relationships and on the
16
job. Expanded emphasis on social media includes
an all-new chapter devoted to the role of mediated
communication in interpersonal relationships as
well as integrated coverage throughout the book.
Diverse examples, new readings, compelling
cartoons, lively photos, and popular culture
references bring principles to life. Thoughtprovoking prompts in every section help enhance
understanding. Hands-on activities help students
put what they learn into action. The result: greater
student engagement and success.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW LOWER PRICE. Best-selling LOOKING
OUT, LOOKING IN, 15th Edition is now more
affordable to make it more accessible for students,
especially at a time when budgets are tight and
the costs of higher education are rising.
• ALL-NEW CHAPTER. The new Chapter 2,
Interpersonal Communication and Social Media,
is devoted to the role of mediated communication
in interpersonal relationships. Topics include
differences between mediated and face-to-face
communication, the benefits and costs of social
media, how gender and age influence the uses
of mediated communication, and how to use
social media competently to achieve personal and
relational goals.
• EXPANDED COVERAGE OF SOCIAL MEDIA/
MEDIATED COMMUNICATION. New coverage
of social media is also integrated throughout
the book. Comprehensive coverage includes
online impression management (Chapter 3), the
impact of social media on emotion perception and
expression (Chapter 5), nonverbal communication
in mediated messages (Chapter 6), giving
and receiving support online (Chapter 8), how
social media shapes the rise and fall of close
relationships (Chapter 9), and the role of social
media in communication in families, friendships,
and romantic relationships (Chapter 10).
• NEW READINGS. Capturing the attention of
today’s leaners, engaging new readings help
students see how topics relate to their own
lives. Readings offer practical insight on how to
juggle commitments with friends and romantic
partners, how loneliness can be pervasive in a
hyperconnected world, instagramming to project
www.cengageasia.com
an idealized identity, saving lives by texting
support, and how posting photos online can
strengthen close relationships.
• NEW TOPICS. Completely up to date, the
Fifteenth Edition reflects the latest developments
and research. New discussions cover striking a
balance between power and politeness, giving and
receiving social support, expression of positive
emotions, and more.
• NEW COVERAGE OF POPULAR CULTURE.
Captioned photos in every chapter illustrate how
principles in the text operate in everyday life.
Examples come from television, films, and people
in the news.
Ear.9. Communication and Relational Dynamics.10.
Communication in Close Relationships.11.
Improving Communication Climates.12. Managing
Interpersonal Conflicts.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
FEATURES
• Highlighting the connection between scholarship
and everyday life, this seminal user-friendly text
delivers a wealth of information and features that
show readers how the concepts and skills they
learn using this program will help them improve allimportant personal and professional relationships.
• An attention-grabbing assortment of photographs,
cartoons, and magazine-style readings reinforce
concepts, provide quick starting points for lively
classroom discussions, and demonstrate the
application of the communication principles
described in the chapter.
• Maximizing student study time and course
success, every chapter includes outlines, learning
objectives, key terms, online resources, and other
tools to help students focus their studies and
gauge their progress.
• In-text, hands-on activities help instructors
illustrate how key course concepts relate to every
student’s life and experiences. Activities such as
Pause and Reflect and Skill Builder exercises are
assignable as homework.
CONTENTS
1. A First Look at Interpersonal Communication.2.
Interpersonal Communication and Social Media.3.
Communication and Identity: Creating and
Presenting the Self.4. Perception: What You See
Is What You Get.5. Emotions: Feeling, Thinking,
and Communicating.6. Language: Barrier and
Bridge.7. Nonverbal Communication: Messages
Beyond Words.8. Listening: More Than Meets the
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MindTap® Speech, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for Adler/Proctor’s Looking Out,
Looking In, 15th, 015e, 9781305645110
Instructor’s Web Site for Adler’s Looking Out,
Looking In, 15th, 015e, 9781305645455
MindTap® Speech for Adler/Proctor’s Looking
Out, Looking In, 015e, 9781305645103
MindTap® Speech, 1 term (6 months) Instant
Access for Adler/Proctor’s Looking Out, Looking
In, 015e, 9781305645127
Cognero® Instant Access for Adler’s Looking
Out, Looking In, 015e, 9781305646209
Cognero for Adler’s Looking Out, Looking In,
015e, 9781305646193
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech for
Adler/Proctor’s Looking Out, Looking In, 015e,
9781305646216
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech for Adler/
Proctor’s Looking Out, Looking In, 15th, 015e,
9781305646223
3P-EBK:LOOKING OUT/LOOKING IN, 015e,
9781305855656
Demo MindTap® Speech for Adler’s Looking
Out, Looking In, 015e, 9781305875647
Demo MindTap® Speech, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Adler’s Looking Out, Looking
In, 015e, 9781305875654
CS-EBK: LOOKING OUT/LOOKING IN, 015e,
9781305982178
E-BOOK: LOOKING OUT/LOOKING IN, 015e,
9781305995444
© 2017, 448pp, Paperback, 9781305076518
www.cengageasia.com
17
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION,
8E
Everyday Encounters
Written by leading scholar and award-winning
teacher Julia T. Wood, INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION: EVERYDAY ENCOUNTERS,
8e relates theory and skills directly to students’
everyday interactions as it delivers a solid
introduction to interpersonal communication.
Completely up to date, the new Eighth Edition
integrates the latest communication research,
including findings from more than 125 new sources.
Reflecting the author’s expertise in gender and
social diversity, the text includes an unparalleled
focus on diversity. The new edition also features
increased coverage of social media and an
expanded emphasis on ethical choices. It addresses
such timely issues as emotional intelligence and
forgiveness, interracial relationships, safe sex,
ways to deal with abuse from intimates, racerelated differences between conflict styles, and
the power of language. In addition, the text is
available with MindTap—a fully online, highly
personalized teaching experience that enhances
learner engagement and improves outcomes while
reducing instructor workload.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Cultural diversity is woven even more thoroughly
throughout the new Eighth Edition. Chapter 2,
Communication and Personal Identity, discusses
cultural influences on self-presentation. Chapter
3, Perception and Communication, highlights
research showing that people from different
18
cultures perceive visual phenomena differently.
The discussion of conflict in Chapter 9, Managing
Conflict in Relationships, now includes information
about cultural influences on how people manage
conflict.
• Stronger and more integrated attention to social
media is featured throughout. Every chapter
includes a section that discusses connections
between chapter themes and social media. All
chapters also include one or more “Communication
in Everyday Life” features highlighting social
media.
• Expanded attention to ethics includes coverage
of ethical choices integrated throughout the text
as well as a “Thinking Critically” question focused
specifically on ethics at the end of each chapter.
• Chapter 2, Communication and Personal Identity,
includes a new section on how we express, or
perform, our identities. Highlighting our human
ability to choose how to perform our identities,
this new material provides a useful complement to
existing coverage of ways that others and culture
shape identity.
• Now more relevant to contemporary students,
Chapter 12, Communication in Families, helps
students think about and manage issues that face
or will face them and their families.
• Findings from more than 125 new sources reflect
the latest research related to interpersonal
communication.
• Built on a strengthened learning architecture based
on skill building, application, and critical thinking,
the Eighth Edition’s pedagogy is reflected and
integrated carefully into MindTap-a personalized
teaching experience with assignments that
guide students to analyze, apply, and improve
thinking, allowing instructors to measure skills and
outcomes with ease. At MindTap students are able
to use dynamic technological resources, including
interactive videos and simulations; find high-value
gradable activities; and practice in an engaging,
personalized online environment. MindTap is cued
in the text where appropriate to remind students
of their options for interactive applications.
• Each chapter now previews chapter content for
students with an easily reviewed set of Learning
Objectives paired with a chapter outline. Each
www.cengageasia.com
Learning Objective has been carefully matched
with one or more activities that will demonstrate
its mastery.
• Bringing chapter concepts to life, the expanded
photo program now includes more stills from
popular media plus thought-provoking captions.
• “Communication in Everyday Life” features
now include a new “Social Media” subcategory;
renamed the “Career” subcategory “Workplace” to
reflect the fact that not all work need be considered
a “career”; and often conclude with a suggestion
for applying the boxed material via reflection,
action, or visiting an online site, for which students
can provide written responses in MindTap.
CONTENTS
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9781305102446
CS-EBK:
INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION: EVERYDAY
ENCOUNTERS, 008e, 9781305448322
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Communication,
1 term (6 months) Instant Access for Wood’s
Interpersonal Communication: Everyday
Encounters, 008e, 9781305403420
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Communication, 1
term (6 months) Printed Access Card for Wood’s
Encounters, 8th, 008e, 9781305403437
eBook: Interpersonal Communication: Everyday
Encounters, 008e, 9781305549807
© 2016, 432pp, Paperback, 9781285445830
Part I: THE FABRIC OF INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION.1. A First Look at Interpersonal
Communication.2. Communication and Personal
Identity.3. Perception and Communication.4. The
World of Words.5. The World Beyond Words.6. Mindful
Listening.Part II: WEAVING COMMUNICATION
INTO RELATIONSHIPS.7. Emotions and
Communication.8. Communication Climate: The
Foundation of Personal Relationships.9. Managing
Conflict in Relationships.10. Friendships in Our
Lives.11. Committed Romantic Relationships.12.
Communication in Families. Epilogue: Continuing
the Conversation.Glossary.References.Index.
•
•
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Wood’s
Encounters, 8th, 008e, 9781305091122
MindTap® Speech for Wood’s Interpersonal
Communication: Everyday Encounters, 008e,
9781305091153
Access Card for Wood’s Interpersonal
Communication: Everyday Encounters, 8th,
008e, 9781305091160
MindTap® Speech, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Wood’s Interpersonal
9781305091177
MindTap Reader for Wood’s Interpersonal
CTE INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION, 7E
Everyday Encounters with CB VitalSource eBook
Please note that the digital access code that
comes with the print book is valid for use in
a specific Asia territory only.CB VitalSource
eBook – The ultimate eBook experience has
arrived! Easily access our eBooks with features
that will improve your reading experience, and
tools to help you take notes and organize your
studies.You’ll find your voice and experience
communication success with INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION: EVERYDAY ENCOUNTERS,
7E. Award-winning author Julia T. Wood presents a
pragmatic introduction to the concepts, principles,
and skills of interpersonal communication-helping you build the skills you need to become
a better communicator. You’ll also read about
www.cengageasia.com
19
such timely issues as the ethical challenges and
choices that affect interpersonal communication,
emotional intelligence and forgiveness, interracial
relationships, safe sex, ways to deal with abuse
from intimates, race-related differences between
conflict styles, and the power of language.
•
•
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The seventh edition includes an increased
emphasis on active learning.
• The “Engage Ideas” feature includes a question to
engage students in active learning and a question
to encourage students to connect chapter material
to workplace content.
• In each chapter, strengthened attention to the
workplace includes integrated research on onthe-job communication.
• Findings from more than 175 new sources reflect
the latest research related to interpersonal
communication.
•
•
•
•
FEATURES
• There is an emphasis on active learning with
the “Everyday Applications” margin feature. The
“Everyday Applications” icons point students to
additional active learning exercises at the end of
the chapter.
• “Assess Your Learning” review questions invite
students to engage actively in further reflection
and discussion of ideas.
CONTENTS
Part I: THE FABRIC OF INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION.1. A First Look at Interpersonal
Communication.2. Communication and Personal
Identity.3. Perception and Communication.4. The
World of Words.5. The World Beyond Words.6. Mindful
Listening.Part II: WEAVING COMMUNICATION
INTO RELATIONSHIPS.7. Emotions and
Communication.8. Communication Climate: The
Foundation of Personal Relationships.9. Managing
Conflict in Relationships.10. Friendships in Our
Lives.11. Committed Romantic Relationships.12.
Communication in Families.Epilogue: Continuing
the Conversation.Glossary.References.Index.
•
•
•
•
•
© 2013, Paperback, 9789814609807
SUPPLEMENTS
•
20
Workbook for Intercultural Communication,
001e, 9780534534639
Encounters, 7th, 007e, 9781111841614
CourseMate with InfoTrac® Instant Access
for Wood’s Interpersonal Communication:
Everyday Encounters, 007e, 9781133113980
PowerLecture with JoinIn™ Student Response
System, ExamView®, Instructor’s Resource
Manual, Video for Wood’s Interpersonal
Communication: Everyday Encounters, 7th,
007e, 9781133309758
CS-EBK:
INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION: EVERYDAY
ENCOUNTERS, 007e, 9781133345954
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® with eBook on
Gateway Instant Access Code for Wood’s
Encounters, 007e, 9781133490487
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ with eBook on
Gateway Instant Access Code for Wood’s
Encounters, 007e, 9781133490500
MindLink for CourseMate Instant Access
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate
Instant Access for Wood’s Interpersonal
9781285371771
Quizzing with Flash Cards Instant Access
Everyday Encounters, 9781285788098
Quizzing, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
Flash Cards, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
InfoTrac College Edition Student Activities
www.cengageasia.com
NEW TO THIS EDITION
UNDERSTANDING INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION, 2E
Making Choices in Changing Times, Enhanced Edition
Richard West, Emerson College; Lynn H. Turner, Marquette
University
West and Turner’s UNDERSTANDING
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION: MAKING
CHOICES IN CHANGING TIMES, Enhanced
Second Edition, empowers your students by
providing both the knowledge and practical
skills they need to make choices as effective
communicators in today’s rapidly changing
and technologically advanced society. The text
eliminates the perceived division between theory
and practice and clarifies their fundamental
interconnections. The text powerfully supports skill
development by exploring communication concepts
in tandem with realistic scenarios and concrete
behavior choices students can make in order to
become more effective communicators. Rather than
“telling” students how to communicate, the authors
list a “toolbox” of key skills pertaining to each theory
so students can actively choose and experiment
with strategies appropriate for a given situation.
Filled with realistic examples and scenarios that
reflect the diversity and interactions of today’s
students, UNDERSTANDING INTERPERSONAL
COMMUNICATION: MAKING CHOICES IN
CHANGING TIMES, Enhanced Second Edition,
makes clear connections between theory, skills,
and the life situations we all encounter on a daily
basis.This enhanced second edition includes the
student workbook bound in at the end of the text,
with chapter goals, outlines, interactive student
activities, InfoTrac® activities, and journal entries.
• The Interpersonal Explorer features highlight ways
theory and skills are interrelated and present skill
development as a process of making behavioral
choices to become more effective communicators.
Each box also references a related online activity
and ABC News video.
• Imagine Yourself boxes highlight interpersonal
communication in useful and familiar real-life
contexts, including work, school, and families, to
illustrate situations in which students must make
interpersonal choices and prepare them to make
those choices effectively.
• IPC in the News boxes provide interesting
and informative examples of interpersonal
communication in the media to illustrate key
concepts and provide compelling examples of
their real-life consequences.
• This second edition of UNDERSTANDING
INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION includes
more than 150 new references on topics such
as Blogs, Web 1.0 and Web 2.0, Body Art and
Tattoos, Internet Infidelity, “Final Conversations”
before Death, Immigration and Xenophobia,
Humor in Close Relationships, and Identity Play
on the Internet.
• As part of an integrated suite of online resources,
Interactive Video Activities allow students
to watch and evaluate new Case in Point
case studies and ABC News videos anytime,
anywhere. Additionally, within the Resource
Center, Interpersonal Simulations ask students to
make a choice within a scenario, answer criticalthinking questions to consider the consequences
of their choice, and then see the consequences
for a few likely choices.
FEATURES
• Each chapter opens with an intriguing Case in
Point scenario that helps students immediately
and personally appreciate key communication
concepts from self-perception to culture and
identity to nonverbal communication. These
scenarios feature people of diverse ages,
backgrounds, and educational levels.
• Ethics & Choice boxes encourage students to
consider the ethical implications of key topics
and explore how their own ethics relate to
www.cengageasia.com
21
communication choices.
• Communication Assessment Tests within
each chapter allow students to build their
skills by completing a self-assessment of their
communication behaviors and attitudes and
taking personal responsibility for their own skill
development.
• The text frequently refers students to online Your
Turn journal activities for personal self-reflection.
The authors also encourage critical thinking by
presenting both the bright side and dark side of
interpersonal communication to emphasize the
importance of choice and a need to appreciate
how our communication choices affect others.
• This enhanced second edition includes the
student workbook bound in at the end of the text,
with chapter goals, outlines, interactive student
activities, InfoTrac® activities, and journal entries.
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Interpersonal Communication.2.
Communication, Perception, and the Self.3.
C o m m u n i c a t i o n , I d e n t i t y , a n d C u l t u r e .4 .
Communicating Verbally.5. Communicating
Nonverbally.6. Effective Listening.7. Communication
and Emotion.8. Sharing Personal Information.9.
Communicating Power and Conflict.10.
Communicating in Close Relationships.11.
Technology and Interpersonal Communication.
Student Workbook.
•
•
•
22
•
•
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
Enhanced eBook, Resource Center, Interactive
Video Shell, InfoTrac® Printed Access Card
for West/Turner’s Understanding Interpersonal
Communication: Making Choices in Changing
Times, 2nd, 002e, 9780495564416
Enhanced eBook, Resource Center, Interactive
Video Shell, InfoTrac® Instant Access Code
Times, 002e, 9780495564423
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ Printed Access Card
Times, 2nd, 002e, 9780495564430
WebTutor™ on WebCT™ Instant Access Code
•
•
•
Times, 002e, 9780495564447
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® Printed Access
Card for West/Turner’s Understanding
Interpersonal Communication: Making Choices
in Changing Times, 2nd, 002e, 9780495564454
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® Instant Access
Code for West/Turner’s Understanding
in Changing Times, 002e, 9780495564461
Web Site for West/Turner’s Understanding
in Changing Times, 2nd, 002e, 9780495566052
Instructor’s Resource Manual for West/Turner’s
Understanding Interpersonal Communication:
Making Choices in Changing Times, 2nd, 002e,
9780495566069
PowerLecture (PowerPoint slides, ExamView,
JoinIn, and IRM) for West/Turner’s
Making Choices in Changing Times, 2nd, 002e,
9780495566083
Interactive Video Activities for West/Turner’s
Making Choices in Changing Times, 002e,
9780495570035
Enhanced eBook for West/Turner’s
9780495570073
Resource Center for West/Turner’s
9780495570455
CS-EBK: UNDERSTANDING
INTERPERSONAL COMM: MAKING
CHOICES ENH, 002e, 9781111166670
eBook: Understanding Interpersonal
Times, Enhanced Edition, 002e, 9781111181130
eBook: Understanding Interpersonal
Times, Enhanced Edition, 002e, 9781133381556
© 2011, 672pp, Paperback, 9780495908753
www.cengageasia.com
INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATE!, 15E
Kathleen S. Verderber, Northern Kentucky University; Deanna
D. Sellnow, University of Kentucky; Rudolph F. Verderber,
University of Cincinnati
Now in its 15th edition, this groundbreaking
human communication text equips students
with the communication skills they need to be
successful communicators. COMMUNICATE!
engages students in active learning through theory,
application and tools for practicing and assessing
specific communication skills in interpersonal,
intercultural, group, and public speaking settings,
and in face-to-face and virtual environments.
Skill-building exercises, including speech-plan
action step activities, guide students through the
speech preparation process. COMMUNICATE!
provides lively contemporary examples and sample
student speeches that ground theory, increase
comprehension, and help students become skillful
communicators. The role of ethics in communication
is integrated throughout the text, as is the role of
technology and social media. The chapters on
listening (Ch. 6) and presentational aids (Ch. 13)
have been significantly revised.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Increased emphasis on the role of technology
and social media with research and best practices
about how specific communication concepts
operate differently in technological and face-toface environments.
• A revised chapter on listening (Chapter 6)
integrates contemporary research on cognitive
processes, and how technology and social media
are changing the way we listen and bring new
challenges to listening effectively.
• A revised chapter on presentational aids (Chapter
13) includes the range of visual, audio, and
audiovisual aids used so often in speechmaking
today.
• A new sample informative speech outline
and transcript on Internet identity theft.
Student learning outcomes introduce each chapter
and help students focus on the main points as
they read.
• A new Reflection and Assessment section
replaces the standard summary and asks students
to answer key questions about the chapter before
moving on to the next chapter.
• “Apply It” boxes in the margins encourage readers
to reflect on and apply a specific communication
concept or skill to their lives.
FEATURES
• Speech-Plan Action Steps and activities provide
students with concrete steps in speech planning,
organizing, and presenting.
• “Communicating in the World” (formerly called
PopCom!) illustrates key communication concepts
and theories played out in daily life.
• Diverse Voices essays target cross-cultural
communication challenges as told by real people
who have experienced them.
• Thorough interviewing Appendix has been
updated and revised throughout.
CONTENTS
Unit I: FOUNDATIONS OF COMMUNICATION.1.
Foundations of Communication.2. Perception of Self
and Others.3. Intercultural Communication.4. Verbal
Messages.5. Nonverbal Messages.6. Listening.Unit
II: INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION AND
RELATIONSHIPS.7. Interpersonal Relationships.8.
Interpersonal Communication.Unit III: GROUP
COMMU NIC ATION . 9. C ommuni cati ng i n
Groups.10. Group Leadership and Problem Solving.
Unit IV: PUBLIC SPEAKING.11. Topic Selection
and Development.12. Organizing Your Speech.13.
Presentational Aids.14. Language and Oral Style.15.
Delivery.16. Informative Speaking.17. Persuasive
Speaking.Appendix: Interviewing.References.Index.
www.cengageasia.com
23
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Web Site for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s Communicate!, 15th, 015e,
9781305504240
MindTap® Speech for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s Communicate!, 015e, 9781305504257
MindTap® Speech 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
Communicate!, 15th, 015e, 9781305504325
Access for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
Communicate!, 015e, 9781305504332
Cognero for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
Communicate!, 015e, 9781305504349
Cognero® Instant Access for Verderber/
Verderber/Sellnow’s Communicate!, 015e,
9781305504356
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech, 1 term
(6 months) Instant Access for Verderber/
Verderber/Sellnow’s Communicate!, 015e,
9781305504363
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Verderber/
Verderber/Sellnow’s Communicate!, 15th, 015e,
9781305504370
CS-EBK: COMMUNICATE, 015e,
9781305982871
eBook: Communicate!, 015e, 9781305984929
© 2017, 528pp, Paperback, 9781305502819
COMMUNICATION MOSAICS, 8E
An Introduction to the Field of Communication
Written by leading scholar Julia Wood,
COMMUNICATION MOSAICS: AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE FIELD OF COMMUNICATION, 8E
draws from the latest research and practices to
equip students with a foundational survey while
helping them build effective skills. Retaining the
author’s signature first-person narrative style
and holistic approach, the text explains the basic
processes central to all communication contexts—
listening, perceiving, using verbal and nonverbal
communication, and establishing climate. Then
these processes are applied to various contexts
such as interpersonal, small group, public,
organizational, intercultural, mass communication,
personal, and social media. Each chapter includes a
section devoted to digital communication and social
media. Chapters end with a case study enabling
students to put what they learn into real-world
practice. In addition, Chapter 13 walks students
step-by-step through the process of planning and
preparing a public speech.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The eighth edition features a robust integration
between the print text and MindTap™.
• Every chapter includes a section devoted to digital
communication and social media, giving students
unparalleled insight into the dynamics of these
continually expanding areas.
• Reflecting the latest developments from the field,
the research base for the book is enriched with
200 new references.
24
www.cengageasia.com
• Engaging new discussions include communication’s
relevance to such timely topics as balancing work
and life, face-to-face and online bullying, and
addiction to social media.
• Offering more in-depth insight and prompting
lively classroom discussion, new critical thinking
questions have been added to selected photo
captions and feature boxes in chapters, while
author responses are available in the online
resources for the book.
FEATURES
• Each chapter opens with learning objectives as
well as includes in-text engagement features,
skill building exercises, and reflection questions
to help students optimize their study time and
course success.
• Throughout the book, the author explicitly links
communication concepts to active involvement
with the world beyond the classroom. Wherever
possible, the text cites current research, provides
engaging examples, and directs students to URLs
and blogs about relevant civic engagement, work
settings, and social contexts.
• The author explores the uses, impact, and roles of
technology—detailing social media throughout the
text to illustrate the pervasive nature of technology
today, while a variety of hands-on activities show
students how to work critically and meaningfully
with these technologies to maximize their careers
and personal success.
• COMMUNICATION MOSAICS encourages
students to apply communication theories,
research, and skills to real-world practice. Selftests and brief activities found in each chapter’s
TAKE ACTION section and the “Guidelines”
sections in Parts II and III help students develop
and sharpen their communication skills, while
“Engage!” boxes introduce them to a range of
technology, diversity, and professional issues.
• Offering a wealth of resources, the text’s Premium
Website features a variety of online tools mapped
to key communication learning concepts and
chapter learning lists. Popular with instructors
and students alike, the site includes an enhanced
eBook, audio study tools, chapter downloads,
interactive video activities, self-assessments, and
other web resources.
CONTENTS
Preface.Part I: COMMUNICATION CAREERS
AND FOUNDATIONS.1. A First Look at
Communication.2. The Field of Communication
from Historical and Contemporary Perspectives.
Part II: COMMUNICATION PROCESSES AND
SKILLS.3. Perceiving and Understanding.4.
Engaging in Verbal Communication.5. Engaging
in Nonverbal Communication.6. Listening and
Responding to Others.7. Creating Communication
Climates.8. Adapting Communication to Cultures
and Social Communities.Part III: CONTEXTS
OF COMMUNICATION.9. Communication and
Personal Identity.10. Communication in Personal
Relationships.11. Communication in Groups and
Teams.12. Communication in Organizations.13.
Public Communication.14. Mass Communication.15.
Digital Media and the Online World.Epilogue.
Glossary.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MindTap® Speech for Wood’s Communication
Mosaics: An Introduction to the Field of
Communication, 008e, 9781305508279
Access Card for Wood’s Communication
Mosaics: An Introduction to the Field of
Communication, 8th, 008e, 9781305508286
Cognero for Wood’s Communication Mosaics:
An Introduction to the Field of Communication,
008e, 9781305508309
Cognero® Instant Access for Wood’s
Communication Mosaics: An Introduction to the
Field of Communication, 008e, 9781305508316
1 term (6 months) Instant Access for Wood’s
1 term (6 months) Printed Access Card
for Wood’s Communication Mosaics: An
Introduction to the Field of Communication, 8th,
008e, 9781305508330
Instructor’s Web Site with Instructor’s Manual
Introduction to the Field of Communication, 8th,
www.cengageasia.com
25
•
•
008e, 9781305508262
CS-EBK: COMMUNICATION MOSAICSINTRO
FIELD OF COMMUNICATION, 008e,
9781305982956
eBook: Communication Mosaics: An
Introduction to the Field of Communication,
008e, 9781305984752
© 2017, 400pp, Paperback, 9781305403581
INVITATION TO HUMAN
COMMUNICATION - NATIONAL
GEOGRAPHIC, 2E
Cindy Griffin, Colorado State University; Jennifer Emerling
Bone, Colorado State University
Working in partnership with National Geographic,
INVITATION TO HUMAN COMMUNICATION, 2e
acknowledges the complexity of today’s workplace,
the power of communication, and the importance
of equipping students with the foundational skills
for success in this ever-changing environment.
A leader in teaching foundational communication
theories and skills, the text helps students recognize
the importance and centrality of communication in
their professional and personal lives. Each chapter
includes case studies and tips from nationally
recognized explorers, scientists, researchers,
and activists. In addition, Ethical Moment and
Communicating in the Workplace features help
students understand the role of communication
in the workplace. The text showcases the best of
communication theories and practices as well as
explores how communication is central to carrying
out work, developing professional and personal
26
relationships with others, and sharing ideas with
the larger public. _x000D_
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Each chapter includes a National Geographic
Speaks feature and a National Geographic
Explorer Tip showcasing the work of T.H. Culhane,
Barrington Irving, Mireyayrea Mayor, and many
others. Developed from interviews and research,
these case studies and tips highlight the centrality
and importance of ethical and civil communication
in the work of nationally recognized explorers,
scientists, researchers, and activists. Questions
prompt students to reflect on the ways a particular
communication strategy might become a part of
their own skill set.
• Updated feature boxes provide the latest insight
on recognizing the top ten communication skills
employers seek, preparing for job interviews,
understanding nonverbal communication in
the workplace, composing professional emails,
working across different generations, navigating
romances in the workplace, seeking mentors
at work, recognizing and reporting bullying,
keeping a new job, public speaking, coping
with communication anxiety, managing rumors,
motivating employees, and appreciating the
benefits of diversity in the workplace.
• A Case Study feature is included in every chapter,
enabling students to apply what they learn to realworld scenarios.
• Reflecting the crucial role of ethics in
communication, the Second Edition includes
feature boxes in every chapter highlighting
moments of communication that raise ethical
questions and dilemmas -- enabling students to
decide how they will respond to ethical challenges
before they have to face them.
• Chapters 8 and 9 have been reorganized to
provide a better understanding of the dynamics
of communication in groups and teams.
FEATURES
• INVITATION TO HUMAN COMMUNICATION
- NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC, 2e includes a
strong emphasis on civility throughout. Chapter
4 (Language) and Chapter 5 (Listening) are key
chapters for student enlightenment for personal
www.cengageasia.com
growth.
• MindTap® call-outs throughout the book direct
students to videos that bring chapter concepts and
communication theories to life._x000D_
• The text’s accessible and engaging writing style
draws students into the communication theories
and practices throughout each chapter as well as
helps instructors teach these introductory theories.
• Introducing students to the importance of ethical
and civil communication, the text asks them to
consider the moral impact of their communication
choices and to be open to the different perspectives
other people may have. This approach facilitates
the teaching of introductory communication
theories and helps instructors showcase the power
and complexity of communication in today’s global
and increasingly interconnected world.
• Throughout the text, cultural differences are
noted and explained in accessible and respectful
ways. The integration of the impact of culture
on communication helps instructors address
real-world challenges, dilemmas, and successes
presented as people communicate across cultural
differences.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
Preface and Acknowledgements.Part I:
FOUNDATIONS OF COMMUNICATION.1. The
Communication Process.2. Communication,
Perception, and the Self.3. Nonverbal
Communication.4. Language.5. Listening.Part
II: INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION.6.
Understanding Interpersonal Communication.7.
Improving Interpersonal Communication and
Relationships.Part III: COMMUNICATION IN
GROUPS.8. Foundations of Understanding
Communication in Groups and Teams.9.
Communicating Effectively in Groups and Teams.
Part IV: PUBLIC COMMUNICATION.10. Developing
Your Speech Topic and Purpose.11. Gathering and
Developing Supporting Materials.12. Delivering Your
Speech.13. Informative Speaking.14. Persuasive
Speaking.15. Invitational Speaking.End Notes.
Glossary.
•
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Edition for Griffin/Bone’s Invitation to
Human Communication - National Geographic,
2nd, 002e, 9781305502833
Instructor’s Web Site for Griffin/Bone’s
Invitation to Human Communication - National
Geographic, 2nd, 002e, 9781305502840
MindTap® Speech for Griffin/Bone’s Invitation to
002e, 9781305505292
Access Card for Griffin/Bone’s Invitation to
2nd, 002e, 9781305505308
Access for Griffin/Bone’s Invitation to Human
Communication - National Geographic, 002e,
9781305505315
Cognero for Griffin/Bone’s Invitation to Human
Communication - National Geographic, 002e,
9781305505322
Cognero® Instant Access for Griffin/Bone’s
Geographic, 002e, 9781305505339
(6 months) Instant Access for Griffin/Bone’s
Geographic, 002e, 9781305505346
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card for Griffin/Bone’s
Geographic, 2nd, 002e, 9781305505353
3P-EBK:INVITATION TO HUMAN
COMMUNICATION, 002e, 9781305856295
CS-EBK: INVITATION TO HUMAN
E-BOOK: INVITATION TO HUMAN
© 2017, 488pp, Paperback, 9781305502826
www.cengageasia.com
27
With intuitive tagging and filtering options, they
maximize their study efforts as they make and
review flashcards, take practice quizzes, view
related content and track their progress all in
one place! Coupled with straightforward course
management, assessment, and analytics for
instructors, COMM4 with COMM4 Online engages
students of all generations and learning styles,
integrates seamlessly into your communication
coursework, and sets the stage for thinking
critically about communication.
COMM 4 (WITH ONLINE, 1 TERM (6
MONTHS) PRINTED ACCESS CARD),
4E
Rudolph F. Verderber, University of Cincinnati; Kathleen S.
Verderber, Northern Kentucky University; Deanna D. Sellnow,
University of Kentucky
Through ongoing research into students’ workflows
and preferences, COMM4 from 4LTR Press
combines an easy-reference, paperback textbook
with Chapter Prep Cards, and an innovative online
experience – all at an affordable price. New for
this edition, students explore COMM4 anywhere,
anytime, and on most devices with COMM4 Online!
With the intuitive StudyBits™ functionality, students
study more effectively and can visually monitor
their own progress. Coupled with straightforward
course management, assessment, and analytics for
instructors, COMM4 with COMM4 Online engages
students of all generations and learning styles, and
integrates seamlessly into your Communication
course.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW 4LTR PRESS ONLINE: Created through
a deep investigation of students’ challenges and
workflows both broadly and in Communication,
COMM4 Online enables students to study how
and when they want−including on their devices!
• Chapter concept boxes offer current information
on careers in communications, social media
trends and their impact and short analyses of the
evolution of various forms of communication.
• With the unique StudyBits™ functionality, students
easily collect notes and create StudyBits™ from
interactive content to collect what’s important.
28
FEATURES
an interactive digital solution, which offers study
tools and the full text narrative, all delivered and
influenced by a deep understanding of student’s
workflow and learning styles. Available as print
with online, print only, or online only, students
have their choice of format all at the same
affordable price.
• Shorter, comprehensive chapters in a modern
accessible format that increases the number of
students who read the chapter without minimizing
coverage for your course.
• Tear-Out Review Cards at the back of the Student
Editions provide students a portable study tool
containing all of the pertinent information for class
and test preparation.
• 4LTR Press Online: Engaging, trackable, and
affordable,the new DGTL platform for COMM4
offers a dynamic way to bring course concepts
to life with interactive learning, study, and exam
preparation tools that support the printed edition
of the text. Provide your students with this robust
array of learning tools to enrich their course
experience. Students gain immediate access
to rich quizzing, videos, simulations, and other
trackable activities. The Engagement Tracker
provides you with the ability to identify at-risk
students while it’s still early enough to help,
and also allows you to see what resources your
student find most valuable.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
SSO ONLINE COMM 4, 004e, 9781305659537
Online Printed Access Card for Verderber/
Verderber/Sellnow’s COMM 4, 004e,
9781305667365
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Online Instant Access for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s COMM 4, 004e, 9781305667334
Cognero® Instant Access for Verderber/
9781305667860
Cognero for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
COMM 4, 004e, 9781305667877
3P-EBK:COMM 4, 004e, 9781305804340
PAC ML ONLINE COMM 4, 004e,
9781305669352
MindLink Online Instant Access for Verderber/
9781305669369
Instructor’s Web Site for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s COMM 4, 004e, 9781305670952
CS-EBK: COMM4, 004e, 9781305832411
PAC STICKER YOUSEEU COMM, 004e,
9781337094818
© 2016, Paperback, 9781305659582
COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, 7E
COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, Seventh Edition,
provides everything students need to strengthen
their interpersonal, group, public speaking, and
media literacy skills-and demonstrates the value of
communication in their own lives. Award-winning,
forward-thinking scholar Julia T. Wood combines
a strong focus on skills development with careful
attention to the research and theory of today’s
most prominent communication scholars, including
current developments in cultural and social diversity
and the impact of technology on communication.
Consistently praised by instructors and students
alike, the text features an engaging, personal
tone, highly readable style, and frequent Student
Voice sections that explore how past students have
experienced key communication concepts. The
text’s comprehensive coverage includes integrated
attention to diversity, early emphasis on public
speaking, and a unique chapter on the role of the
media. It is also packed with interactive, online
study tools that further assist your students as they
explore human communication and become more
confident and effective communicators.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new emphasis of Health Communication has
been integrated throughout the text. A new boxed
feature, Health Communication, is presented in
each chapter highlighting connections between
communication and issues relevant to health. Intext examples and key discussions of this topic
are also integrated throughout the text where
appropriate.
• Chapter 7, Communication and Culture now
covers key dimensions of cultural life (and
intercultural differences).
• Chapter 11, Media and Media Literacy has
been thoroughly revised and expanded to give
substantial focus to social media and current
research assessing the impact of social media
on our lives.
• The Seventh Edition provides not only the most
current research and literature but has also been
streamlined to better fit the needs of the classroom
to now have 16 chapters.
FEATURES
• In COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, Seventh
Edition, students read about communication
theories, research, and skill and then apply
them to their own lives through Communication
Highlight boxes, which provide excerpts from
primary source readings, and Sharpen Your Skills
boxes, which include self-tests and brief activities.
• Coverage of social and cultural diversity is
woven into each chapter not only to reflect our
contemporary society but also to help students
appreciate social diversity and its profound
implications for how we communicate with others.
www.cengageasia.com
29
• Extensive public speaking coverage begins
early in the text, with examples, exercises, and
sample speeches with annotated commentary,
all designed to support speaking as a key course
component. Enriched attention to effective
reasoning-including the Toulmin model-and
discussion of fallacies in reasoning also help
students master public speaking skills.
• Integrated into each chapter, case studies expand
the conversation by allowing students to see
how the theories and principles explored in the
text play very real, important roles in everyday
life. The scenarios and speeches featured in the
case studies are also available as multimedia
presentations.
• “Beyond the Classroom” appears at the end of
chapters in Parts I and II. This feature offers
suggestions for taking the material in the chapter
beyond the classroom in three ways: considering
the chapter’s relevance in the workplace,
probing ethical issues raised in the chapter, and
connecting chapter material to civic and social
engagement with the broader world.
CONTENTS
Brief Contents.Preface. About the Author. Introduction. Part I: FOUNDATIONS OF
COMMUNICATION.1. The World of Communication. 2. Perception and Communication. 3. Communication
and Personal Identity. 4. Listening Effectively. 5. The
Verbal Dimension of Communication. 6. The Nonverbal
Dimension of Communication. 7. Communication
and Culture. Part II: INTERPERSONAL AND
GROUP COMMUNICATION AND MEDIA
LITERACY. 8. Communication in Personal
Relationships. 9. Communication in Groups and
Teams. 10. Communication in Organizations.
11. Media and Media Literacy. Part III: PUBLIC
COMMUNICATION.12. Planning Public Speaking. 13. Researching and Developing Support for
Public Speeches. 14. Organizing and Presenting
Public Speeches. 15. Informative Speaking.
16. Persuasive Speaking. Closing: Pulling
Ideas Together. Appendix A: Annotated Sample
Speeches. Appendix B: Interviewing. Glossary. Reference. Index.
30
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
Card for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives,
7th, 007e, 9781285437606
for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781285437620
CourseMate for Wood’s Communication in Our
Lives, 007e, 9781285437682
Interactive eBook for Wood’s Communication
in Our Lives, 007e, 9781285437699
SpeechStudio 2.0, InfoTrac® Printed Access
Card for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives,
7th, 007e, 9781285437729
SpeechStudio 2.0, InfoTrac® Instant Access
for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781285437736
Interactive Quizzing for Wood’s Communication
in Our Lives, 007e, 9781285447575
MindTap Reader for Wood’s Communication in
Our Lives, 007e, 9781285438092
CS-EBK: COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES,
007e, 9781285804361
MindTap® Speech for Wood’s Communication
in Our Lives, 007e, 9781285782218
Access for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives,
007e, 9781285782492
Access Card for Wood’s Communication in Our
Lives, 007e, 9781285782690
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Wood’s
Communication in Our Lives, 7th, 007e,
9781285864204
3P-EBK:COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES,
007e, 9781285969732
Cognero for Wood’s Communication in Our
Lives, 007e, 9781285975184
Cengage Learning Testing, powered by Cognero
Instant Access for Wood’s Communication in
Our Lives, 007e, 9781285978314
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
eBook: Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781305147485
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate Instant
Access for Wood’s Communication in Our Lives,
007e, 9781305098886
LMS Integrated for CourseMate, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Wood’s Communication in
Our Lives, 007e, 9781305098893
Blackboard MindLink for MindTap®
Communication Instant Access for Wood’s
Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781305098923
1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781305098930
Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 7th, 007e,
9781305098947
Blackboard MindLink for MindTap®
Communication Printed Access Card for
Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 7th, 007e,
9781305098954
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate with
SpeechBuilder Express and InfoTrac® Printed
Access Card for Wood’s Communication in Our
Lives, 7th, 007e, 9781305098909
LMS Integrated for CourseMate, 1 term (6
months) for Wood’s Communication in Our
Lives, 7th, 007e, 9781305098916
Demo MindTap® Speech for Wood’s
Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781305099661
Demo MindTap® Speech Instant Access for
Wood’s Communication in Our Lives, 007e,
9781305099685
3F-EBK:COMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES,
007e, 9781305892804
ACP IAC LMS INTG MT SPEECH
FORCOMMUNICATION IN OUR LIVES, 007e,
9781305825550
© 2015, 480pp, Paperback, 9781285075976
CTE COMMUNICATION MOSAICS, 7E
An Introduction to the Field of Communication with CB
VitalSource eBook
experience, and tools to help you take notes
and organize your studies.COMMUNICATION
MOSAICS: AN INTRODUCTION TO THE FIELD
OF COMMUNICATION, Seventh Edition, combines
the author’s signature first-person narrative style
and popular student commentaries with thoroughly
up-to-date research, theories, and technological
information to provide both an overview of the
field and a practical guide you can immediately
use to improve your personal, professional,
and public communication skills. By beginning
with introductions to the basic processes and
skills central to all communication contexts and
then moving on to how we apply these aspects
of communication in specific contexts such as
interpersonal and public speaking, the text shows you
the importance of developing your communication
skills and gives you the hands-on tools you need
to become a more effective communicator. Jump
into the dynamic world of communication in the
twenty-first century with COMMUNICATION
MOSAICS: AN INTRODUCTION TO THE FIELD
OF COMMUNICATION, Seventh Edition!
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter 14, Mass Communication, now focuses
more on how mass communication affects us and
how we can use mass communication competently
www.cengageasia.com
31
(media literacy) which helps to prepare students
for this form of communication.
• Chapter 15, Digital Media, has been completed
revised to include the types and uses of digital
media, controversies surrounding digital media
and guidelines for responsibly using digital media.
• Chapter 7, Creating Communication Climates,
now includes an elaborated discussion of thirdparty conflict resolution—arbitration and mediation
to help students more fully understand this
communication process.
• Chapter 8, Adapting Communication to Cultures
and Social Communities, now includes a new
section on cultural values and discussion of the
5 dimensions of culture so that students will gain
greater cultural competence.
• Chapter 11, Communication in Groups and
Teams, now includes a new opening example of
health care teams and contains a discussion of
two decision-making methods: standard agenda
and nominal group technique.
• The research base for the book is enriched with
the addition of 170 new references.
• A class or group activity entitled Reflect, Discuss,
Apply has been added to the end material for
each chapter to help readers critically evaluate
important concepts in the text.
• Examples of today’s hot topics including
communication in the workplace and digital
media have been included throughout the text
highlighting the prevalence and understanding of
these issues.
Teams.12. Communication in Organizations.13.
Public Communication.14. Mass Communication.15.
Digital Media.Epilogue.Glossary.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
Preface.PART I: COMMUNICATION CAREERS
AND FOUNDATIONS.1. A First Look at
Communication.2. The Field of Communication
from Historical and Contemporary Perspectives.
PART II: COMMUNICATION PROCESSES AND
SKILLS.3. Perceiving and Understanding.4.
Engaging in Verbal Communication.5. Engaging
in Nonverbal Communication.6. Listening and
Responding to Others.7. Creating Communication
Climates.8. Adapting Communication to Cultures
and Social Communities.PART III: CONTEXTS
OF COMMUNICATION.9. Communication and
Self-Concept.10. Communication in Personal
Relationships.11. Communication in Groups and
32
•
•
Communication Mosaics: An Introduction
to the Field of Communication, 7th, 007e,
9781285063607
PowerLecture with ExamView® and JoinIn™
Student Response System for Wood’s
Communication Mosaics: An Introduction
to the Field of Communication, 7th, 007e,
9781285066974
Gateway, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
007e, 9781285066912
3.0 1-Semester, InfoTrac® Instant Access
007e, 9781285067025
CS-EBK: COMMUNICATION MOSAICS:AN
INTRO TO THE FIELD OF COMM, 007e,
9781285303086
LMS Integrated for CourseMate, 1 term
(6 months) Instant Access for Wood’s
Quizzing with Flash Cards Instant Access
9781285787831
Quizzing Instant Access for Wood’s
Communication Mosaics: An Introduction to
the Field of Communication, 9781285791630
Flash Cards Instant Access for Wood’s
Communication Mosaics: An Introduction to
the Field of Communication, 9781285795430
© 2014, Paperback, 9789814601566
www.cengageasia.com
• NEW CourseMate Express Premium Website
which brings course concepts to life with
interactive learning, study, and exam preparation
tools that support the textbook. Watch student
comprehension soar! CourseMate Express
Premium Website includes interactive teaching
and learning tools including quizzes, flashcards,
videos, and more, and Engagement Tracker,
a first-of-its-kind tool that monitors student
engagement in the course
COMMUNICATING AS
PROFESSIONALS, 3E
CONTENTS
Raymond Archee, University of Western Sydney; Myra
Gurney, University of Western Sydney; Terry Mohan
This text explains all the key communication
concepts and effective strategies students will use
to communicate as professionals, no matter what
career they ultimately choose. It covers modern
communication theory as well as essential practical
skills such as active listening, verbal and non-verbal
communication and negotiation.
FEATURES
• N E W c h a p t e r 5 d e d i c a t e d t o m e d i a t e d
communication, including social networking, with
increased integration of these new communication
forms throughout the text makes students aware
of the advantages and implications of using social
media.
• Opening vignettes: Each chapter begins with an
example or scenario introducing and illustrating
the chapter topics to give students real-world
context to modern communication theory and
essential communication skills.
• Case studies throughout the text provide students
with real-world scenarios of communication in
practice. Comments on these case studies in the
end of chapter material promote further discussion
of communication theory and skills.
• Discussion questions and exercises at the end
of each chapter help students link the concepts
they have learnt to real-world situations and can
be undertaken individually or in groups.
• Search Me! communication terms and relevant
websites at the end of each chapter, and
References at the end of the text enable readers
to investigate the concepts further.
Part 1 Perspectives on professional communication1.
Communication theory and professional practice
2. Language and communication practice3.
Non-verbal communication: meanings without
words4. Intercultural communication 5. Mediated
communication6. Professional communication
researchPart 2 Communication in organisations7.
Concepts and applications in interpersonal
communication8. Communicating in groups
and teams to achieve professional goals9.
Interviewing and negotiating10. Oral reports and
presentationsPart 3 Writing skills in professional
life11. Writing professionally: process and style12.
Writing for the workplace: content and genre13.
Academic writing
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search Me! Communication, 1e, 9780170195201
Communicating as Professionals Instant Access
Code 12 Months, 3e, 9780170231862
Communicating as Professionals CL eBook, 3e,
9780170231879
CourseMate Premium Website, 3e,
9780170231886
Communicating as Professionals CengageNow
Assessment Instant Access Code 6 Months, 3e,
9780170231909
Communication as Professionals CengageNow
Assessment Only, 3e, 9780170231916
Instructor’s Manual, 3e, 9780170231923
PowerPoint Slides, 3e, 9780170231930
Communicating as Professionals ExamView
Test Bank, 3e, 9780170231947
Communicating as Professionals Instructor
Companion Website, 3e, 9780170231961
Artwork, 3e, 9780170231954
www.cengageasia.com
33
•
•
•
•
•
eBook: Communicating as Professionals, 3e,
9780170242813
eBook: Communicating as Professionals with
Student Resource Access, 3e, 9780170243315
Tourism : A Modern Synthesis VitalSource
eBook Institutional License, 4e, 9780170268028
Communicating as Professionals - CourseMate
Express, 3e, 9780170368322
Communicating as Professionals CourseMate
Express Instant Access Code for 12 Months,
3e, 9780170368339
© 2013, 416pp, Paperback, 9780170214971
NON-VERBAL COMMUNICATION
the increasing amount of communication that is
mediated by some form of technology and newly
added text boxes that acquaint readers with cuttingedge research questions and findings, and appeal
to the real-life concerns of students.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The text has been completely updated with the
most recent research in nonverbal communication.
• Due to the increasing amount of communication
that is mediated by some form of technology,
we added new material throughout the book on
nonverbal messages and technology/media.
• Newly added text boxes acquaint readers with
cutting-edge research questions and findings,
and appeal to the real-life concerns of students.
FEATURES
NON-VERBAL COMMUNICATION
IN HUMAN INTERACTION,
Mark L. Knapp, University of Texas at Austin; Judith A. Hall,
Northeastern University; Terrence G. Horgan, University of
Michigan-Flint
NONVERBAL COMMUNICATION IN HUMAN
INTERACTION, 8E, International Edition is the
most comprehensive and readable compendium of
research and theory on nonverbal communication
available today. Written by a communication scholar
and two social psychologists, the book offers an
interdisciplinary approach to the study of nonverbal
communication that shows how it affects a wide
variety of academic interests. The theory and
research included in this text comes from scholars
with a wide variety of academic backgrounds,
including communication, anthropology, counseling,
psychology, psychiatry, and linguistics. The eighth
edition includes new material on nonverbal
messages and technology/media that covers
34
• Written by a communication scholar and two
social psychologists, the book offers a scholarly,
readable, and interdisciplinary approach to the
study of nonverbal communication.
• The theory and research included in this text
comes from scholars with a wide variety of
academic backgrounds, including communication,
anthropology, counseling, psychology, psychiatry,
and linguistics.
• Extensive visuals and an engaging writing style
help students easily understand and relate to the
text’s content.
• Both students and established scholars will benefit
from the in-depth coverage of research and the
rich bibliography.
CONTENTS
PART I: AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF
NONVERBAL COMMUNICATION.1. Nonverbal
Communication: Basic Perspectives.2. The
Roots of Nonverbal Behavior.3. The Ability to
Receive and Send Nonverbal Signals.PART II:
THE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT.4.
The Effects of the Environment on Human
Communication.5. The Effects of Territory and
Personal Space on Human Communication.PART
III: THE COMMUNICATORS.6. The Effects of
Physical Characteristics on Human Communication.
PART IV: THE COMMUNICATORS’ BEHAVIOR.7.
The Effects of Gesture and Posture on Human
www.cengageasia.com
Communication.8. The Effects of Touch on Human
Communication.9. The Effects of the Face on Human
Communication.10. The Effects of Eye Behavior on
Human Communication.11. The Effects of Vocal
Cues that Accompany Spoken Words.PART V:
COMMUNICATING IMPORTANT MESSAGES.12.
Using Nonverbal Behavior in Daily Interaction.13.
Nonverbal Messages in Special Contexts.
ORGANIZATIONAL
COMMUNICATION
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Web Site for Knapp/Hall/Horgan’s Non-verbal
Communication in Human Interaction, 8th,
008e, 9781285083520
Online Instructor’s Resource Manual for Knapp/
Hall/Horgan’s Non-verbal Communication in
Human Interaction, 8th, 008e, 9781285083544
eBook: Nonverbal Communication in Human
Interaction, 008e, 9781285506203
3I-EBK: ISE FOR NONVERBAL COMMUNICATION IN HUMAN INTERACTION, 008e,
9781337008365
© 2014, 528pp, Paperback, 9781285083513
ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION,
7E
Approaches and Processes
Katherine Miller, Texas A&M University
ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION:
APPROACHES AND PROCESSES presents
organizational communication from both a
communication and managerial perspective.
Professor Miller’s clear writing style and consistent
use of examples and case studies result in a text
that undergraduate students will find easy to
understand.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Seven new “Spotlights on Scholarship” – Chapters
2, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, and 14.
• Three new Case Studies – Chapters 8, 12, and 13.
• Totally New Chapter Five – “Constitutive and
Discursive Approaches” This new chapter will
consider the move in organizational communication
scholarship toward emphasis on discourse
processes and on the ways organizations are
constituted through communication.
FEATURES
• Restructured Chapter Four – “Systems and
Cultural Approaches” This chapter will combine
the old Chapters Four and Five into a single
chapter that highlights the metaphors that
dominated organizational communication during
the last several decades of the 20th century.
• Restructured Chapter Six – “Critical and Feminist
www.cengageasia.com
35
Approaches” This chapter will be revised to place
more emphasis on feminist approaches to the
study of organizational communication.
• Restructured Chapter Nine – “Knowledge and
Decision Processes” This chapter will be revised to
move beyond “decision making” to a consideration
of knowledge management processes.
• Updating literature throughout with particular
attention given to the quickly changing areas of
Technology (Chapter 13) and Diversity (Chapter
12).
CONTENTS
Brief Contents.Preface.1. The Challenge of
Organizational Communication.2. Classical
Approaches.3. Human Relations and Human
Resources Approaches. 4. Systems Approaches.
5. Cultural Approaches. 6. Critical Approaches.
7. Socialization Processes. 8. Decision-Making
Processes. 9. Conflict Management Processes.
10. Organizational Change and Leadership
Processes. 11. Processes of Emotion in the
Workplace. 12. Organizational Diversity Processes.
13. Technological. 14. The Changing Landscape of
Organizations. References. Name Index.Subject
Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
36
CourseMate for Miller’s Organizational
Communication: Approaches and Processes,
007e, 9781285439280
Interactive eBook for Miller’s Organizational
007e, 9781285439297
CourseMate, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card for Miller’s Organizational Communication:
Approaches and Processes, 7th, 007e,
9781285439303
CourseMate, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
for Miller’s Organizational Communication:
Approaches and Processes, 007e,
9781285439310
MindTap Reader for Miller’s Organizational
007e, 9781285439327
CS-EBK: ORGANIZATIONAL COMM
APPROACHES PROCESSES, 007e,
9781285803937
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Miller’s
Organizational Communication: Approaches
and Processes, 7th, 007e, 9781285864099
Cognero for Miller’s Oranizational
007e, 9781285975115
Cognero Instant Access for Miller’s Oranizational
007e, 9781285978246
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate
Instant Access for Miller’s Organizational
007e, 9781305099227
(6 months) Instant Access for Miller’s
and Processes, 007e, 9781305099234
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate Printed
Access Card for Miller’s Organizational
7th, 007e, 9781305099241
months) Printed Access Card for Miller’s
and Processes, 7th, 007e, 9781305099258
eBook: Organizational Communication:
Approaches and Processes, 007e,
9781305226166
3F-EBK:ORGANIZATIONAL COMM
9781337000376
PDFEBK:ORGANIZATIONAL COMM
9781337015899
© 2015, 352pp, Hardback, 9781285164205
www.cengageasia.com
PERSUASION
PERSUASION, 13E
Reception and Responsibility, International Edition
Charles U. Larson, Northern Illinois University
Reflecting the latest practices and developments
from the field, PERSUASION: RECEPTION AND
RESPONSIBILITY, 13E, International Edition
examines various aspects of popular culture-politics, mass media, advertising, and the Internet-as they exemplify critical theories of persuasion.
Extremely student friendly, the lively Thirteenth
Edition is packed with timely, real-life examples
of persuasion in action that help students apply
what they’ve learned to everyday life. The new
edition offers expanded coverage of the impact
of fast-growing social network media, while an
increased emphasis on ethics ensures students
consider ethical implications as they develop their
own persuasion skills. Proven author Charles U.
Larson--a respected professor and successful
practitioner--weaves together persuasion theory,
research, and ethics to help students develop skills
as critical consumers of all forms of persuasion as
well as understand their responsibilities as constant
receivers of persuasive messages in today’s 24/7
networked and media-saturated world.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Throughout the innovative Thirteenth Edition a
new emphasis on social network media--such
as Facebook, YouTube, and Twitter--spotlights
how these fast-growing media are changing
persuasion.
• Each chapter includes an expanded number and
type of student activity boxes to keep readers fully
engaged with chapter concepts.
• Increased coverage of two key models of
persuasion--Rank’s Intensify/Downplay Model
and Petty and Cacioppo’s Elaboration Likelihood
Model--is included throughout the text.
• Ensuring students consider ethical issues as they
develop their persuasion skills, the new edition’s
expanded emphasis on ethical issues includes
propaganda and multicultural communication.
• Chapter 2 includes an insightful new section on
lying and deception.
• Chapter 3 features a new section on Visual
Rhetoric and expands the social movement
section.
• The emphasis on the Theory of Reasoned Action
and the role of efficacy is significantly expanded
in Chapter 4.
FEATURES
• Rank’s model is fully integrated throughout the
text.
• Focusing on “The Seven Faces of Persuasion”,
Dr. Larson helps readers thoroughly understand
the role of persuasion in a world that is 1) 24/7
networked and ethically challenged, 2) mediasaturated, 3) filled with advocacy and propaganda,
4) multicultural and diverse, 5) deceptive and filled
with scams, 6) loaded with double speak, and 7)
results-oriented, looking only at the bottom line.
• Intriguing “Propaganda” and “Interactive Media”
boxes engage students in key methods of
persuasion.
CONTENTS
PART I: THEORETICAL PREMISES.
Preface.1. Persuasion in Today’s Changing
World.2. Perspectives on Ethics in Persuasion.3.
Traditional, Artistic, and Humanistic Approaches
to Persuasion.4. Social Scientific Approaches to
Persuasion.5. The Making, Use, and Misuse of
Symbols.6. Tools for Analyzing Language and
Other Persuasive Symbols.PART II: IDENTIFYING
PERSUASIVE FIRST PREMISES.7. Psychological
or Process Premises: The Tools of Motivation
and Emotion.8. Content or Logical Premises in
Persuasion.9. Cultural Premises in Persuasion.10.
Nonverbal Premises in Persuasion.PART III:
APPLICATIONS OF PERSUASIVE PREMISES.11.
The Persuasive Campaign or Movement.12.
www.cengageasia.com
37
Becoming a Persuader.13. Modern Media and
Persuasion.14. The Use of Persuasive Premises in
Advertising and IMC.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
PowerLecture with ExamView, Instructor’s
Resource Manual for Larson’s Persuasion:
Reception and Responsibility, 13th, 013e,
9781133310129
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Larson’s
Persuasion: Reception and Responsibility, 13th,
013e, 9781133310136
Web Site for Larson’s Persuasion: Reception
and Responsibility, 13th, 013e, 9781133490548
eBook: Persuasion: Reception and
Responsibility, 013e, 9781133980780
3I-EBK: ISE PERSUASION:RECEPTION AND
RESPONSIBILITY, 013e, 9781337004947
© 2013, 512pp, Paperback, 9781133490531
PUBLIC SPEAKING
bound format and flexible standalone chapters allow
students to access the topics they need to create
great speeches easily, while Key Points, Quick Tips,
and Checklists help them stay on track. Completely
up to date, the Fifth Edition includes new examples,
new student speech excerpts and full speeches,
new Web Links boxes, new illustrations, and more.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The Fifth Edition features a new special
occasion speech from President Barack Obama
commemorating Nelson Mandela.
• All-new student speech excerpts and full speeches
enable students to draw inspiration from their
peers.
• New Web Links boxes provide websites where
students will find additional information on related
topics--equipping them with resources to explore
chapter concepts in further detail.
• All-new illustrations provide vibrant visual
representations of key topics.
• Completely current, the Fifth Edition is packed with
new examples, updated content, new Checklists,
and up-to-date Key Point boxes throughout.
FEATURES
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS, 5E
The Speaker’s Compact Handbook
Jo Sprague, San Jose State University; Douglas Stuart; David
Bodary, Sinclair Community College
Packing a wealth of insight into a succinct
resource, CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS: THE
SPEAKER’S COMPACT HANDBOOK, 5th Edition,
is a concise reference for the introductory public
speaking course. An excellent value and useful to
students in any major, this brief handbook grounded
in research features speech excerpts and fullspeech examples, illustrations, and critical thinking
questions that students can use on their journey
to becoming effective public speakers. The spiral-
38
• A brief and handy reference, CENGAGE
ADVANTAGE BOOKS: THE SPEAKER’S
COMPACT HANDBOOK presents a distilled
version of the most useful advice gleaned from
centuries of academic research and decades of
practical experience. Easy to store in a backpack,
purse, or coat pocket, it provides a quick reference
whenever and wherever students need it.
• Extremely student friendly, the handbook is
designed around the five steps of public speaking:
Plan, Investigate, Compose, Practice, and
Present.
• Walking students step by step through the entire
speech process, the first four chapters encourage
students to establish a foundation so they can start
thinking about and beginning the task of preparing
a speech, Unit 3 encourages them to take time to
plan their speech, and in Unit 8 they consider the
context in which they will be giving their speech.
• Quick-access review and organizational tools
include Checklists, Key Points, Quick Tips, Web
Links, and Critical Thinking questions at the end
of each chapter.
www.cengageasia.com
CONTENTS
Part I: APPROACHING PUBLIC SPEAKING.1.
Understanding Public Speaking.2. Listening.3.
Speaking Ethically.4. Overcoming Fear of Speaking.
Part II: PRESENTING YOUR SPEECH.5. Vocal
Delivery.6. Physical Delivery.7. Using Presentation
Aids.8. Answering Questions.Part III: PLANNING
YOUR SPEECH.9. Your Preparation Schedule.10.
Topic Selection.11. Audience Analysis.Part
IV: FINDING AND USING RESOURCES.12.
Your Research Strategy.13. Print, Internet, and
Other Electronic Resources.14. Interviewing
People About Your Topic.15. Identifying and
Recording Evidence.Part V: ORGANIZING YOUR
IDEAS AND INFORMATION.16. Exploring Your
Ideas.17. Choosing Points That Work.18. Arranging
Points.19. Outlining.20. Building Sound Arguments.
Part VI: GETTING YOUR IDEAS ACROSS.21.
Informative Strategies.22. Persuasive Strategies.23.
Reasoning.24. Motivational Appeals.25.
Credibility.26. Presentation Aids.Part VII: CRAFTING
YOUR SPEECH.27. Modes of Delivery.28. Language
and Style.29. Capturing Attention and Interest.30.
Introductions and Conclusions.31. Polishing Your
Speech.32. Practicing Your Speech.Part VIII:
SPEECH CONTEXTS.33. Analyzing Speech
Contexts.34. Educational Context.35. Workplace
Context.36. Civic and Political Context.37. Social
and Ceremonial Context.Appendix A: Sample
Speeches and Outlines.Appendix B: Citation
Guidelines.Glossary.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Cognero for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s Cengage
Advantage Books: The Speaker’s Compact
Handbook, 005e, 9781305504974
Cognero® for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s
Cengage Advantage Books: The Speaker’s
Compact Handbook, 005e, 9781305504981
Web Site for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s Cengage
Advantage Books: The Speaker’s Compact
Handbook, 5th, 005e, 9781305504998
Instructor’s Web Site for Sprague/Stuart/
Bodary’s Cengage Advantage Books: The
Speaker’s Compact Handbook, 5th, 005e,
9781305635500
•
•
CS-EBK: ADVANTAGE BKS SPEAKER’S
COMPACT HNDBK, 005e, 9781305982819
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: The
Speaker’s Compact Handbook, 005e,
9781305984653
© 2017, 272pp, Paperback, 9781305280281
PUBLIC SPEAKING, 2E
Choices and Responsibility
William Keith, University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee; Christian
O. Lundberg, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill
Packed with hands-on applications, PUBLIC
SPEAKING: CHOICES AND RESPONSIBILITY, 2e
delivers a practical and up-to-date public speaking
text based on rhetorical theory. It emphasizes the
role of choices and civic engagement/responsibility
throughout in narrative, features, and examples.
Giving students valuable insight, it describes
the audience as a “public” to which the speaker
belongs, rather than as a separate entity defined
only by demographics. The Second Edition includes
new coverage of Monroe’s Motivated Sequence,
discussions of TED talks and PechaKucha,
extended treatment of fallacies, and expanded
emphasis on outlining. New Remix features apply
the latest research in business and social science
to public speaking skills. In addition, MindTap®
digital learning solution helps instructors engage
and transform students into critical thinkers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Each chapter begins with a vignette that builds
directly on a video of a student speech available in
MindTap®, allowing for a quick preview of chapter
www.cengageasia.com
39
topics and skills.
• Coverage of group presentations has been
moved to Chapter 9 on delivery to emphasize
the continuity of skills between solo and group
delivery.
• Chapter 7 on organization now features Monroe’s
Motivated Sequence, demonstrating how it adds
distinctive organizational forms and purposes.
• Discussions of TED talks and PechaKucha are
included in Chapter 12 on informative speaking,
illustrating how these vital new forms add to
students’ choices about how to give compelling
and effective informative presentations. In addition,
extended treatment of fallacies emphasizes their
key features and distinguishes them from good
arguments.
• The text’s expanded emphasis on outlining
includes new examples for student use in the
Appendix.
• Each chapter now includes the Remix, an exciting
new feature that brings together the best of
research in business and social science to bear
on the practical questions of how to become an
excellent public speaker.
FEATURES
• Practical, hands-on “Try It” applications encourage
students to analyze and act on what they just read,
enabling them to put what they learn into practice.
• Based on real questions the authors’ students
asked, the FAQ feature provides hip, interesting
facts and answers to questions that students will
ask and will want to know the answers to.
• The robust instructor’s manual is packed with
countless creative ideas for getting students
thinking on their feet and mastering public
speaking.
Persuasive.13. Special Types of Speeches and
Presentations.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
© 2017, 336pp, Paperback, 9781305261648
CONTENTS
Part I: FUNDAMENTALS OF GOOD SPEAKING.1.
Public Speaking.2. Ethics and the Responsible
Speaker.3. Understanding Audiences and Publics.4.
Becoming a Skilled Listener.Part II: CREATING
A GREAT SPEECH.5. Choosing a Topic and
Purpose.6. Research.7. Organization.Part III:
PRESENTING A GREAT SPEECH.8. Verbal Style.9.
Delivery.10. Presentation Aids.Part IV: KINDS OF
SPEECHES.11. Informative Speaking.12. Being
40
MindTap® Speech for Keith/Lundberg’s Public
Speaking: Choice and Responsibility, 002e,
9781305504516
Access Card for Keith/Lundberg’s Public
Speaking: Choice and Responsibility, 2nd,
002e, 9781305504523
Instant Access for Keith/Lundberg’s Public
Speaking: Choice and Responsibility, 002e,
9781305504530
for Keith/Lundbert’s Public Speaking: Choice
and Responsibility, 002e, 9781305504547
Cognero® Instant Access for Keith/Lundbert’s
Public Speaking: Choice and Responsibility,
002e, 9781305504554
Keith/Lundberg’s Public Speaking: Choice and
Keith/Lundberg’s Public Speaking: Choice and
Responsibility, 2nd, 002e, 9781305504578
Instructor’s Web Site for Keith/Lundbert’s Public
Speaking: Choice and Responsibility, 2nd,
002e, 9781305505100
CS-EBK: PUBLIC SPEAKING CHOICES AND
RESPONSIBILITY, 002e, 9781305982451
eBook: Public Speaking: Choices and
www.cengageasia.com
PUBLIC SPEAKING, 8E
Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society
Clella Jaffe, George Fox University
Offering comprehensive coverage in a concise
format, PUBLIC SPEAKING: CONCEPTS AND
SKILLS FOR A DIVERSE SOCIETY, 8e is a
culturally informed book that never loses sight
of its fundamental purpose: training students to
be effective public speakers and listeners in a
world filled with monumental cultural, political, and
technological changes. It combines 2,500-year-old
principles with up-to-date research into concepts,
skills, theories, applications, and critical-thinking
proficiencies essential for listening and speaking
well. Discussions of classic public speaking topics
are grounded in an awareness of the impact of
cultural nuances-ranging from gender differences
to co-cultures within the United States to the
traditions of other nations. This provides students
with a key element in being an effective public
speaker: a heightened awareness of and sensitivity
to the audience. Reflecting the latest research and
practices, it includes new coverage of listening
competencies, online courses, legacy journalism,
native digital news outlets, MAPit, powerful
language forms, and more. In addition, numerous
sample speeches and interactive skill-building
exercises are available in MindTap.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New and updated information. A new section on
listening competencies incorporates up-to-date
cognitive science research regarding basic skills
(surface processing) versus advanced skills (deep
processing) for listening. Chapter 7 includes
new material about legacy journalism and native
digital news outlets in the rapidly changing world
of journalism; it also introduces MAPit, a new
strategy for evaluating online materials. Chapter
12 features a new section on powerful (versus
powerless) language forms.
• Information about online courses. Reflecting the
increase in nontraditional courses, the Eighth
Edition includes research about online courses
(Chapter 1), information about audiences in online
courses (Chapter 6), and tips for videotaping
speeches (Chapter 14).
• Succinct coverage. Clear and concise, PUBLIC
SPEAKING: CONCEPTS AND SKILLS FOR
A DIVERSE SOCIETY, 8e delivers more
streamlined approach than ever. The briefer
text no longer includes the narrative chapter
with its explanation of narrative theory, but the
new Chapter 18: Special Occasion Speaking
includes the exemplum pattern for narratives and
incorporates the guidelines in Appendix B material
for special occasion speeches.
• Updated references to social events. Completely
up to date, the Eighth Edition includes the most
current examples and illustrations available.
• Enhanced online materials. In response to
reviewer requests for a shorter book, many sample
speeches, Stop and Check boxes, and Build Your
Speech features are available in an interactive
online format.
FEATURES
• Comprehensive, cutting-edge coverage.
Continually setting the standard for excellence,
PUBLIC SPEAKING: CONCEPTS AND SKILLS
FOR A DIVERSE SOCIETY was the first public
speaking textbook to focus on diversity, include
an interpreted speech (given in Spanish and
translated into English), describe invitational
rhetoric, discuss receiver apprehension, and show
alternative patterns of speech organization.
• “Diversity in Practice” boxes. Enhancing the
book’s emphasis on diversity, these insightful
boxes present brief summaries of public speaking
traditions from a range of perspectives. Examples
include ancient cultures (Chapters 1 and 17),
global groups (Chapters 7 and 13), ethnic groups
(Chapters 10 and 15), and co-cultures (Chapters
www.cengageasia.com
41
12 and 14).
• “Ethics in Practice” boxes. PUBLIC SPEAKING
has always emphasized ethical speaking and
listening. Included in most chapters, “Ethics
in Practice” boxes present short examples or
cases that invite students to contemplate the
ethical implications of chapter concepts, using
probing questions that are appropriate for class
discussions.
• “Build Your Speech” boxes. Hands-on skillbuilding activities help students apply text
concepts to actual speechmaking. “Build Your
Speech” boxes provide excellent starting points
for completing speech assignments.
• Critical Thinking and Application Exercises.
End-of-chapter questions help students better
understand and critically evaluate the chapter
content and further apply the skills they learn.
Critical Thinking Exercises are designed for
individual reflection on chapter concepts, while
Application Exercises are designed for group
assignments and in-class discussions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
Preface. 1. Introduction to Public Speaking and
Culture.2. Giving Your First Speech: Developing
Confidence.3. Ethics in a Diverse Society.4.
Effective Listening.5. Selecting Your Topic and
Purpose.6. Audience Analysis.7. Researching
Your Speech in the Digital Age.8. Choosing
Supporting Materials.9. Organizing Your Main
Points.10. Introductions and Conclusions.11.
Outlining Your Speech.12. Choosing Effective
Language.13. Presentation Aids.14. Delivering Your
Speech.15. Informative Speaking.16. Foundations
of Persuasion.17. Persuasive Speaking.18. Special
Occasion Speaking.Appendix A. Speaking in Small
Groups.Appendix B.Glossary.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
42
Instructor’s Web Site (with PowerPoint®,
Cognero, Instructor’s Resource Manual) for
Jaffe’s Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills for
a Diverse Society, 8th, 008e, 9781305076389
MindTap® Speech for Jaffe’s Public Speaking:
Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society, 008e,
9781305076358
•
•
•
•
•
Access for Jaffe’s Public Speaking: Concepts
and Skills for a Diverse Society, 008e,
9781305076365
Access Card for Jaffe’s Public Speaking:
Concepts and Skills for a Diverse Society, 8th,
008e, 9781305076372
for Jaffe’s Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills
for a Diverse Society, 008e, 9781305098701
Cognero Instant Access for Jaffe’s Public
Speaking: Concepts and Skills for a Diverse
Society, 008e, 9781305098718
CourseMate for Jaffe’s Public Speaking:
9781305102545
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0
and InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
for Jaffe’s Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills
3.0 and InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for a Diverse Society, 8th, 008e,
9781305102569
Mindtap Reader for Jaffe’s Public Speaking:
9781305076419
CS-EBK: PUBLIC SPEAKING: CONCEPTS
AND SKILLS FOR A DIV SOC, 008e,
9781305447974
1 term (6 months) Instant Access for Jaffe’s
Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills for a
Diverse Society, 008e, 9781305403451
Jaffe’s Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills for
a Diverse Society, 8th, 008e, 9781305403468
eBook: Public Speaking: Concepts and Skills
© 2016, 352pp, Paperback, 9781285445854
www.cengageasia.com
THE SPEAKER’S HANDBOOK, 11E
Jo Sprague, San Jose State University; Douglas Stuart; David
Bodary, Sinclair Community College
Helping students speak in the classroom and the
boardroom, THE SPEAKER’S HANDBOOK, 11e
covers the entire process of preparing, organizing,
developing, and delivering a speech-making it the
ideal text for students taking a public speaking
course as well as an excellent reference for
experienced speakers. The handbook continues
to offer thorough coverage of ethics, reasoning,
analyzing audience, and diversity. Each chapter
is designed to stand alone so that speakers can
refer only to the sections that meet their needs.
Vivid new graphics in the Eleventh Edition help
illustrate key concepts. Speeches from students
and public figures-including President Obama’s
commemorative speech on the death of Nelson
Mandela-provide relevant speech models as
well as material for analysis. Features such as
For Your Benefit equip students with valuable
tips and advice, while Speaker’s Workshop and
Putting It into Practice activities give students
plenty of hands-on application. New Learning
Objectives and updated Checklists help students
review what they’ve learned. In addition, the new
MindTap for THE SPEAKER’S HANDBOOK
delivers a personalized online learning experience
for students-while enabling instructors to easily
measure skills and outcomes.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW LEARNING OBJECTIVES. At the beginning
of each tabbed part, all-new Learning Objectives
correlate directly with main headings in the
chapters as well as with the Summary at the
end of the chapter. The objectives highlight what
students need to know to process and understand
the chapter-making them an excellent study tool.
• NEW GRAPHICS. Throughout the handbook
vivid new graphics help illustrate key concepts,
including public speaking anxiety, audience
analysis, and generational culture.
• NEW REAL-WORLD EXAMPLES. Full speech
examples from students and public figures provide
speech models and opportunities for analysis.
Speeches by public figures reflect the diversity
of voices that define the current age and include
speeches from heads of state, popular artists,
environmentalists, and interfaith leaders. One new
student speech addresses the idea of teaching
critical media studies in elementary school. New
speeches from public figures include President
Obama’s commemorative speech on the death
of Nelson Mandela, Lupita Nyong’s acceptance
speech at the Academy Awards, and Eboo Patel’s
address on “The Holiness of Common Ground”.
• ADDITIONAL PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS.
The Eleventh Edition features more For Your
Benefit boxes providing practical speech advice
while offering additional insight for speaking in
the classroom as well as the boardroom. Topics
include being aware of urban legends, conducting
interviews, standpoint and bias, using clickers and
cell phones, and being your own personal brand.
• UP-TO-DATE CHECKLISTS. New and updated
Checklists throughout provide students with
frequent opportunities to check their understanding
of topics, such as Questions for Assessing
a Speaker’s Claims, Finding a Balance in
Ethical Decisions, Reducing Your Anxiety,
Describing Your Audiences, Attention-Getting
Techniques, Assessing Your Speaking Image,
Helpful Strategies for Informative Speaking, and
Assessing and Modifying Vocal Behavior.
• NEW INTERACTIVE ONLINE RESOURCE. New
MindTap for THE SPEAKER’S HANDBOOK is a
personalized teaching experience with relevant
assignments that guide students to analyze, apply,
and improve thinking-as well as allow instructors to
measure skills and outcomes with ease. Activities
powered by MindApps, developed specifically for
www.cengageasia.com
43
this discipline, walk students step-by-step through
the process of analyzing sample speeches,
creating a topic, building an outline, practicing,
and presenting their speech.
FEATURES
• ENTIRE CHAPTER DEVOTED TO ETHICS.
Drawing together key points, Chapter 3
“Speaking Ethics” provides thorough guidelines
for responsible speaking. The ethical decisions
speakers make are treated as a series of careful
compromises instead of clear-cut do’s and don’ts.
• DISTINCTIVE COVERAGE OF AUDIENCE
ANALYSIS. Going well beyond audience members’
traits and characteristics, the text also illustrates
how to analyze the processes by which they make
sense of messages (Chapter 7).
• EXTENSIVE COVERAGE OF REASONING.
Reasoning (Chapter 16) is discussed through an
examination of the links people draw between data
and conclusions. The text discusses how people
can logically reach opposite conclusions from the
same evidence, emphasizing the need to spell out
and justify the links in one’s reasoning.
• EMPHASIS ON LANGUAGE. In Chapter 17,
language is presented as a powerful communicative
element-rather than an adornment or frill-to
emphasize the need for thoughtful, sensitive, and
appropriate use of words and symbols.
CONTENTS
Part I: FOUNDATION.1. Understanding Speaking. 2.
Listening.3. Speaking Ethics.4. Addressing Speech
Anxiety.Part II: PREPARATION.5. Planning.6. Topic
Selection and Analysis. 7. Audience Analysis.8.
Research.Part III: ORGANIZATION.9. Transforming
Ideas into Speed Points. 10. Organizing Points.11.
Outlining.12. Connectives. 13. Introductions.14.
Conclusions. Part IV: DEVELOPMENT.15.
Supporting Materials.16. Reasoning.17. Language
and Style.18. Attention and Interest.19. Credibility.20.
Motivational Appeals.21. Informative Strategies.22.
Persuasive Strategies.Part V: PRESENTATION.23.
Modes of Delivery.24. Practice Sessions.25. Vocal
Delivery.26. Physical Delivery.27. Presentation
Aids.28. Adapting to the Speech Situation.29.
Answering Questions.Part VI: CONTEXTS.30.
Analyzing Speech Contexts.31. Educational
44
Context.32. Workplace Context.33. Social and
Ceremonial Context.34. Civic and Political
Context.35. Leadership Across Contexts.Part
VII: SAMPLE SPEECHES.Speeches by Student
Speakers.Speeches by Public Figures.ADDITIONAL
RESOURCES.Guide to Common Pronunciation and
Usage Errors.Glossary of Key Terms.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
MindTap Reader for Sprague’s The Speaker’s
Handbook, 011e, 9781305076471
MindTap® Speech for Sprague’s The Speaker’s
Handbook, 011e, 9781305076440
Access Card for Sprague’s The Speaker’s
Handbook, 11th, 011e, 9781305076457
Access for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s The
Speaker’s Handbook, 011e, 9781305076464
Instructor’s Companion Web Site (with
PowerPoint, Cognero, Instructor’s Resource
Manual) for Sprague’s The Speaker’s Handbook,
11th, 011e, 9781305076693
Cognero for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s The
Cognero Instant Access for Sprague/Stuart/
Bodary’s The Speaker’s Handbook, 011e,
9781305098732
CourseMate for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s The
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express,
for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s The Speaker’s
Handbook, 011e, 9781305105089
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express,
Card for Sprague/Stuart/Bodary’s The Speaker’s
Handbook, 11th, 011e, 9781305105096
CS-EBK: THE SPEAKERS HANDBOOK, 011e,
9781305448148
(6 months) Instant Access for Sprague/Stuart/
Bodary’s The Speaker’s Handbook, 011e,
9781305403475
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Sprague/
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stuart/Bodary’s The Speaker’s Handbook, 11th,
011e, 9781305403482
eBook: The Speaker’s Handbook, 011e,
9781305549432
ACP SSO MT SPEAKERS HNDBK/
COMMUNICATION/HRBRC ESSTL 180 DAY,
011e, 9781305822931
Custom LMS Integrated for MindTap®, 1 term
Printed Access Card for CIS 110 Composition
& Communication I, 011e, 9781305822948
Custom MindTap®, 1 term Instant Access for
CIS 110 Composition & Communication I,
011e, 9781305822955
stom LMS Integrated for MindTap®, 1 term
Instant Access for CIS 110 Composition &
Communication I, 011e, 9781305822962
ACP SSO MT COMP EVERYDAY LIFE&
SPEAKERS HNDBK 180 DAY, 011e,
9781305822979
Custom LMS Integrated for MindTap®, 1 term
Printed Access Card for CIS 112 Accelerated
Composition & Communication, 011e,
9781305822986
Custom LMS Integrated for MindTap®, 1
term Instant Access for CIS 112 Accelerated
Composition & Communication, 011e,
9781305823006
Custom MindTap®, 1 term Instant Access
for CIS 112 Accelerated Composition &
Communication, 011e, 9781305822993
© 2016, 528pp, Spiral, 9781285444611
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE SERIES:
ESSENTIALS OF PUBLIC SPEAKING,
6E
Cheryl Hamilton
Packed with sample speeches illustrating what to
do as well as plenty of examples detailing what not
to do, this value-priced public speaking text equips
students with the essential skills and theories
needed to become an effective public speaker.
ESSENTIALS OF PUBLIC SPEAKING emphasizes
critical thinking as it delivers abundant practical
advice, intriguing discussions on the role of ethics
in public speaking, and up-to-date coverage on
effectively using technology in speech development
and delivery. The sixth edition features a new
streamlined organization, a revised initial chapter
that gets students speaking right away with 11 types
of introductory speeches, and two new chapters
(one on ethics and technology in public speaking
and another on team presentations). You also have
the option of enhancing your students’ learning
experience with a wealth of technology resources
such as CourseMate, which includes access to
videos of sample speeches, text-specific study
tools, the MindTap Reader® interactive eBook,
SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0 speech-outlining
program, the InfoTrac® College Edition online
library, and more.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An improved organization features three units and
12 chapters instead of 14, with many chapters
shortened or combined for clarity and ease of use.
For example, the chapter on verbal supporting
materials and the chapter on visual aids have been
www.cengageasia.com
45
combined into Chapter 7, “Interesting Visual and
Verbal Supporting Materials.”
• A new Chapter 4, “Public Speaking: Make Ethics
and Technology Work For You,” includes expanded
information on the importance and obligation of
ethics (originally in Chapter 1) and new information
on the opportunity that today’s technology gives
speakers, particularly with respect to making
videos. How-to specifics are included for making
YouTube videos, answering interview questions
on Skype, preparing video clips for college or job
applications, and communicating by vlogs.
• A new Chapter 12, “Team Presentations,” includes
expanded coverage of a topic formerly covered
briefly in the chapter on persuasive speaking.
Whether students are working as a team to
research, organize, and present specific content
designed to inform or persuade, or whether
they are interested in problem solving, they will
have all necessary information for quality team
presentations at their fingertips. A variety of
formats are discussed, including the oral report,
symposium, panel, and forum.
• The focus of a completely revised Chapter 1
is changed to “Let’s Start Speaking Now” with
11 types of introductory speeches presented
for immediate use. Short evaluation forms are
included for students to use for self-evaluation
and group evaluation of their strengths and areas
needing improvement.
• A new Quick Start Reference Card (located
near the front of the text) lists valuable speaking
pointers. Students can also use the card to spark
ideas for their next speech or as a checklist prior
to later presentations.
• The book’s Quick Start Guide now includes QR
codes that allow students to use a mobile device to
launch and view videos designed to help improve
their speaking abilities. Each step of preparing a
speech is accompanied by a video that shows dos
and don’ts of the step, helpful tips, and answers
to fears or concerns.
• The “Speaking to Make a Difference” feature
includes six new contemporary speakers; for
instance, author and educator Neil Gaiman (Ch.
1); Harry Potter creator J.K. Rowling (Ch. 2); First
Lady Michelle Obama (Ch. 3); and astrophysicist
46
Neil deGrasse Tyson (Ch. 5). Speakers carried
over from the previous edition include David
Carroll, President Barack Obama, Abraham
Lincoln, Steve Jobs, Barbara Bush, and John F.
Kennedy. Most of the speeches are available in
video format online-links are provided.
• New content includes a new online self-quiz
added for each chapter, a “Confidence Checklist”
for students to use prior to each speech (Ch.
2), a new section on critical listening (Ch. 3), a
reorganized Chapter 7 with new research on using
PowerPoint® and bullets as well as new figures
to illustrate quality visual aids, and a new section
on “Believable Speakers” highlighting Jeff Bezos,
Brian Cox, and Jane McGonigal (Ch. 8).
FEATURES
• End-of-chapter “Personal Skill Building” and
“Collaborative Skill Building” activities promote
critical thinking and offer practice opportunities
for individuals, students working in small groups,
and the class as a whole.
• Critical thinking is emphasized throughout the
text in several ways; for instance, through “Active
Critical Thinking” questions at the end of each
major heading, “Flash Back” boxes that present
advice given by famous Greek and Roman
rhetoricians, and “Flash Forward” features that
encourage students to relate the historical “Flash
Back” information to present day public speaking.
CONTENTS
Part I: FOUNDATIONS.1. Public Speaking:
Let’s Start Speaking Now.2. Building Speaker
Confidence.3. Listening: What Speakers and
Listeners Should Know.4. Public Speaking: Make
Ethics and Technology Work for You.Part II:
PREPARING AND PRESENTING. 5. Analyzing
Your Audience and Selecting a Really Great Topic.6.
Researching, Organizing, and Outlining Your
Topic.7. Interesting Visual and Verbal Supporting
Materials.8. Effective Delivery.Part III: THREE
TYPES OF SPEECHES.9. Informative Speaking.10.
Persuasive Speaking.11. Special Occasion
Speaking.12. Team Presentations.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
www.cengageasia.com
Student Speeches for Critique and Analysis
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DVD, 001e, 9780534512514
Public Speaking: A Service-Learning Approach
for Instructors for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Speaking, 003e, 9780495794141
Public Speaking: A Problem Based Learning
Approach Workbook for Griffin’s Invitation to
Public Speaking, 3rd, 003e, 9780495803522
Public Speaking: An Online Approach for
Instructors Workbook for Griffin’s Invitation to
Public Speaking, 003e, 9780495803539
CourseMate for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
Series: Essentials of Public Speaking, 006e,
9781285446721
Card for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage Series:
Essentials of Public Speaking, 6th, 006e,
9781285446820
3.0, InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant
Access for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
9781285446837
CS-EBK: ADVANTAGE SERIES ESS PUBLIC
SPEAKING, 006e, 9781285802640
MindTap Reader for Hamilton’s Cengage
Advantage Series: Essentials of Public
Speaking, 006e, 9781285780078
MindTap® Speech for Hamilton’s Cengage
Speaking, 006e, 9781285850849
Access Card for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
Series: Essentials of Public Speaking, 6th,
006e, 9781285850863
Access for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
9781285850887
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Hamilton’s
Cengage Advantage Series: Essentials of
Public Speaking, 6th, 006e, 9781285864136
Cognero for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
9781285975139
Cognero Instant Access for Hamilton’s Cengage
Speaking, 006e, 9781285978260
•
•
•
•
•
•
(6 months) Instant Access for Hamilton’s
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech, 1
term (6 months) Instant Access for Hamilton’s
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Hamilton’s
Public Speaking, 6th, 006e, 9781305099210
(6 months) Instant Access for Hamilton’s
months) for Hamilton’s Cengage Advantage
Series: Essentials of Public Speaking, 6th,
006e, 9781305108455
eBook: Cengage Advantage Series: Essentials
of Public Speaking, 006e, 9781305359734
© 2015, 408pp, Paperback, 9781285159454
PUBLIC SPEAKING, 3E
The Evolving Art (with MindTap™ Speech Printed
Access Card)
Stephanie J. Coopman, San Jose State University; James
Lull, San Jose State University
PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING ART is the
first book and integrated technology package to
meet the expectations of today’s students while
both preserving and offering innovative variations
on the well-respected traditions of public speaking
instruction. Throughout the text, in short video
www.cengageasia.com
47
segments, four peer mentors expertly guide
readers through the concepts and strategies
presented in the text. PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE
EVOLVING ART is now available with MindTap
Speech. MindTap Speech represents a new
approach to a customizable, online, user-focused
learning platform. MindTap combines all of a user’s
learning tools-readings, multimedia, activities
and assessments-into a singular Learning Path
that guides the user through the curriculum. This
unique resource empowers instructors with new
assessment capabilities applicable to traditional,
online, and hybrid courses.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW SPEECH BUDDY VIDEOS: these new
segments, especially produced for this edition,
illustrate, and introduce innovative variations
on, the time-tested traditions of public speaking
instruction. With a student-friendly presentation,
the “Buddies” guide users through sound speechbuilding strategies and demonstrate the concepts
presented in the book. Designed to achieve clear
goals and pedagogical outcomes, these mentoring
tools explain, assist, and model in the framework
of a carefully sequenced experience.
• NEW “Apply It in the Workplace” boxes. The
successful “Apply It” boxes of the first two editions
have been revised and expanded. Building on
the concepts presented in the book, this feature
encourages students to apply their new public
speaking skills both outside the classroom and in
professional contexts. The former Apply It boxes,
now called “Apply it in Your Community,” provide
opportunities to use the skills and strategies
learned and apply them in the community.
• The third edition features several new student
and professional speeches, including fifth-grader
Tamia Gaines award-winning speech about
Martin Luther King, Jr., (Chapter 10); California
Academy of Sciences planetarium staff Michael
Josh Roberts giving a presentation on asteroids
(Chapter 11); and college student Tara Flanagan’s
tribute speech about her grandfather (Chapter 16).
• NEW MindTap Speech from Cengage Learning
represents a new approach to a customizable,
online, user-focused learning platform. MindTap
combines all of a user’s learning tools-readings,
48
multimedia, activities and assessments-into a
singular learning system that guides both the
student and instructor through the curriculum.
FEATURES
• PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING ART,
teaches the fundamental goals of public speaking
while exploring the evolving contexts and digital
resources that inform public speaking today.
Popular media-oriented examples provide a
critical guide for both you and your students to
select the ways in which digital culture plays a
role in your public speaking course.
• A unique, practical pedagogical system in the text
-- “Read it, Watch it, Use it, Review it” -- gives
structure to each chapter, and directs students
to the easy-to-access online material. “Apply It”
Boxes give students an opportunity to use their
newly-gained public speaking skills in situations
outside of the classroom.
• This text promotes interactive, peer-based
learning through integrated video segments in
each chapter. The newly updated peer mentors
(Speech Buddies) are supportive guides who offer
speech-making strategies, visually model both
effective and ineffective techniques from research
to delivery to use of presentation aids, and add a
personal connection in a visual medium familiar
to students.
• The text works seamlessly with MindTap Speech;
a customizable, online, and user-focused learning
platform. MindTap combines learning tools-readings, multimedia, activities and assessments-into a singular learning system that guides both
the student and instructor through the curriculum.
CONTENTS
PART I: GETTING STARTED.1. The Evolving Art
of Public Speaking.2. Building Your Confidence.3.
Ethical Speaking and Listening.PART II:
DEVELOPING AND RESEARCHING YOUR
SPEECH.4. Developing Your Purpose and Topic.5.
Adapting to Your Audience.6. Researching Your
Topic.7. Supporting Your Ideas.8. Organizing and
Outlining Your Speech.9. Beginning and Ending Your
Speech.PART III: PRESENTING YOURSELF AND
YOUR IDEAS.10. Using Language Effectively.11.
Integrating Presentation Media.12. Delivering Your
www.cengageasia.com
Speech.PART IV: SPEAKING SITUATIONS.13.
Informative Speaking.14. Persuasive Speaking.15.
Understanding Argument.16. Special Occasion and
Group Speaking.Glossary.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® with eBook Instant
Access Code for Coopman’s Public Speaking:
The Evolving Art, 003e, 9781285432939
WebTutor™ on Blackboard® with eBook Printed
Access Card for Coopman’s Public Speaking:
The Evolving Art, 3rd, 003e, 9781285433097
Student Workbook for Coopman’s Public
Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd, 003e,
9781285433066
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Coopman’s
Public Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd, 003e,
9781285432861
MindTap Reader for Coopman/Lull’s
Public Speaking: The Evolving Art, 003e,
9781285439099
CS-EBK: PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE
EVOLVINGART, 003e, 9781285803357
MindTap® Speech for Coopman/Lull’s
9781285837277
Printed Access Card for Coopman/Lull’s
9781285837284
Access for Coopman/Lull’s Public Speaking:
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Coopman/
Lull’s Public Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd,
003e, 9781285867915
3P-EBK:PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING
ART, 003e, 9781285966076
3P-EBK:PUBLIC SPEAKING: THE EVOLVING
ART, 003e, 9781285966335
Cognero for Coopman/Lull’s Public Speaking:
Cognero Instant Access for Coopman/Lull’s
9781285978291
eBook: Public Speaking: The Evolving Art,
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
003e, 9781305157026
(6 months) Instant Access for Coopman/Lull’s
9781305102354
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Coopman/
Lull’s Public Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd,
003e, 9781305102392
MindTap® Speech Communication (Generic)
with Practice and Present, 003e, 9781305271234
with Practice and Present Printed Access Card,
003e, 9781305271241
with Practice and Present Instant Access, 003e,
9781305271258
(6 months) (Generic) with Practice and Present
Printed Access Card for Coopman/Lull’s Public
Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd Edition, 003e,
9781305406933
(6 months) (Generic) with Practice and Present
Instant Access for Coopman/Lull’s Public
Speaking: The Evolving Art, 3rd Edition, 003e,
9781305406940
3F-EBK:PUBLIC SPEAKING EVOLVING ART,
003e, 9781305893429
© 2015, 416pp, Paperback, 9781285432823
www.cengageasia.com
49
gives students an opportunity to check their
understanding of the chapter concepts before
diving into deeper review and speech preparation.
The quiz is accompanied by a list of additional
study tools for traditional and online review.
FEATURES
NEW EDITION TENTATIVELY IN
FEBRUARY 2016
SPEAK 2 (WITH COURSEMATE WITH
SPEECHBUILDER EXPRESS™ 3.0
1-SEMESTER, INFOTRAC® PRINTED
ACCESS CARD), 2E
Rudolph F. Verderber, University of Cincinnati; Deanna D.
Sellnow, University of Kentucky; Kathleen S. Verderber,
Northern Kentucky University
Created through a “student-tested, facultyapproved” review process with hundreds of
students and faculty, SPEAK2 is an engaging and
accessible solution to accommodate the diverse
lifestyles of today’s learners at a value-based
price. SPEAK2 helps you guide students through
the speech-making process with six Speech Plan
Action Steps and related activities that prompt them
to develop effective speeches. With the help of
sample speeches, instructor prep cards, numerous
online tools, techniques to help address anxiety and
ethical issues, and much more, you will be able to
help students gain an exceptional foundation for
creating and delivering their speeches.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW chapter on ceremonial speeches gives
students the tools they need to make speeches
that are appropriate for a variety of special
occasions.
• NEW chapter on group presentations discusses
the techniques involved in creating successful
group presentations and working as a team to
deliver a cohesive message.
• NEW quick quiz at the end of each chapter
50
an interactive digital solution (CourseMate), and
an eBook, all of which were directly influenced
from student focus groups and surveys and from
interviews with hundreds of faculty and students.
• Shorter comprehensive chapters in a modern
accessible format without minimizing coverage
for your course.
• Tear-out review cards at the back of the Student
Edition provide students with a portable study
tool containing all of the pertinent information for
class preparation.
• Instructor prep cards at the back of the Instructor’s
Edition make preparation simple with detachable
cards for each chapter, offering a quick map
of chapter content, a list of corresponding
PowerPoint® and video resources, additional
examples, and suggested assignments and
discussion questions to help you organize chapter
content efficiently.
• Every 4LTR Press solution comes with
CourseMate, the interactive digital component
that offers a full suite of unique learning tools
that appeal to different learning styles. Quizzes,
games, interactive video activities, MindTap
Reader, and more are only a click away.
• All of the content and resources you expect with a
supplements package that is second to none that
includes an instructor manual, PowerPoint slides,
a testbank, and more.
• Speech action steps provide a six-step process
(with specific substeps) designed to guide
students through a sequential speech planning
process.
CONTENTS
Part I: OVERVIEW.1. Foundations of Public
Speaking.2. Your First Speech.3. Listening and
Responding.Part II: SPEECH PLANNING ACTION
www.cengageasia.com
STEPS.4. Determining an Appropriate Speech
Goal.5. Adapting to Audiences.6. Gathering
and Evaluating Information.7. Organizing and
Outlining.8. Introductions and Conclusions.9.
Presentational Aids.10. Language and Oral
Style.11. Delivery.Part 3: PUBLIC SPEECH
PRESENTATION VARIATIONS.12. Informative
Speeches.13. Persuasive Messages.14. Persuasive
Speeches.15. Ceremonial Speeches.16. Group
Presentations.Endnotes.Index.Quick Quiz Answers.
•
•
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conquer Your Speech Anxiety, 002e,
9780534636180
CourseMate for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
SPEAK, 002e, 9781285444024
SPEAK (TEXT ONLY), 002e, 9781285444086
Access Bind-In (CourseMate, MindTap Reader,
InfoTrac, Stdent Workbook ) for Verderber/
Sellnow/Verderber’s SPEAK (with CourseMate
with SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0 1-Semester,
InfoTrac® Printed Access Card), 2e, 002e,
9781285444154
Online Instructor’s Resource Manual for
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s SPEAK, 2nd,
002e, 9781285443980
Interactive Quizzing for Verderber/Sellnow/
Verderber’s SPEAK, 002e, 9781285444017
InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s SPEAK 2, 002e,
9781285444079
CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0
, InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s SPEAK
2, 002e, 9781285444109
MindTap Reader for Verderber/Sellnow/
CS-EBK: SPEAK, 002e, 9781285805665
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Verderber/
Sellnow/Verderber’s SPEAK, 2nd, 002e,
9781285867908
3P-EBK:PKG SPEAK AND STUDENT WEBSITE
ACCESS CODE, 002e, 9781285974590
Cognero for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
SPEAK 2, 002e, 9781285976372
•
•
Cognero Instant Access for Verderber/Sellnow/
Blackboard MindLink CourseMate Instant
Access for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
SPEAK (with CourseMate with SpeechBuilder
Express™ 3.0 1-Semester, InfoTrac® Printed
Access Card), 002e, 9781305099265
General MindLink for CourseMate Instant
Access for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
Access Card), 002e, 9781305099272
Blackboard MindLink CourseMate Printed
Access Card for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
Access Card), 002e, 9781305099319
General MindLink for CourseMate Printed
Access Card for Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s
Access Card), 002e, 9781305099326
© 2015, 288pp, Paperback, 9781285077055
THE CHALLENGE OF EFFECTIVE
SPEAKING IN A DIGITAL AGE, 16E
Rudolph F. Verderber, University of Cincinnati; Deanna D.
Sellnow, University of Kentucky; Kathleen S. Verderber,
Northern Kentucky University
THE CHALLENGE OF EFFECTIVE SPEAKING IN
A DIGITAL AGE, 16E builds on its strong tradition
of skills-based public speaking instruction with its
Speech Planning Action Steps, which resourcefully
guide students through speech creation as they
www.cengageasia.com
51
progress through six Action Steps: topic selection,
audience analysis and adaptation, research,
organization, presentational aids, and language
and delivery. This new edition clearly integrates
technology and social media in the speeches
themselves and in their delivery in both face-toface and virtual environments. Multimodal public
speaking is now considered throughout the text-that is, oral, written, and visual aspects of speech
planning, developing, presentation, and evaluation
processes. As in previous editions, the authors
provide an exceptional foundation to help students
create and deliver speeches, including the latest
research, numerous in-text activities, techniques
to help student address anxiety, ethical issues that
speakers face, and critical-thinking and reflection
prompts that help students think logically about the
speechmaking process.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW full-length sample speeches on contemporary
topics are provided. Topics include being a firstgeneration college student, civic engagement,
Adderall prescription drug abuse, Internet identity
theft, cyberbullying, and hooking up.
• NEW chapter-opening vignettes are referred to
throughout the chapter as extended examples
of the skills and concepts being addressed. For
example, in Chapter 1, the opener introduces
Diane, who has been asked to speak at her
grandmother’s funeral and doesn’t know where
to begin. As they read the chapter, students
learn how Diane gradually creates her speech.
The chapter closes with Diane’s completed
formal speech outline. In Chapter 2, the opener
introduces Kira, who is struggling with speech
anxiety as she tries to prepare her first classroom
speech. As students read and learn about
concepts and skills in the chapter, Kira serves as
an example. By chapter’s end, Kira’s formal outline
for her speech of self-introduction is offered as an
example for readers.
• NEW and updated material throughout the text
will make your cutting-edge course even more
appealing to students with several new examples
on contemporary topics such as the Sandy
Hook Elementary School shooting (Chapter 1);
gay marriage, texting/talking while driving, and
52
social media hoaxes (Chapters 4 and 5); a new
section on listening challenges rooted in listening
apprehension, preferred listening style, and
listening processing approach (Chapter 3); a new
section on how to conduct research and evaluate
Internet sources (Chapter 6); and new material
about finding and using possible presentational
aids online and creating PowerPoint® slideshows
that won’t put listeners to sleep (Chapter 9).
• NEW Public Speaking in the Real World boxed
feature found in each chapter introduces students
to well-known people who have used public
speaking skills in their profession. Learn about
Julia Roberts and intelligibility (Chapter 1), Harrison
Ford and public speaking anxiety (Chapter 2),
Dr. Phil and listening (Chapter 3), Aaron Sorkin
(producer of HBO’s THE NEWSROOM) and the
rhetorical situation (Chapter 4), Oprah Winfrey
and audience analysis (Chapter 5), Daniel Day
Lewis and Sally Field on doing research (Chapter
6), Steve Jobs on speech organization (Ch. 7),
and much more!
• NEW Impromptu Speech Challenge features in
each chapter provide on-the-spot speech activities
related to concepts and skills discussed in the
chapter.
FEATURES
• An even stronger underpinning of the latest
communication research and theory, including
integration of the concept of the rhetorical situation
as it applies to the steps of the speechmaking
process, new coverage on listening, and thesis
versus preview statements, helps give students
a deeper understanding of the skills they are
learning.
• Engaging coverage of audience analysis
throughout the book begins in Chapter 1, showing
students that speech effectiveness is determined
by the speaker’s ability to understand and adapt
the message to the rhetorical situation. Chapter
4 offers in-depth treatment of the audience
analysis process. Chapter 5 describes specific
ways a speaker can adapt material to each
audience. Chapter 6 discusses how to identify
and select information sources that will best fulfill
the speaker’s goal for the particular audience and
occasion. Chapter 9 focuses on how to create,
www.cengageasia.com
select, and display presentational aids most
effectively for the rhetorical situation. Chapters
10 and 11 further hone how a person might adapt
language choices based on the audience and
situation.
• Early and strong coverage of speech apprehension
in Chapter 2 explains causes of speech
apprehension and presents students with clear
strategies and tactics for becoming confident
speakers.
• Short Reflect on Ethics case studies depict an
ethical challenge (such as plagiarism, ethical use
of statistics and emotion, and appropriate uses of
presentational aids) that someone in the real world
faces, allowing students to think through speakers’
ethical dilemmas.
• Sample speeches chosen to realistically
depict typical beginning student performances,
accompanied by speech assignment activities,
sample adaption plans, full-sentence outlines,
Interactive Video Activities, and Speech Evaluation
Checklists, lay out clear speech direction and help
with evaluation. The checklists provide students
with an understanding of the new speechmaking
skills demonstrated with each assignment.
CONTENTS
Part I: OVERVIEW.1. Foundations of Public
Speaking.2. Your First Speech.3. Listening.Part II:
SPEECH PLANNING ACTION STEPS.4. Speech
Topic and Goal.5. Adapting to Audiences.6.
Gathering and Evaluating Information.7. Organizing
and Outlining.8. Introductions and Conclusions.9.
Presentational Aids.10. Language and Oral Style.11.
Delivery.Part III: Public Speech Presentation
Variations.12. Informative Speeches.13. Persuasive
Messages.14. Persuasive Speeches.15. Ceremonial
Speeches.16. Group Presentations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Verderber/
Verderber/Sellnow’s The Challenge of Effective
Speaking, 16th, 016e, 9781285434858
CourseMate for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
The Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital
Age, 016e, 9781285434865
PowerLecture for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s The Challenge of Effective Speaking,
•
•
16th, 016e, 9781285434872
Gateway Printed Access Card for Verderber/
Speaking, 16th, 016e, 9781285434896
Gateway Printed Access Card for Verderber/
Speaking, 16th, 016e, 9781285434902
Interactive eBook for Verderber/Verderber/
Sellnow’s The Challenge of Effective Speaking
in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781285434919
Gateway Instant Access Code for Verderber/
Speaking, 016e, 9781285434926
Gateway Instant Access Code for Verderber/
Speaking, 016e, 9781285434933
Card for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s The
Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age,
16th, 016e, 9781285434940
Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s The Challenge
of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age, 016e,
9781285434957
Interactive Quizzing for Verderber/Verderber/
in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781285435015
3.0, SpeechStudio 2.0, and InfoTrac® Printed
Access Card for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s
The Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital
Age, 16th, 016e, 9781285434971
3.0, SpeechStudio 2.0, and InfoTrac® Instant
Access for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s The
016e, 9781285434988
MindTap Reader for Verderber/Verderber’s The
016e, 9781285435022
CS-EBK: THE CHALLENGE OF EFFECTIVE
www.cengageasia.com
53
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SPEAKING 16E, 016e, 9781285804507
Instructor Companion Website for Verderber/
Speaking in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781285864181
MindTap® Communication for Verderber/
Sellnow/Verderber’s The Challenge of Effective
MindTap® Communication, 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card for Verderber/Sellnow/
Verderber’s The Challenge of Effective Speaking
in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781285867939
MindTap® Communication, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Verderber/Sellnow/
Verderber’s The Challenge of Effective
Speaking, 016e, 9781285867946
months) Instant Access for Verderber/Verderber/
in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781305099012
months) Instant Access for Verderber/Verderber/
in a Digital Age, 016e, 9781305099050
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Speech, 1
term (6 months) Printed Access Card for
Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s The Challenge
of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age, 16th,
016e, 9781305099074
eBook: The Challenge of Effective Speaking in
a Digital Age, 016e, 9781305187528
months) for Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow’s The
16th, 016e, 9781305099036
Demo MindTap® Speech for Verderber/
Sellnow/Verderber’s The Challenge of Effective
Demo MindTap® Speech Instant Access for
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber’s The Challenge
of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age, 016e,
9781305099746
© 2015, 400pp, Paperback, 9781285094847
54
THE RHETORICAL ACT, 5E
Thinking, Speaking, and Writing Critically
Karlyn Kohrs Campbell, University of Minnesota; Susan
Schultz Huxman, Elliott School of Communication, The
Wichita State University; Thomas A. Burkholder, Southwest
Texas State University
THE RHETORICAL ACT: THINKING, SPEAKING,
AND WRITING CRITICALLY, Fifth Edition, teaches
liberal arts students how to craft and critique
rhetorical messages that influence, inviting and
enabling them to become articulate rhetors and
critics of the world around them. The new edition
maintains a traditional humanistic approach to
rhetoric, while extending the scope and relevance
of the text. THE RHETORICAL ACT reaffirms the
ancient Aristotelian and Ciceronian relationships
between art and practice-one cannot master
rhetorical skills without an understanding of the
theory on which such skills are based. The text
combines thorough coverage of rhetorical criticism,
media literacy, and strategic public speaking,
providing a solid grounding in essential concepts
while helping students hone their skills in each area.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New material for analysis throughout the bookincluding both familiar “classics” from U.S.
rhetorical history and compelling current examples
from popular culture-allows students to practice
applying critical concepts. In selected cases,
the authors include Internet addresses for
other recommended materials that bring to life
the rhetorical theories and principles that are
explained in the book.
• The new edition features major revisions to key
chapters, including additional content; reference
www.cengageasia.com
to current research and theory; new strategic
speaking assignments; examples of complete
student speeches; and updated coverage of
media, including the latest technology.
• Chapter 5, “The Resources of Argument,” includes
new material drawn from the research of classical
scholars that enlarges our understanding of the
enthymeme. The material is illustrated by reference
to the speech of Robert Kennedy referred to in the
Prologue, President John Kennedy’s speech in
Berlin, and President Obama’s speech after the
shootings in Tucson, Arizona.
• Chapter 12, “Understanding Visual Rhetoric,”
incorporates analysis of the changes in technology
that have made all of us visual rhetors.
• Chapter 13, “Understanding the Medium of
Transmission,” details the fundamentals of media
literacy with examples and illustrates the media’s
high ethos appeal. It explores the implications
of mediated exchanges in which who speaks
is unknown, and notes the different form of
“reading” that occurs on social media and the
communicative paradoxes social media create.
Finally, it explores the relationship between mass
media and social reform and asks whether social
movements can emerge out of socially mediated
communication.
FEATURES
• The prologue and epilogue address why studying
rhetoric is important and what the discipline of
rhetoric entails, both within the liberal arts and
a general education curriculum. The preface is
written for beginning students, while the epilogue
is written for advanced students and instructor
audiences.
• The exercise section of each chapter reflects the
book’s focus on three areas of rhetoric: critical
thinking, analytical writing, and strategic public
speaking.
• The text’s content and exercises reflect the ancient
idea of the relationship between art and practiceyou cannot improve a skill without understanding
the theory, concepts, and ideas on which it is
based, and you cannot truly understand the theory
unless you use and test it in practice.
• The text approaches rhetoric in all its varieties as
a “strategy to encompass a situation” (Kenneth
Burke) and as “that art or talent by which discourse
is adapted to its end” (George Campbell).
• The authors treat rhetorical action as a joint
effort of rhetor and audience, emphasizing the
audience’s active, collaborative role, including
the creation of enthymemes as “the substance of
persuasion.” They also treat all forms of rhetoric
as points on a single continuum of influence, rather
than offering separate treatment of speaking or
writing to inform, entertain or persuade.
CONTENTS
Prologue: “Why Study Rhetoric?”Part I:
FUNDAMENTALS OF RHETORICAL ACTION.
1. A Rhetorical Perspective.2. Reading Rhetorical
Acts.3. Crafting Your Rhetorical Act.Part II:
RESOURCES FOR RHETORICAL ACTION.4.
The Resources of Evidence.5. The Resources of
Argument.6. The Resources of Organization.7.
The Resources of Language.Part III: CONTEXTS
OF RHETORICAL ACTION. 8. Challenges Arising
from the Audience.9. Challenges Arising from
the Subject and Purpose.10. Opportunities and
Challenges Arising from the Rhetor.Part IV:
SPECIAL CONSTRAINTS ON RHETORICAL
ACTION. 11. Understanding Evaluation.12.
Understanding Visual Rhetoric.13. Understanding
the Medium of Transmission.14. Understanding
Occasion.Epilogue: “What Is Rhetoric?”Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
CS-EBK: THE RHETORICAL ACT:THINK/
SPEAK/WRITING CRITICALLY, 005e,
9781285804293
Instructor Companion Website (Cognero,Web
Quizzing, Essay Quizzing) for Campbell/
Huxman/Burkholder’s The Rhetorical Act:
Thinking, Speaking and Writing Critically, 5th,
005e, 9781285848648
Cognero for Campbell/Huxman/Burkholder’s
The Rhetorical Act: Thinking, Speaking, and
Writing Critically, 005e, 9781285974927
Cognero Instant Access for Campbell/Huxman/
Burkholder’s The Rhetorical Act: Thinking,
Speaking, and Writing Critically, 005e,
9781285978055
3P-EBK:THE RHETORICAL ACT:THINK/
SPEAK/WRITING CRITICALLY, 005e,
9781305156234
www.cengageasia.com
55
•
eBook: The Rhetorical Act: Thinking, Speaking,
and Writing Critically, 005e, 9781305218659
© 2015, 384pp, Paperback, 9781133313793
tragedies such as the Indonesian tsunami. These
young explorers share speaking tips and advice
on how they communicate with large and small
audiences of all ages.
• NEW streamlined organization of 16 chapters,
with “reasoning and persuasion” combined in
Chapter 15.
FEATURES
CTE INVITATION TO PUBLIC
SPEAKING - NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC
EDITION WITH CB VITALSOURCE
EBOOK, 5E
Cindy L. Griffin, Colorado State University
experience, and tools to help you take notes and
organize your studies. INVITATION TO PUBLIC
SPEAKING was designed to provide you with solid
public speaking skills that will serve you well. This
text shows you the power and importance of public
speaking in your life as well as in the community.
This special National Geographic Learning edition
includes dynamic and exciting stories and tips
from young people who are committed to sharing
their passion for conservation and learning,
accompanied by spectacular National Geographic
photographs. Speech-building help and examples
of student speeches in every chapter help you
understand the basic concepts so that you learn
how to give successful speeches.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW National Geographic Learning edition
provides stories of “young explorers” who work
with National Geographic on a variety of projectsfrom exploring the oceans to documenting human
56
• Sample student speech outlines and full speeches
(with author commentary) provide real-life models
for students to follow.
• Practicing the Public Dialogue boxes provide
specific exercises and activities for individual or
group work.
• Civic Engagement in Action boxes provide real-life
stories of how individuals have made a difference
in their communities through public activity,
including speaking out. CourseMate references
show students how they can learn more about
each person and activity.
• Ethical Moment boxes provide examples of
individuals who have spoken or acted ethically (for
example, Martin Luther King, Jr.) or unethically (for
example, someone cyberbullying a fellow student).
“What Do You Think?” questions help students
think critically about each example.
• A Quick-Start Guide at the beginning of the text
helps students get started on their first class
presentation.
• Author Cindy Griffin emphasizes civil, audiencecentered discourse in an inviting, down-to-earth
manner.
• NEW MindTap Speech from Cengage Learning
represents a new approach to a customizable,
online, user-focused learning platform. MindTap
combines all of a user’s learning tools-readings,
multimedia, activities and assessments-into a
singular Learning Path that guides the student
and instructor through the curriculum.
CONTENTS
1. Why Speak in Public?2. Effective Listening.3.
Developing Your Speech Topic and Purpose.4.
Your Audience and Speaking Environment.5.
Gathering Supporting Materials.6. Developing and
Supporting Your Ideas.7. Organizing and Outlining
Your Speech.8. Introductions and Conclusions.9.
www.cengageasia.com
Language.10. Delivering Your Speech.11. Visual
Aids.12. Informative Speaking.13. Invitational
Speaking.14. Persuasive Speaking.15. Persuasion
and Reasoning.16. Speaking on Special Occasions.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
CS-EBK: INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING
NAT GEOGRAPHIC BRANDED, 005e,
9781285804156
Access for Griffin’s Invitation to Public Speaking,
005e, 9781285850832
Cognero Instant Access for Griffin’s Invitation to
Public Speaking - National Geographic Edition,
005e, 9781285978451
months) Instant Access for Griffin’s Invitation to
005e, 9781305099098
months) Instant Access for Griffin’s Invitation to
005e, 9781305103788
© 2014, Paperback, 9789814617055
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS:
BUILDING A SPEECH, 8E
Sheldon Metcalfe, Catonsville Community College
With 19 chapters organized into five units, BUILDING
A SPEECH, 8th EDITION guides students through
the step-by-step process of developing public
speaking skills through observation, peer criticism,
personal experience and instructor guidance.
Readings and exercises help students draft
informative and persuasive speeches and improves
their research and speechwriting skills. Topics
such as apprehension and listening help students
realize that they are not alone in their struggle to
find the confidence to speak in public. BUILDING A
SPEECH is grounded in the philosophy that students
can master the steps of speech construction when
provided with a caring environment, clear direction,
and creative examples. Plus, this new Eighth Edition
of BUILDING A SPEECH -- A Cengage Advantage
Book -- continues the tradition of providing proven
texts at lower prices.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• “Understanding and Reducing Your Apprehension”
is now presented as Chapter 2 to help students
handle this anxiety early in the course.
• Chapter 1, “Introducing the Study of Public
Speaking,” includes a new discussion of past
and present speakers who have influenced our
modern world.
• Boxed Examples have been updated in most
chapters, and include topics such as political
lightening rods Nancy Pelosi and Sarah Palin
and how public perception has changed over
time regarding the policies and actions of these
controversial political women.
• Chapter 6, “Considering the Ethics of Public
Speaking,” includes updated examples of the
ethical lapses of prominent speakers in business
and politics.
• In Chapter 9, “Choosing Supporting Materials,”
polls, studies, and startling statistics are more
clearly clarified and indicated.
• Terminology in the electronic media section
has been updated and revised to help student
speakers understand how current advancements
such as audience response systems, document
cameras, whiteboards, touch screens, and file
capturing can help speakers create visuals
more easily and stimulate added interest among
listeners.
FEATURES
• A step-by-step, building block approach
characterizes this text.
• A five-unit structure organizes the text into
comprehensible, useful material that helps
students craft and present a variety of speech
types.
www.cengageasia.com
57
• A step-by-step, building block approach
characterizes this text.
• A five-unit structure organizes the text into
comprehensible, useful material that helps
students craft and present a variety of speech
types.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1: E Surveying the Landscape.1. Introducing
the Study of Public Speaking. 2. Understanding
and Reducing Your Apprehension.3. Building
Your First Speech.4. Analyzing Your Audience.5.
Improving Your Listening Skills.6. Considering the
Ethics of Public Speaking.UNIT II: Preparing the
Foundation.7. Selecting the Topic and Purpose.8.
Conducting Research.9. Choosing Supporting
Materials.UNIT III: Creating the Structure.10.
Organizing the Body of the Speech.11. Selecting
the Introduction and Conclusion.UNIT IV: Refining
the Appearance.12. Using Audiovisual Aids.13.
Considering Language.14. Developing the
Delivery.UNIT V: Considering Different Types of
Structures.15. Speaking to Inform.16. Speaking to
Persuade.17. Speaking to Persuade: Motivating
Audiences.18. Speaking for Special Occasions.19.
Speaking in Groups.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
58
WebTutor™ ToolBox on WebCT™ Printed
Access Card, 001e, 9780534274887
WebTutor™ ToolBox on Blackboard® Printed
Access Card, 001e, 9780534274894
WebTutor™ ToolBox for WebCT™ Instant
Access Code, 001e, 9780534274900
WebTutor™ ToolBox for Blackboard® Instant
Access Code, 001e, 9780534274917
CS-EBK: BUILDING A SPEECH, 008e,
9781133345763
Intructor’s Resource Manual for Metcalfe’s
Building a Speech, 8th, 008e, 9781133489719
SpeechBuilder Express™, InfoTrac® Instant
Access Code for Metcalfe’s Cengage
Advantage Books: Building a Speech, 008e,
9781133489740
Speech Builder Express, InfoTrac, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card for Metcalfe’s
Cengage Advantage Books: Building a Speech,
8th, 008e, 9781133489757
Speech Builder Express, InfoTrac, 1 term (6
months) Instant Access for Metcalfe’s Cengage
•
•
•
•
•
9781133489764
Web Site for Metcalfe’s Building a Speech, 8th,
008e, 9781133489771
SpeechBuilder Express™, InfoTrac®
Printed Access Card for Metcalfe’s Cengage
9781133489788
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Metcalfe’s
Building a Speech, 8th, 008e, 9781133490555
KD-EBK:BUILDING A SPEECH, 008e,
9781133666301
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: Building a
Speech, 008e, 9781133973843
© 2013, 432pp, Paperback, 9781111348373
INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING
HANDBOOK
Cindy L. Griffin, Colorado State University
Grounded in rhetorical tradition while offering a fresh
perspective, INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING
HANDBOOK helps students understand the power
and importance of public speaking--in their lives
and in greater society. Intended for the introductory
public speaking course, INVITATION TO PUBLIC
SPEAKING HANDBOOK engages students in the
public dialogue, encourages civic engagement, and
illustrates how they will apply speaking skills in their
course work and throughout their careers. Speechbuilding exercises, thoughtful real-life examples,
and an engaging voice help students comprehend
public speaking as an activity to be engaged in
with others, and prepares them to enter the public
dialogue. INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING
HANDBOOK also features the most comprehensive
integrated technology program available, giving
www.cengageasia.com
students more interactive skill-building practice for
public speaking.
FEATURES
• New spiral bound-tabbed handbook format.
• “Civic Engagement in Action” boxes, featured
on the part opening tabs, focus on people using
their voices to create change. From well-known
people such as Ishmael Beah and Angelina Jolie,
to “everyday” individuals who have spoken publicly
in their community, these examples empower
students to use their public speaking skills to
impact the public dialogue.
• “Checklist” boxes throughout the text highlight
key points that students can apply directly to their
own speeches, such as how to evaluate Internet
sources. New “Tips” boxes throughout the text
highlight useful suggestions, such as tips for
brainstorming speech topics.
• The “Building Skills & Confidence” tab features
the book’s many skill-building and critical-thinking
exercises and can be assigned as homework or
for independent study. These activities are all
available in one tab so students know right where
to go to complete exercises.
• “Speaking at Work” boxes indicate concepts
that students can apply to their working lives.
“Speaking across Differences” boxes point out
topics discussed in the text related to culture and
diversity.
• The Premium Website offers a variety of rich
learning resources designed to enhance the
student experience. These resources include
an enhanced eBook, Audio Study Tools chapter
downloads, Interactive Video Activities, Speech
Builder Express™ 3.0, self-assessments, images,
and Web resources. All resources are mapped to
both key discipline learning concepts as well as
specific chapter learn lists.
• Assign and Assess with Speech Studio!
Speech Studio is an online video upload and
grading program that improves the learning
comprehension of your public speaking students.
This unique resource empowers instructors
with new assessment capability applicable for
traditional, online, and hybrid courses. With
Speech Studio, students can upload video files of
practice speeches or final performances, comment
on their peers’ speeches, and review their grades
and instructor feedback. Instructors create
courses and assignments, comment on and grade
student speeches with a library of comments and
grading rubrics, and allow peer review. Grades
flow into a gradebook that allows instructors to
easily manage their course from within Speech
Studio. Available to be packaged with this title.
• Improved Speech Practice: Organized by chapter
in the “Building Skills & Practice” tab, “Practicing
the Public Dialogue” boxes offer manageable inclass skill exercises. Each step prompts students
to complete an activity that builds toward preparing
a speech. If students complete every speech step
in the book, they will have prepared an entire
speech. (Steps also can be completed online
using the Speech Builder Express™ 3.0 speechoutlining software.)
• Real-world ethics issues and dilemmas are
integrated throughout the text and are spotlighted
in “Ethical Moments” features. These “mini case
studies” examine speech gaffes to help students
better understand the critical role of ethics in
public speaking. Thorough coverage of plagiarism
concepts includes how to deal with problems
typically encountered with Internet research (for
example, no author listed for an article), how to
gain permission to use Internet materials, and how
to cite Internet materials in a speech.
• Text coverage and speech examples are based
on service-learning experiences, reinforcing the
role of public speaking outside the classroom and
in the public dialogue. “Public Speaking & Service
Learning” essays are available on the book’s
Premium Website.
CONTENTS
Part I: THE BASICS.1. Why Speak in Public?2.
Entering the Public Dialogue: Your First Speech.3.
Coping with Speaking Anxiety.4. Effective Listening.
Appendix A: Building Skills & Confidence.Part
II: TOPIC AND AUDIENCE.5. Your Speech
Topic and Purpose.6. Your Audience and
Speaking Environment.Part III: RESEARCH.7.
Gathering Supporting Materials.8. Research
Materials Online and at the Library.9. Conduct
Research Interviews.Part IV: ORGANIZATION.10.
Organizing Your Speech.11. Outlining Your
www.cengageasia.com
59
Speech.12. Introductions and Conclusions.Part V:
DEVELOPMENT.13. Developing and Supporting
Your Ideas.14. Introduction to Reasoning.15.
Audience-Centered Language.16. Language and
Style.Part VI: DELIVERY AND VISUAL AIDS.17.
Methods of Delivery.18. Verbal and Nonverbal
Components of Delivery.19. Visual Aids: Purposes
and Contents.20. Visual Aids: Types and Formats.
Part VII: TYPES OF SPEAKING.21. Informative
Speaking.22. Invitational Speaking.23. Persuasive
Speaking.24. Persuasion and Reasoning.Part VIII:
BEYOND THE CLASSROOM.25. Speaking on
Special Occasions.26. Speaking in Small Groups.
Appendix B: Recording Your Research Sources.
•
•
•
•
•
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
60
Teaching Invitational Speech DVD for
Griffin’s Invitation to Public Speaking, 002e,
9780495187684
Public Speaking: A Service-Learning Approach
for Instructors for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Speaking, 003e, 9780495794141
Public Speaking: A Problem Based Learning
Approach Workbook for Griffin’s Invitation to
Public Speaking, 3rd, 003e, 9780495803522
Public Speaking: An Online Approach for
Instructors Workbook for Griffin’s Invitation to
WebTutor™ on WebCT™, 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card for Griffin’s Invitation
to Public Speaking Handbook, 001e,
9781439084854
WebTutor™ on WebCT™, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Speaking Handbook, 001e, 9781439084861
PowerLecture with ExamView® and JoinIn™
Student Response System for Griffin’s
Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook, 001e,
9781439084885
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Griffin’s
9781439084960
Web Site for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
WebTutor™ on Blackboard®, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card for Griffin’s
9781439085073
WebTutor™ on Blackboard®, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Premium Web Site for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Audio Study Tools for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Interactive Video for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Premium Web Site, Interactive Video,
SpeechBuilder Express™, Audio Study Tools,
eBook, Speech Studio, InfoTrac®, 1 term
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Griffin’s
9780495902317
Premium Web Site, Interactive Video,
SpeechBuilder Express™, Audio Study Tools,
eBook, InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant
Access for Griffin’s Invitation to Public Speaking
Handbook, 001e, 9780495902324
Enhanced eBook for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
Premium Web Site, Enhanced eBook, Interactive
Video, SpeechBuilder Express™, Audio Study
Tools, InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Instant
Access for Griffin’s Invitation to Public Speaking
Handbook, 001e, 9780538486101
Premium Web Site, Enhanced eBook, Interactive
Video, SpeechBuilder Express™, Audio Study
Tools, InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for Griffin’s Invitation to Public
eBook: Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook,
001e, 9781111152017
CS-EBK: INVITATION TO PUBLIC SPEAKING
HANDBOOK, 001e, 9781111158910
eBook: Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook,
001e, 9781133380665
ACP SSO MT INVITATION TO PUBLIC
SPEAKING HDBK 180 DAYS, 001e,
9781305821132
© 2011, 592pp, Spiral, 9781439035863
www.cengageasia.com
RESEARCH METHODS IN
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
researching communication topics.
• Offers a strong focus on the basics of documentary
and library research, including developing
and refining research questions, writing and
organizing, beginning investigation of a topic, and
acquiring tools that make the research process
efficient.
• Includes clear descriptions of each type of
communication research source available.
• Uses updated APA style throughout, and includes
extensive coverage of how to cite Internet sources
correctly.
CONTENTS
COMMUNICATION RESEARCH, 7E
Strategies and Sources, International Edition
Rebecca B. Rubin, Kent State University; Alan M. Rubin,
Kent State University; Paul M. Haridakis, Kent State
University
Designed to help students learn how to successfully
use literature and other sources in writing effective
papers, COMMUNICATION RESEARCH:
STRATEGIES AND SOURCES, International
Edition, demystifies the research process by
helping students master library skills, scholarly
writing and the latest research technology tools. In
addition, this communication research text places
special emphasis on using library resources to
help students effectively strategize, develop, and
complete communication research. The new edition
welcomes talented scholar, Paul Haridakis, as a
new coauthor on the book.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Offers updated sources and exercise questions.
• Includes boxed examples of student projects at
the end of Chapters 1-8 to illustrate how students
have applied chapter information successfully.
• Makes searching Internet and electronic databases
easier with actual screen shots from the major
search engines.
PART I: COMMUNICATION RESEARCH
STRATEGIES.1. Studying Communication.2.
Searching the Communication Literature.3. Using
Computers to Search Electronic Databases.4. Using
the Internet for Communication Research. PART
II: COMMUNICATION RESEARCH SOURCES. 5.
General Sources. 6. Access Tools. 7. Communication
Periodicals. 8. Information Compilations. PART III:
COMMUNICATION RESEARCH PROCESSES.
9. The Process of Communication Research. 10.
Designing the Communication Research Project. 11.
Preparing Research Projects. 12. Writing Research
Papers. Appendix A: APA Style Basics. Appendix
B: Glossary.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
eBook: Communication Research: Strategies
and Sources, 007e, 9781439065532
and Sources, 007e, 9781133380108
© 2010, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495793441
FEATURES
• Includes exercises and examples at the end of
each chapter to help students apply the text’s
concepts.
• Is the only text on the market to focus on
sources and strategies for selecting, refining, and
www.cengageasia.com
61
facilitate his/her understanding of important
concepts.
CONTENTS
THE BASICS OF COMMUNICATION
RESEARCH (WITH INFOTRAC®)
Leslie A. Baxter, University of Iowa; Earl R. Babbie,
Chapman University, Berkeley
Combining the time tested classical work of
Earl Babbie with the insights of one of the most
recognized and respected names in speech
communication research, THE BASICS OF
COMMUNICATION RESEARCH is the book for the
Communication research methods course. With the
authors’ collective experience teaching research
methods and as active researchers themselves
you will find this text to be the authoritative text for
your course. The authors frame research as a way
of knowing, and provide balanced treatment to both
quantitative and qualitative research traditions in
communication research and present it in a student
friendly and engaging format. It provides in-depth
treatment of the role of reasoning in the research
enterprise and how this reasoning process plays
itself out in planning and writing a research proposal
and report.
FEATURES
• The student gains an understanding of the
complete method tool kit available in studying
communicationboth quantitative and qualitative.
• Quantitative and qualitative approaches to
communication received balanced treatment in
the text.
• The student learns how to plan, produce and write
up research and how to critically evaluate others’
research about communication.
• The student is encouraged to view research as an
extension of normal, everyday reasoning.
• The student is provided with user-friendly prose
and examples drawn from communication to
62
Part One: INTRODUCTION TO SCIENTIFIC
INQUIRY ABOUT COMMUNICATION.1.
Human Inquiry and Scientific Inquiry about
Communication.2. Basic Building Blocks in
Conducting Communication Research.3. Paradigms
of Knowing in Communication Research.4. Logic
Systems and Theory in Communication Research.5.
The Ethics of Communication Research.Part Two:
QUANTITATIVE COMMUNICATION RESEARCH.
6. Conceptualization and Operationalization.7.
The Logic of Sampling.8. Survey Research.9.
Experiments.10. Quantitative Text Analysis.11.
The Basics of Quantitative Data Analysis.12.
Inferential Statistics in Quantitative Data Analysis.
Part Three: QUALITATIVE COMMUNICATION
RESEARCH.13. Participant Observation. 14.
Qualitative Interviewing. 15. Social Text Analysis.16.
Qualitative Data Analysis.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baxter/Babbie’s The Basics of Communication
Research, 001e, 9780534507923
ExamView (Windows/Macintosh) for Baxter/
Babbie’s The Basics of Communication
Research, 001e, 9780534507961
Web Site for Baxter/Babbie’s The Basics
of Communication Research, 001e,
9780534508579
Instructor’s Resourse Manual for Baxter/
Babbie’s The Basics of Communication
Research, 001e, 9780534508418
CS-EBK: THE BASICS OF COMMUNICATION
RESEARCH, 001e, 9781111946579
eBook: The Basics of Communication Research,
001e, 9781133081135
eBook: The Basics of Communication Research,
001e, 9781133381402
© 2004, 480pp, Paperback, 9780534507787
www.cengageasia.com
SMALL GROUP
COMMUNICATION
IN MIXED COMPANY, 9E
Communicating in Small Groups
J. Dan Rothwell, Cabrillo College
Featuring a student-friendly narrative approach, IN
MIXED COMPANY: COMMUNICATING IN SMALL
GROUPS, 9th Edition, combines solid theory, realworld examples, interactive applications, and the
latest research on small group communication.
Following the central unifying theme of cooperation,
the text uses the communication competence model
to guide discussions of key small group concepts
and processes. It includes systems theory as a key
theoretical component and continues its unique
emphasis on the role of power in small group
communication. Thoroughly revised and updated,
the ninth edition integrates business-oriented
and workplace examples, surveys, and studies
throughout. Doubling the coverage of group roles,
the text includes expanded discussions of the types
of informal group roles as well as comprehensive
explanations of task, maintenance, and disruptive
roles. Discussion of technology and its influence
on small group communication also has been
expanded throughout the text. Helping students
put what they learn into practice, new interactive
activities and exercises have been added to the
text, while interactive pre- and post-quizzes are
included in MindTap.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Completely up to date and meticulously edited,
the new streamlined IN MIXED COMPANY:
COMMUNICATING IN SMALL GROUPS, 9e
delivers succinct yet comprehensive coverage
that is packed with the most current examples
and content available.
• Research and theory have been thoroughly
updated in every chapter. Almost 200 recent
references have been added to incorporate
the latest research and theory on small group
communication, while more than 100 older
references have been removed.
• The Ninth Edition is packed with cutting-edge
examples. New business-oriented and workplace
examples, surveys, and studies are integrated
throughout the text. Recent events taken straight
from the headlines illustrate key points.
• Almost doubling the amount of coverage devoted
to group roles, the Ninth Edition splits the former
“Roles and Leadership” chapter into two separate
chapters-Chapter 5, Roles in Groups, and Chapter
6, Group Leadership. Significantly reorganized,
chapter material now offers expanded coverage
of the types of informal group roles and includes
more comprehensive explanations of task,
maintenance, and disruptive roles. A new section
also explains how these informal roles are actively
transacted. More emphasis on leadership and
group roles helps students see the importance of
roles within groups as well as provides additional
information about the role of newcomers in groups.
• Discussion of technology and its influence on
small group communication has been thoroughly
updated in Chapter 12, Technology and Virtual
Groups, as well as expanded throughout the text.
• Interactive pre- and post-quizzes are included in
MindTap, helping students review what they’ve
read and better prepare for exams.
• New interactive activities test students’
assumptions and expectations, while all-new
exercises prompt students to reflect on what
they’ve learned.
• Extensive updating of citations makes this book
more relevant than ever.
FEATURES
• IN MIXED COMPANY: COMMUNICATING
IN SMALL GROUPS, 9A integrates a solid
communication competence perspective
throughout, providing a clear communication focus
www.cengageasia.com
63
that maximizes student understanding.
• The text’s current, comprehensive coverage
includes expansive discussions and research on
leadership, group roles and member diversity, and
group polarization.
CONTENTS
Preface.1. Communication Competence in Groups.2.
Groups as Systems.3. Group Development.4.
Developing the Group Climate.5. Roles in Groups.6.
Group Leadership.7. Developing Effective Teams.8.
Group Discussion: Defective Group Decision
Making and Problem Solving.9. Group Discussion:
Effective Decision Making and Problem Solving.10.
Power in Groups: A Central Dynamic.11. Conflict
Management in Groups.12. Technology and Virtual
Groups.Appendix A: Group Oral Presentations.
Appendix B: Critical Thinking Revisited: Arguments
and Fallacies.Glossary.References.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
64
Instructor’s Web Site (with PowerPoint®,
Cognero, Instructor’s Resource Manual) for
Rothwell’s In Mixed Company: Communicating
in Small Groups, 9th, 009e, 9781305076181
MindTap® Speech for Rothwell’s In Mixed
Company: Communicating in Small Groups,
009e, 9781305098008
Access for Rothwell’s In Mixed Company:
Communicating in Small Groups, 009e,
9781305098015
Access Card for Rothwell’s In Mixed Company:
Communicating in Small Groups, 9th, 009e,
9781305098022
MindTap Reader for Rothwell’s In Mixed
009e, 9781305102583
CourseMate for Rothwell’s In Mixed Company:
Communicating in Small Groups, 009e,
9781305102590
3.0 , InfoTrac®, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for Rothwell’s In Mixed Company:
Communicating in Small Groups, 9th, 009e,
9781305102613
•
•
•
•
Rothwell’s In Mixed Company: Communicating
in Small Groups, 009e, 9781305102606
CS-EBK: IN MIXED COMPANY:
COMMUNICATION IN SMALL GROUPS,
009e, 9781305448261
months) Instant Access for Rothwell’s In Mixed
009e, 9781305497924
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Rothwell’s
In Mixed Company: Communicating in Small
Groups, 009e, 9781305508835
eBook: In Mixed Company: Communicating in
Small Groups, 009e, 9781305688148
© 2016, 512pp, Paperback, 9781285444604
MASS
COMMUNICATION
ADVERTISING &
PUBLIC RELATIONS
PUBLIC RELATIONS WRITING, 11E
Strategies & Structures
Doug Newsom, Texas Christian University (Retired); Jim
Haynes
Combining the practical approach of a trade book
with fundamental PR principles and theories,
PUBLIC RELATIONS WRITING: STRATEGIES
& STRUCTURES, 11th Edition, thoroughly
www.cengageasia.com
equips students with the essential techniques
and methods needed to write with understanding
and purpose. The Eleventh Edition takes a more
strategic focus as it guides students through a
logical progression of PR writing, starting with the
roles and responsibilities of the PR writer, followed
by writing principles, preparing to write, writing for
select audiences, and writing for turbulent times.
It also introduces different styles and techniques
behind writing principles. In addition, the text now
includes an entire chapter devoted to writing for
social media.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Practical Approach: PUBLIC RELATIONS
WRITING: STRATEGIES & STRUCTURES,
11th Edition, combines the practicality of a trade
book with the fundamental principles and theories
of public relations to provide students with the
essential techniques and methods needed to write
with understanding and purpose.
• Strategic Focus: The new edition takes a more
strategic focus. Guiding students through a logical
progression of PR writing, it starts with the roles
and responsibilities of the PR writer, followed by
writing principles, preparing to write, writing for
select audiences and finally writing for turbulent
times.
• Social Media: The Eleventh Edition’s all-new
chapter 5 offers comprehensive coverage of
everything related to writing for social media and
incorporates the latest information available.
situations, including online attacks, hacking, stolen
identities and more.
CONTENTS
Preface.Part I: PR WRITING: ROLE &
RESPONSIBILITY.1. Public Relations and the
Writer.2. Ethical and Legal Responsibilities of the
PR Writer.Part II: WRITING PRINCIPLES.3. Writing
to Clarify and Simplify the Complex.4. Grammar,
Spelling and Punctuation.Part III: PREPARING
TO WRITE.5. Social Media.6. Research for the
Public Relations Writer.7. Writing to Persuade.
Part IV: WRITING FOR SELECT AUDIENCES.8.
Media Kits, Media Pitches, Backgrounders and
Columns.9. Writing for Public Media.10. Email,
Memos, Letters, Proposals and Reports.11.
Newsletters.12. Magazines & Brochures.13.
Speeches, Presentations and Other Orally Delivered
Messages.Part V: WRITING IN TURBULENT
TIMES.14. Crisis Communication.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
Web Site with Instructor’s Manual for Newsom/
Haynes’ Public Relations Writing: Strategies
& Structures, 11th, 011e, 9781305504080
CS-EBK: PUBLIC RELATIONS WRITING
STRATEGIES & STRUCTURES, 011e,
9781305982673
© 2017, 384pp, Paperback, 9781305500006
FEATURES
• Reviewers consistently praise the clarity,
comprehensiveness and practicality of this
popular text.
• Giving students step-by-step samples to follow,
updated examples and illustrations provide
effective models for a variety of purposes,
including media fact sheets, email, position
papers, media kits and media pitches.
• End-of-chapter exercises guide students through
real-world examples of public relations in action to
demonstrate and expand upon chapter topics -enabling them to put what they learn into practice.
• Chapter 14 provides comprehensive coverage
of effective communication in present-day crisis
www.cengageasia.com
65
• This book provides a solid foundation for students,
with a thorough and comprehensive introduction
to the mechanics of ad creation.
• Top creative directors give students advice on how
to create effective ads.
• Abundant new examples and cutting-edge content
convey the excitement of today’s advertising
arena.
FEATURES
CREATIVE STRATEGY IN
ADVERTISING, INTERNATIONAL
EDITION, 11E
Bonnie L. Drewniany, University of South Carolina, Columbia;
A. Jerome Jewler, University of South Carolina, Columbia
CREATIVE STRATEGY IN ADVERTISING, 11E,
International Edition provides everything students
need to be successful as advertising professionals in
today’s fast-changing media environment. Focusing
on the idea that good advertising always starts with
an understanding of people and an awareness of
their needs, the text advances through the creative
process step by step. It focuses first on the creative
person, and then on strategy and problem solving.
Complementing expert instruction with extensive
examples of layouts and ad copy, this book gives
students the necessary tools to create winning
advertising strategies.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new chapter (Chapter 12) is devoted to social
media; it focuses on how to get a following, the
importance of interactivity, how to create the
right messages and visuals, and how to measure
success.
• Ten new case studies include Millennial Women
have güd Scents (güd scratch-and-sniff campaign);
Yuengling Brings Lord Chesterfield Back to Life
(reviving the 170-year-old Lord Chesterfield Ale
brand); Meet Kevin Butler, VP of Right Message
at the Right Time (Sony PlayStation PS3); The
VW Trilogy (the Super Bowl VW ad that got 13
million views before the big game); and Txtng &
Drivng . . . It Can Wait (AT&T).
• Extensive visual examples of ad pieces, layouts,
and storyboards illustrate key concepts and allow
students to make a visual connection between the
text and real-world practices.
66
• A new chapter (Chapter 12) is devoted to social
media; it focuses on how to get a following, the
importance of interactivity, how to create the
right messages and visuals, and how to measure
success.
• Ten new case studies include Millennial Women
have güd Scents (güd scratch-and-sniff campaign);
Yuengling Brings Lord Chesterfield Back to Life
(reviving the 170-year-old Lord Chesterfield Ale
brand); Meet Kevin Butler, VP of Right Message
at the Right Time (Sony PlayStation PS3); The
VW Trilogy (the Super Bowl VW ad that got 13
million views before the big game); and Txtng &
Drivng . . . It Can Wait (AT&T).
• Extensive visual examples of ad pieces, layouts,
and storyboards illustrate key concepts and allow
students to make a visual connection between the
text and real-world practices.
• This book provides a solid foundation for students,
with a thorough and comprehensive introduction
to the mechanics of ad creation.
CONTENTS
1. Creativity: Unexpected but Relevant Selling
Messages.2. Branding: Identity and Image
Strategy.3. Uncovering Insights: The Basis for
Effective Creative Work.4. Inclusion: Targeting an
Ever-Changing Marketplace.5. Strategy: A Road
Map for the Creative Team.6. Ideas: The Currency
of the 21st Century.7. Words on Paper: Connecting
To Consumers’ Hearts and Minds.8. Layouts:
Designing To Communicate.9. Radio: Can You
See What I’m Saying?10. Television: The Power of
Sight, Sound, and Motion.11. Direct Marketing: The
Convenience of Shopping at Home.12. Social Media:
The Ultimate in Word-Of-Mouth Advertising.13.
Integrated Marketing Communications: Building
Strong Relationships Between the Brand and the
Consumer.14. The Law and Creativity: Making Sure
www.cengageasia.com
Your Great Idea Is a Good Idea.Appendix 1: How to
Pitch Your Idea.Appendix 2: Assignments.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Resource CD-ROM for Drewniany/
Jewler’s Creative Strategy in Advertising, 11th,
011e, 9781285079776
Web Site for Drewniany/Jewler’s Creative
Strategy in Advertising, 11th, 011e,
9781285079769
eBook: Creative Strategy in Advertising, 011e,
9781285641683
3I-EBK: ISE CREATIVE STRATEGYIN
ADVERTISING, 011e, 9781337009539
© 2014, 336pp, Paperback, 9781285080277
been included to help students understand the
application of PR principles, and they have been
updated or replaced where needed.
• Globalization of all content in this edition unifies
the PR environment to help students better
understand the practice.
• The Crisis and Credibility chapter has been
expanded because crises appear to be erupting
more often and with critical impact on the world’s
environmental, economic, political and social
systems.
• Coverage of new international standards of
practice is included.
• Since public and private communication adapt
quickly to technological change, this edition
includes coverage of the impact of emerging
technology on PR.
FEATURES
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS: THIS
IS PR, 11E
The Realities of Public Relations, International Edition
Doug Newsom, Texas Christian University (Retired); Judy
Turk, Virginia Commonwealth University; Dean Kruckeberg,
University of North Carolina at Charlotte
Ideal for the beginning student or the experienced
public relations practitioner, THIS IS PR: THE
REALITIES OF PUBLIC RELATIONS, 11E,
International Edition covers the world of public
relations with a strong emphasis on fundamentals
such as history and research, as well as emerging
issues such as technology, ethics, and the
international aspects. With numerous examples,
strategies, tactics, and case studies, your students
will have resources they can take away from the
classroom.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter inserts on PR in Practice, Ethical
Perspective and Research Perspective have
• Coverage of updated trends includes discussion
of increasing career opportunities in various
specializations such as healthcare and technology.
• Updated coverage on the ways in which new
technologies are changing PR practices includes
blogging and electronic sources.
• To make connections with students, each chapter
has new and updated Perspective Boxes ranging
in topic from ethical issues to theory and research
perspectives.
• New guidance for strategic communication and
counsel in practice and education comes from the
2010 Stockholm Accords.
• A thorough introduction to the PR industry,
including broad coverage of PR trends with
relevant and current examples; helps illustrate
concepts and put them into action.
CONTENTS
1. PR Roles and Responsibilities.2. PR’s Origins
and Evolution.3. Research: Planning, Processes
and Techniques.4. Publics and Public Opinion.5.
Theoretical Underpinnings for PR.6. PR Ethics and
Responsibilities.7. PR and the Law.8. Strategic
Management in PR Practice.9. Communication
Channels and Media.10. Tactics and Techniques:
Details That Make PR Strategy Work.11.
Campaigns.12. Crisis and Credibility.
www.cengageasia.com
67
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Newsom/
Turk/Kruckeberg’s Cengage Advantage Books:
This is PR: The Realities of Public Relations,
11th, 011e, 9781111836894
Newsom/Turk/Kruckeberg’s Cengage
Advantage Books: This is PR: The Realities of
Public Relations, 11th, 011e, 9781133042778
Web Site for Newsom/Turk/Kruckeberg’s
Cengage Advantage Books: This is PR: The
Realities of Public Relations, 11th, 011e,
9781133351832
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: This is
PR: The Realities of Public Relations, 011e,
9781133966821
3I-EBK: ISE ADV BK THIS IS PR:REALITIES/
PUBLIC RELATIONS, 011e, 9781337004916
© 2013, 384pp, Paperback, 9781133307617
PUBLIC RELATIONS CASES,
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Twenty-five of the twenty-nine cases are all new to
this edition. These cases particularly incorporate
how social media has impacted public relations in
the last few years. Most of the cases were winners
of the Public Relations Society of America’s
prestigious Silver Anvil Award contest, and
therefore constitute some of the best examples
of public relations practices available.
• A new chapter on Social Media has been added
to the book in light of the increased influence of
digital strategies for campaigns. This new chapter
highlights best practices in this emerging and
rapidly evolving world of digital technology and
social media engagement.
• Bringing on a new author with extensive practical
professional experience in public relations, Pallavi
Damani Kumar, the authors continue to show you
how to analyze the strengths and weaknesses of
successful cases, and then create ways to make
them even better.
• Presented as a touchstone for integrity in the
practice of public relations, the latest Public
Relations Society of America Code of Ethics is
featured in an appendix.
FEATURES
Jerry A. Hendrix, American University, Emeritus; Darrell
C. Hayes, American University; Pallavi Damani Kumar,
American University
Primarily using PUBLIC RELATIONS Society
of America award-winning cases, PUBLIC
RELATIONS CASES, 9E, International Edition
presents a clear theoretical grounding in the major
areas of public relations. Using the ROPE process
model (Research, Objectives, Programming, and
Evaluation), the authors keep students focused on
the strategic elements of exemplary communications
campaigns. The case studies provide glimpses into
best practices for public relations campaigns as
68
recognized by professionals in the field. The cases
all use a strategic communications model, where
clearly defined objectives are based on sound
research and good audience analysis, followed
by creative tactics that are evaluated for their
effectiveness.
• Continually praised for its thorough inceptionto-evaluation coverage, the text systematically
presents the entire execution of each case,
from initial research efforts to finished results or
evaluation.
• Chapter 1 also includes a section on new
technology and the importance of ethics in public
relations.
• The Instructor’s Manual for the eighth edition
has been expanded with additional material from
many of the cases and updated scenarios for class
exercises and discussions.
• The text continues to present cases by following
the ROPE Process of Public Relations: Research
www.cengageasia.com
of initial topics, establishment of Objectives,
Programming, and Evaluation of the campaign’s
success. This method was originally devised
by author Jerry Hendrix to establish a strong
foundation in strategic planning.
• Hendrix and Hayes show students how to analyze
the strengths and weaknesses of successful
cases, and then create ways to make them even
better.
• Praised for its thorough inception-to-evaluation
coverage, the text systematically presents the
entire execution of each case, from initial research
efforts to finished results or evaluation.
PART I: SOLVING PUBLIC RELATIONS
PROBLEMS.1. Public Relations in Action.2. A Public
Relations Process.PART II: REACHING MAJOR
AUDIENCE.3. Media Relations.4. Social Media.5.
Internal Communications.6. Community Relations.7.
Public Affairs and Government Relations.8. Investor
and Financial Relations.9. Consumer Relations.10.
International Public Relations.11. Relations
with Special Publics.PART III: EMERGENCY
PUBLIC RELATIONS.12. Emergency Public
Relations.PART IV: INTEGRATED MARKETING
COMMUNICATIONS.13. Integrated Marketing
Communications.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
DVD for Hendrix/Hayes/Kumar’s Public
Relations Cases, 8th, 008e, 9781111837129
Hendrix/Hayes/Kumar’s Public Relations
Cases, 9th, 009e, 9781133352594
Web Site for Hendrix/Hayes/Kumar’s Public
Relations Cases, 9th, 009e, 9781133352600
© 2013, 448pp, Paperback, 9781111836825
Formats for Public Relations Practice, International
Edition
Barbara Diggs-Brown, American University
CONTENTS
•
THE PR STYLEGUIDE, 3E
A concise and student-friendly handbook, THE PR
STYLEGUIDE, 3E, International Edition serves as
a complete style guide and reference tool for PR
students and practitioners. Assisting students in
presenting messages that display great form and
style, THE PR STYLEGUIDE, 3E, International
Edition addresses the most widely used and
accepted practices in developing PR pieces
providing many visual examples and a breakdown
of the goals for each piece.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New chapter on new media (Chapter 9) that
discusses PR practices for social networking sites,
blogs, microblogging, micosites, and more.
• A new AP style mini-chapter that acts as a primer
for Associated Press style and that offers students
a quick reference to AP style while practicing their
PR writing skills.
• New end-of-chapter exercises that allow students
to develop a firmer understanding of the material
presented in each chapter.
• New pre- and post-tests that allow students
to examine their writing skills at the beginning
and end of the course. These rewrite or editing
assignments are similar to those given to
applicants for an entry-level PR position.
• New AP quizzes on style and usage that students
can use to determine how well they have mastered
writing in AP style.
FEATURES
• Encourages students to make strategic public
www.cengageasia.com
69
relations choices using the best forms and styles
through examples, explanations, and actual PR
pieces.
• A new list of editing marks most commonly used
in the PR field.
• Consistent chapter structure continually reinforces
the desired goal of each media type: What Are
They? Who Gets Them? What Do They Do?
How Do They Help? What Are the Pitfalls? How
Should They Look? Where Should They Go? Did
They Work?
• A wealth of updated and expanded topics,
including pitch letters, media advisories/alerts,
audio news releases, ethics, and more.
• Expanded chapter on websites (Chapter 16),
including discussions of using email for news
releases, using a section of a website as a
“newsroom,” and the strategy of using video email.
CONTENTS
1. Annual Reports.2. Audio News Releases.3.
Brochures.4. Communication Audits.5. Direct
Mail Campaigns.6. Media Kits.7. Media Lists.8.
Media Tours.9. New Media.10. Newsletters.11.
News Releases.12. Opinion-Editorials.13. Public
Service Advertisements and Announcements.14.
Speeches.15. Video News Releases and Electronic
Press Kits.16. Web Sites.Appendix A. PUBLIC
COMMUNICATIONS TOOLBOX.Appendix B.
ORGANIZATION PROFILES.Tests.Pretest.Post
Test.Usage Quiz.AP Style Quizzes.Glossary.
Sources.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
eBook: The PR Styleguide: Formats for Public
Relations Practice, 003e, 9781133976318
3I-EBK: ISE THE PR STYLE GUIDE, 003e,
9781337004930
© 2013, 264pp, Spiral, 9780840028921
SOAP, SEX, AND CIGARETTES, 2E
A Cultural History of American Advertising
Juliann Sivulka, Waseda University
SOAP, SEX AND CIGARETTES examines how
American advertising both mirrors society and
creates it. From the first newspaper advertisement in
colonial times to today’s online viral advertising, the
text explores how advertising grew in America, how
products and brands were produced and promoted,
and how advertisements and agencies reflect and
introduce cultural trends and issues. The threads of
art, industry, culture, and technology unify the work.
The text is chronological in its organization and is
lavishly illustrated with advertisements.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The material has been updated with the most
recent academic and professional source material,
with an attempt to bring a clearer theoretical
structure to the book.
• There is now a strong focus on the part played by
women in modern advertising, both as consumers
and workers in the industry.
• Discussions have been expanded to include
sexuality in advertising, new media, global
advertising, and controversial issues.
• The Author has written a new chapter on the last
ten years of advertising, what has been called
the “Lost Decade,” will cover the economics of
advertising, the new digital interactive media, and
global/international advertising.
• Also included is a new Further Reading feature
at the end of the text with a list of suggested
materials to expand on ideas, and a new website
with external links to other resources.
FEATURES
70
www.cengageasia.com
• Lavishly illustrated with advertisements from
throughout the history of the industry.
• Uses a chronological approach that enhances the
use of the book for both a history of advertising
and a discussion of cultural trends.
• Contains a current discussion of the use of new
electronic media for advertising.
• Each chapter integrates how advertising is created
and how it affects the consumer, using numerous
examples.
STRATEGIC PUBLIC RELATIONS
CONTENTS
Introduction.PART I: HISTORICAL OVERVIEW.1.
1492-1880 The Beginnings.PART II: EARLY
AMERICAN ADVERTISING.2. 1880-1900 Selling
the Goods.PART III: MODERN AMERICAN
ADVERTISING.3. 1900-World I The Rise of a
Consumer Economy.4. 1920-1929 The Roaring
Twenties.5. 1930-1945 The Depression and World
War II.6. 1945-1960 The Postwar Boom.PART IV:
POSTMODERN ADVERTISING.7. 1960-1975 The
Creative Revolution.8. 1975-1990 From Positioning
to Image Building.9. 1990-1999 The Information
Revolution.PART V: ADVERTISING IN THE NEW
MILLENNIUM.10. Since 2000 The Digital Age.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
CS-EBK: SOAP SEX & CIGARETTES:
CULT HIST AMERICAN ADVERTSNG, 002e,
9781133752172
eBook: Soap, Sex, and Cigarettes: A Cultural
History of American Advertising, 002e,
9781133752189
© 2012, 448pp, Paperback, 9781133311133
An Audience-Focused Practice, International Edition
Barbara Diggs-Brown, American University
With nearly thirty years of experience as both a
public relations teacher and practitioner, Barbara
Diggs-Brown has written a text based on her
unwavering belief that to practice effective public
relations today requires strategic thinking and
audience focus, which can only be accomplished by
listening and hearing audiences through formative,
process, and evaluative research. In addition
to highlighting audience-focused principles and
techniques of audience research and recurring
assessment, STRATEGIC PUBLIC RELATIONS: AN
AUDIENCE-FOCUSED PRACTICE, International
Edition is based on the premise that public relations
is a management function, one coordinated with
an organization’s other management divisions.
Intended for undergraduate courses in PR,
serving both majors in the field and nonmajors,
this text provides a comprehensive survey of PR’s
foundations, processes, tactics, and contexts.
FEATURES
• Practical process approach--The four-phase
strategic public relations process is at the heart
of this text with complete step-by-step detail in
Part III, The Process of Strategic Public Relations.
• Solid foundations--The book provides concise,
up-to-date surveys of public relations’ foundations
with separate chapters devoted to its ethics, law,
history, and theories, as well as strategy and the
core communication, information, and business
skills and knowledge that every practitioner should
possess.
• A unique chapter on strategy--Chapter 4, Strategy
in Public Relations, introduces students to the
www.cengageasia.com
71
concept of strategy to ensure that they understand
what this core concept of strategic public relations
practice. The chapter begins with everyday
strategies; moves into a discussion of the critical
thinking, reasoning, and decision-making skills
basic to all strategy; surveys the role of strategy
within organizations; and places strategic PR in
context in general and by providing snapshots of
the full process it requires.
• Emphasis on audience diversity--Instead of
marginalizing coverage of minority, or “special
interest” audiences, the text consistently addresses
diversity within audiences and teaches students
how to develop inclusive audience profiles as well
as strategies for attending to the needs, concerns,
interests, and behaviors of all audiences.
• Engaging pedagogy includes the following:
“Brief Case” boxes present a short case based
on actual campaigns. Primarily intended for inclass group work or individual homework, these
case descriptions and activities give students
the opportunity to test their understanding of the
chapter’s concepts by applying it to the varied
cases presented; “Point of View” boxes feature
commissioned commentary or reprinted articles
by current public relations practitioners on related
topics, personalizing and bringing to life concepts
and examples discussed; “Engaging Ethics”
boxes focus on relevant ethical issues and include
questions that comprise a decision tree to address
potential outcomes; and end-of-chapter learning
resources include Summary and Review, Key
Terms, Questions for Review and Discussion,
and Web Links.
Implementation.13. Program Evaluation and
Campaign Follow-Up.Part 4: GUIDE TO PUBLIC
RELATIONS TACTICS.14. Written Tactics.15.
Spoken Tactics.16. Visual and Interactive Tactics.
Part 5: PUBLIC RELATIONS PRACTICE IN
CONTEXT.17. Corporate Sector.18. Nonprofit
Sector.19. Politics and Government.20. International
Public Relations.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
© 2012, 528pp, Paperback, 9781111840167
CONTENTS
Part 1: GETTING ORIENTED.1. What Is
Public Relations?2. Who Are Public Relations
Practitioners?3. Historical Perspective.4. Strategy
in Public Relations.Part 2: FOUNDATIONS OF
PUBLIC RELATIONS.5. Communicating with
Audiences.6. Researching Effectively.7. Adhering
to Ethical Practices and Meeting Professional
Standards.8. Staying within Legal Bounds.9
Understanding and Applying Theories of Public
Relations.Part 3: THE PROCESS OF STRATEGIC
PUBLIC RELATIONS.10. Problem Discovery and
Analysis.11. Program Planning.12. Campaign
72
PowerLecture with ExamView and JoinIn
CD-ROM for Diggs-Brown’s Strategic Public
Relations: An Audience Focused Practice,
001e, 9780495096047
Premium Web Site for Diggs-Brown’s Strategic
Public Relations: An Audience Focused
Practice, 001e, 9780495900337
Online Instructor’s Resource Manual for DiggsBrown’s Strategic Public Relations: An Audience
Focused Practice, 001e, 9780495905370
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: Strategic
Public Relations: An Audience-Focused
Practice, 001e, 9781133700517
3I-EBK: ISE STRATEGIC PUBLIC RELATIONS,
001e, 9781337003261
www.cengageasia.com
INTRODUCTION TO MASS
COMMUNICATION
MEDIA/IMPACT, 12E
An Introduction to Mass Media
Shirley Biagi, California State University, Sacramento
Consistently praised for its engaging writing style,
currency, and visual appeal, MEDIA/IMPACT: AN
INTRODUCTION TO MASS MEDIA, 12th Edition
focuses students on today’s digital mass media
industries and support businesses as well as the
legal, ethical, social, global, and technological
issues that these businesses face every day. The
twelfth edition focuses on convergence--how the
mass media industries are intersecting to deliver
content and how audiences are adapting to the
new mass media marketplace. Providing thorough
yet balanced coverage, the author grounds her
discussion in the business aspects of all the mass
media industries, with concise histories of each
industry plus an insider’s look at what it’s like to
work in each business. The new edition delivers the
most up-to-the-minute coverage available of such
emerging topics as digital delivery, net neutrality,
media industry consolidation, social media, mobile
media, and much more.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• CURRENCY. Reflecting the latest developments
from the field, MEDIA/IMPACT: AN
INTRODUCTION TO MASS MEDIA, 12th Edition
delivers the most up-to-date coverage of current
trends and technology affecting the dynamic,
rapidly changing media industries. Topics include
digital delivery, net neutrality, media industry
consolidation, social media, mobile media, and
the interplay between mass media and today’s
society.
• IMPACT BOXES. More than 50 new IMPACT
BOXES feature late-breaking topics and trends
from the best sources covering the media
business, such as Bloomberg, THE NEW YORK
TIMES, THE WASHINGTON POST, WIRED,
ADVERTISING AGE, THE GUARDIAN, and the
Pew Research Center. IMPACT BOXES are
divided into five subject areas: Convergence,
Money, Profiles, Audience, and Global. Topics
include bookless libraries, social media, the
growth of Buzzfeed, international music festivals,
Netflix-exclusive programming, the relationship
between video games and violence in society,
and how Millennials consume news.
• SOCIAL MEDIA. Expanded coverage of
convergence now includes the increasing
importance of mobile media and social media,
which have turned cell phones into the fastestgrowing media marketplace.
• G R A P H I C I L L U S T R A T I O N S . S t a t i s t i c a l
information is beautifully displayed in more than
30 new illustrations that reflect current research
on such key topics such the average American’s
daily media usage, digital and mobile radio,
international movie markets, Internet advertising,
popular social media sites, and digital-only news
sites.
FEATURES
• MEDIA/IMPACT: AN INTRODUCTION TO
MASS MEDIA’s emphasis on the mass media
as interconnected businesses helps students
see how economic concepts apply in books,
newspapers, magazines, recordings, radio,
movies, television, and the Internet.
• Bringing text concepts to life, more than 300
carefully selected all-new photos, cartoons, and
illustrations throughout the book highlight timely
trends and important issues in today’s media
business.
• A marginal glossary of key terms runs throughout
each chapter, giving students concise definitions
right where they need them and helping them build
a media vocabulary.
• Each chapter features robust concluding materials,
www.cengageasia.com
73
including a summary organized by headings that
correspond to the chapter’s major topics; key
terms with related chapter page numbers; critical
questions to engage students in analysis of the
chapter, helping to deepen their understanding;
and a “Working the Web” list of 10 websites with
information relevant to the chapter.
• Each industry chapter includes a detailed,
illustrated historical TimeFrame of key events
to help students understand the progression of
mass media.
• Located at the end of the book, the Student
Resource Media Information Guide is a valuable
reference tool packed with hundreds of resources
to help students thoroughly explore media topics-and get the most from your course.
CONTENTS
Part I: THE MASS MEDIA INDUSTRIES.1. Mass
Media and Everyday Life.2. Books: Rearranging
the Page.3. Newspapers: Mobilizing Delivery.4.
Magazines: Chasing the Audience.5. Recordings:
Streaming Sounds.6. Radio: Riding New Waves.7.
Movies: Digitizing Dreams.8. Television: Changing
Channels.9. Internet Media: Widening the Web.
Part II: SELLING THE MESSAGE.10. Advertising:
Catching Consumers.11. Public Relations: Promoting
Ideas.Part III: CHANGING MESSAGES.12. News
and Information: Staying Connected.13. Social and
Political Issues: Shaping the Arguments.14. Law and
Regulation: Rewriting the Rules.15. Ethics: Placing
Responsibility.16. Global Media: Discovering New
Markets.Glossary.Media Information Resource
Guide.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
74
Instructor’s Web Site for Biagi’s Media/Impact:
An Introduction to Mass Media, 12th, 012e,
9781305581425
MindTap® Communication, 1 term (6
months) Instant Access for Biagi’s Media/
Impact: An Introduction to Mass Media, 012e,
9781305581661
MindTap® Communication 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card for Biagi’s Media/Impact:
An Introduction to Mass Media, 12th, 012e,
9781305581678
Online Instructor’s Resource Manual for Biagi’s
Media/Impact: An Introduction to Mass Media,
•
•
•
•
•
•
12th, 012e, 9781305581401
MindTap® Communication for Biagi’s Media/
9781305581654
Biagi’s Media/Impact: An Introduction to Mass
Media, 12th, 012e, 9781305582118
1 term (6 months) Instant Access for Biagi’s
Media/Impact: An Introduction to Mass Media,
012e, 9781305582071
for Biagi’s Media/Impact: An Introduction to
Mass Media, 012e, 9781305582170
Cognero Instant Access for Biagi’s Media/
9781305582217
CS-EBK: MEDIA/IMPACT INTRO MASS
MEDIA, 012e, 9781305982192
© 2017, 448pp, Paperback, 9781305580985
MEDIA NOW, 9E
Understanding Media, Culture, and Technology
Joseph Straubhaar, University of Texas, Austin; Robert
LaRose, Michigan State University; Lucinda Davenport,
Michigan State University
Packed with up-to-date examples and the most
current coverage available, MEDIA NOW:
UNDERSTANDING MEDIA, CULTURE, AND
TECHNOLOGY, 9e encourages students to think
critically about the media and its effects on culture
by providing them with a thorough understanding
of how media technologies develop, operate,
converge, and affect society. The text offers a
www.cengageasia.com
comprehensive introduction to today’s global
media environment and ongoing developments
in technology, culture, and critical theory that
continue to transform the rapidly evolving industry.
Focusing on the essential history, theories,
concepts, and technical knowledge, MEDIA NOW
develops students’ media literacy skills to prepare
them for careers in the expanding fields of the
Internet, interactive media, and traditional media
industries. In addition to new infographics and
illustrations, the cutting-edge Ninth Edition includes
the latest developments and trends in social
media, e-publishing, policy changes for Internet
governance, online privacy protection, online ad
exchanges, the changing video game industry, and
much more. Now available with the text, or as a
standalone product, MindTap delivers the ultimate
personal learning experience−as well as a wealth of
instructor resources−to help maximize the success
of your course.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Offering a captivating visual presentation, all-new
infographics, illustrations, tables, charts, and
Media Then/Media Now timelines explain key
concepts to students at a glance.
• The text’s cutting-edge coverage of social media
and its affect on media as a whole have been
updated in all applicable chapters. In addition,
the Ninth Edition thoroughly discusses how the
many different kinds of mass communication are
affected by these social tools.
• Providing the ultimate personal learning
experience, MindTap is available with the Ninth
Edition of MEDIA NOW and offers an interactive
e-book of the entire text, chapter quizzes,
assignments, and engaging activities-as well as
analytical and customization tools for instructors.
• Chapter 3 “Books and Magazines” explores the
latest trends in e-publishing, such as the popularity
of self-publishing and the proliferation of online
magazines.
• Chapter 9 on the Internet covers the legislation
surrounding net neutrality and the latest changes
in Internet technology, including HTML5 and
IP v.6, as well as the policy changes regarding
Internet governance and online privacy protection.
• Chapter 11’s coverage of advertising discusses
the online ad exchanges and the growing impact
of data brokers as marketing and advertising
resources.
• Chapter 13 provides the latest on the changing
video game industry as it moves to downloadable
casual and social media games, as well as recent
research on the effects of video games.
FEATURES
• At the end of every chapter, “Thinking Critically
About the Media” questions ask students to
consider, discuss, and write about larger issues
surrounding the media, such as what their lives
will be like in a future information society and ways
to use the spectrum broadcasters are giving up in
the digital transition.
• Media Literacy sections within each media chapter
focus on key issues related to the impact of media
on culture and society, encouraging students to
analyze issues related to their consumption of
media and become more effective media activists
and critics. Completely up to date, these sections
include a “news you can use” focus that provides
practical tips to empower students as media
consumers, including how to stay safe online, join
copyright commons, get on the do-not-call list, or
start a blog; where to file media complaints; and
how to sort out broadband options.
• Comprehensive coverage of recent technological
and marketplace developments includes how
mobile devices and social media sites are altering
the media landscape and impacting our culture,
the changes in how we watch television, and how
technology is affecting the publishing and music
industry.
CONTENTS
Part I: MEDIA AND THE INFORMATION AGE.1.
The Changing Media.2. Media and Society.
Part II: THE MEDIA.3. Books and Magazines.4.
Newspapers.5. Recorded Music.6. Radio.7. Film
and Home Video.8. Television.9. The Internet.10.
Public Relations.11. Advertising.12. The Third
Screen: Smartphones and Tablets.13. Video
Games.Part III: MEDIA ISSUES.14. Media Uses
and Impacts.15. Media Policy and Law.16. Media
Ethics.17. Global Communications Media.
www.cengageasia.com
75
JOURNALISM
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Straubhaar/Larose/Davenport’s Media Now:
Understanding Media, Culture, and Technology,
9th, 009e, 9781305080751
MindTap® Mass Communication for Straubhaar/
Larose/Davenport’s Media Now: Understanding
Media, Culture, and Technology, 009e,
9781305080782
MindTap® Mass Communication, 1 term (6
months) Instant Access for Straubhaar/Larose/
Davenport’s Media Now: Understanding Media,
Culture, and Technology, 009e, 9781305080799
MindTap® Mass Communication, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card for Straubhaar/
Larose/Davenport’s Media Now: Understanding
Media, Culture, and Technology, 9th, 009e,
9781305080805
Instructor’s Web Site for Straubhaar/Larose/
Davenport’s Media Now: Understanding
Media, Culture, and Technology, 9th, 009e,
9781305080775
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Communication
Arts, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Straubhaar/LaRose/Davenport’s Media Now:
009e, 9781305118911
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Communication
Arts, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access Card for
Straubhaar/LaRose/Davenport’s Media Now:
9th, 009e, 9781305118928
Cognero Instant Access for Straubhaar/LaRose/
Davenport’s Media Now: Understanding Media,
Cognero for Straubhaar/LaRose/Davenport’s
Media Now: Understanding Media, Culture, and
Technology, 009e, 9781305263383
CS-EBK: MEDIA NOWUNDERSTANDING
MEDIA/CULTURE/TECHNOLOGY, 009e,
9781305448537
eBook: Media Now: Understanding Media,
© 2016, 640pp, Paperback, 9781305080355
76
CREATIVE EDITING, INTERNATIONAL
EDITION, 6E
Dorothy A. Bowles, University of Tennessee, Knoxville; Diane
L. Borden, San Diego State University
CREATIVE EDITING, International Edition has
been consistently praised by reviewers for its
comprehensive coverage, excellent organization,
and contemporary content. The Sixth Edition
continues to live up to this reputation through
consistent presentation, reinforcement, and practical
application of editing concepts. The book covers all
aspects of editing for print and online media, and
provides ample practice exercises for students to
perfect the principles they are learning. Beginning
with basic language skills, the authors guide the
reader through every phase of a professional copy
editor’s job. The book’s practical combined textbook
and workbook approach provides a good framework
that encourages students to practice their skills as
they learn.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Expanded coverage of online editing and web
layout and design keeps students up-to-date with
the latest editing methods for new mediums.
• Expanded coverage of content editing makes this
text an even more valuable reference for students
and writers.
• New examples of creative headline writing focus
on President Obama’s election and subsequent
media reaction around the country.
FEATURES
• The unique all-in-one text and workbook approach
continually reinforces editing concepts and allows
www.cengageasia.com
students to apply them immediately for optimal
learning.
• Comprehensive coverage of basic grammar
and punctuation, story editing, headline writing,
typography, legal issues, journalism ethics, editing
for public relations, layout and design make this
book a leader in the field.
• The implications of legal and ethical issues related
to editing are clearly discussed in Chapters 6 and
7, including discussions about media credibility,
illustrated by several case studies of recent
incidences of ethical lapses by journalists at major
media companies.
• Chapter 2, “Using Correct Grammar and
Punctuation,” provides students with a complete
guide to grammar and punctuation with clear
examples and helpful exercises. Grammar and
punctuation concepts and tips are incorporated
throughout to help students who need additional
help in these areas.
• Chapter 5, “Checking Facts,” teaches students
how to find information in both printed and
electronic versions of standard reference works,
and shows them how to use Internet search tools,
discussion groups, and other online resources, to
assist in research work.
CONTENTS
1. The Copy Editor’s Role.2. Using Correct
Grammar and Punctuation.3. Consistent Style
and Correct Words.4. Checking Facts.5. Editing
Stories.6. Legal Concerns.7. Editing and Ethics.8.
Typography.9. Writing Headlines.10. Editing
Pictures and Infographics.11. Design and Layout.
Workbook.
© 2011, 432pp, Paperback, 9780538743709
COPYWRITING FOR THE ELECTRONIC
MEDIA, 6E
A Practical Guide
Milan D. Meeske, Professor Emeritus, University of Central
Florida
COPYWRITING FOR THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA:
A PRACTICAL GUIDE, Sixth Edition, prepares
students to write effective copy for all types of
electronic media, with an emphasis on commercial
writing and a valuable real-world orientation to this
exciting field. Equally appropriate for introductory
electronic media writing courses and more
specialized seminars on radio and television writing,
the text begins by introducing basic principles
and techniques of good copywriting, including a
brief review of basic grammar, before moving on
to dozens of focused skill-building exercises and
more than 80 writing assignments. Numerous
examples of actual scripts, storyboards, PSAs, and
promotional spots help students understand key
concepts as they learn to write short, persuasive
messages for radio, television, and new media. The
sixth edition includes a new chapter on “Getting the
First Job,” expanded discussion of target audiences
and copy platforms, and an increased focus on
the role of the Internet and its impact on radio and
television advertising--all vital considerations for
students as they prepare for work as professional
writers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A revised and expanded Grammar Review
illustrates grammar principles as they apply to
broadcast writing, helping students refresh these
essential skills.
• A new chapter, “Getting the First Job,” helps
students prepare for entry-level professional work.
www.cengageasia.com
77
• An expanded and clarified discussion of target
audiences and how to develop a copy platform
helps students understand and apply these critical
but complex advertising concepts.
• An increased emphasis on the role of the Internet,
as well as its impact on radio and television
advertising, provides students with useful
insights into the current state of the industry and
considerations likely to affect them as working
professionals.
• N u m e r o u s i l l u s t r a t i o n s , r e v i s e d s c r i p t
considerations, and an expanded bibliography
help students understand key concepts.
FEATURES
• This highly practical text prepares students to write
copy for all types of electronic media. The text
explores basic principles and techniques of good
copywriting and promotes rapid skill development
through more than 80 exercises and writing
assignments based on realistic situations typical
of entry-level copywriting positions.
• The text’s engaging and enjoyable style make
course material easier to grasp, and a good
balance of explanatory material, examples, and
exercises helps even beginning writers to learn
important concepts and skills, such as how to write
effectively using the AIDA formula.
• Numerous examples of actual scripts, storyboards,
PSAs, and promotional spots help students
understand key concepts and learn to write short,
persuasive messages for radio, television, and
new media.
• Equally appropriate for introductory electronic
media writing courses and more specialized
seminars on radio and television writing, the text
provides broad coverage of fundamental concepts
and techniques, as well as unique material on
copywriting style, consumer behavior, and legal
and ethical aspects of copywriting.
• Reflecting the growing trend of cost cutting in
the broadcast industry, chapters on broadcast
news, the Internet, and corporate media explore
new writing opportunities and prepare students
who might need to manage an unusually diverse
workload.
Part 1: THE BROADCAST COPYWRITER.1. The
Broadcast Copywriter.Part 2: COPYWRITING
ELEMENTS.2. Copywriting Style--Basic
Mechanics.3. The Legal and Ethical Implications
of Writing Copy.Part 3: ADVERTISING BASICS.4.
Consumer Behavior.5. Motivation.6. Organizing
the Broadcast Commercial.7. Broadcast Copy
Preparation.Part 4: RADIO COPYWRITING.8. The
Radio Commercial: The Mechanics.9. Types of Radio
Copy.Part 5: TELEVISION COPYWRITING.10.
The Television Commercial: The Mechanics.11.
Types of Television Commercials.Part 6: THE
ELECTRONIC MEDIA: OTHER WRITING
NEEDS.12. Promotion.13. Public Service, Issue,
and Political Announcements.14. The Broadcast
Campaign.15. Writing News Stories.16. Writing for
the Internet.17. Corporate Programs.18. Getting
the First Job.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
© 2009, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495411178
CONTENTS
78
eBank Instructor’s Manual for Meeske’s
Copywriting for the Electronic Media: A Practical
Guide, 5th, 005e, 9780495391098
www.cengageasia.com
MASS COMMUNICATION LAW
MAJOR PRINCIPLES OF MEDIA LAW,
2016
Wayne Overbeck, Emeritus, California State University,
Fullerton; Genelle Belmas, California State University,
Fullerton; Jason Shepard, California State University,
Fullerton
Clear, concise, and timely, MAJOR PRINCIPLES
OF MEDIA LAW, 2016 delivers a comprehensive
and current summary of media law that is up to date
through the 2014-15 Supreme Court term. Revised
and completely updated every year, the text
includes the most recent additions, developments,
and changes in communication law. The 2016
edition is available in August for fall classes,
complete with recent developments through July
1 fully integrated into the text -- not added as an
appendix or separate supplement. Giving students
a more interactive experience with media law
topics, insightful “Focus On” sidebars enable them
to explore key legal issues in depth, while endof-chapter “What should I know about my state?”
features highlight key issues from their home states.
In addition, detailed in-margin definitions of key
terms explain even the most complex topics in a
way students can easily understand.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Thoroughly revised and updated, the 2016 edition
includes the most current coverage of new and
changed laws through the end of the Supreme
Court’s 2015 term.
• Engaging photos and illustrations also reflect the
updated material.
• Key new cases from the Supreme Court’s latest
term are included throughout.
FEATURES
• Offering the most current coverage available,
MAJOR PRINCIPLES OF MEDIA LAW,
2016 delivers up-to-date developments in
communication law through July 1 -- the end of
the Supreme Court’s term.
• Refined through 27 editions, this proven,
authoritative resource is popular with instructors
and students alike.
• Comprehensive coverage focuses on topics
critical to the study of media law.
• An excellent resource for instructors, the Preface
spotlights major changes since the last edition as
well as highlights a sample of court cases covered
in the text.
• A helpful Table of Cases at the beginning of the
text enables instructors and students to easily
reference and locate specific cases by name and
page number.
• Page margins list key terms and their definitions,
ensuring thorough student understanding of even
the most complex topics.
• “Focus On” sidebars allow students to explore
relevant legal issues and court cases in greater
depth.
CONTENTS
1. The American Legal System.2. The Legacy
of Freedom.3. Modern Prior Restraints.4.
Libel and Slander.5. The Right of Privacy.6.
Copyrights and Trademarks.7. Fair Trial-Free
Press Conflicts.8. Newsgatherer’s Privilege.9.
Freedom of Information.10. Obscenity and the
Law.11. Regulation of Electronic Media.12. Media
Ownership Issues.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
Online Test Bank for Overbeck/Belmas’s
Major Principles of Media Law, 2016, 001e,
9781305076990
Web Site for Overbeck/Belmas’s Major Principles
of Media Law, 2016, 001e, 9781305077003
CS-EBK: MAJOR PRINCIPLES MEDIA LAW
2016 ED, 001e, 9781305448865
3P-EBK:MAJOR PRINCIPLES MEDIALAW
2016 ED, 001e, 9781305686366
eBook: Major Principles of Media Law, 2016,
001e, 9781305983731
© 2016, Paperback, 9781305076983
www.cengageasia.com
79
GOOGLE and between the National Association
of Broadcasters and SoundExchange; and a look
at the dispute over the Obama “Hope” poster in
the context of copyright and publicity rights and
the First Amendment.
FEATURES
CASES IN COMMUNICATIONS LAW, 6E
John Zelezny, California State University, Fresno (formerly)
Written as a companion to Zelezny’s
COMMUNICATIONS LAW, Sixth Edition, textbook,
CASES IN COMMUNICATIONS LAW, Sixth Edition,
presents cases that will familiarize communications
students with authoritative judicial reasoning on
key principles of communications law. Most of the
cases are from the U.S. Supreme Court and stand
as precedents that all other courts in the nation
must follow.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Cases highlight topics including defamation,
privacy and copyright liability issues arising
from user-generated content on the Internet and
social network, recent rulings in cyber-libel and
anonymous blogging, the Child Online Protection
Act, and efforts to pass a federal shield law and
the debate on protecting Internet reporters and
bloggers. The sixth edition includes important
U.S. Supreme Court and 3rd Circuit Court rulings
on broadcast indecency and the U.S. Supreme
Court’s ruling concerning student free-speech
rights in MORSE v. FREDERICK.
• New material examines the Federal Trade
Commission’s (FTC) enforcement efforts against
potentially misleading types of advertising;
proposed guidelines for online behavioral
advertising and testimonials; and federal regulation
pertaining to sponsor identification, video news
releases, product placement, and embedded
advertising.
• Additional coverage includes a discussion of the
constitutionality of the McCain-Feingold campaign
reform law’s electioneering restrictions; landmark
copyright settlements in AUTHORS GUILD v.
80
• Along with classic Supreme Court decisions,
CASES IN COMMUNICATION LAW, Sixth
Edition, provides carefully selected cases from
the state courts and lower federal courts to give
students a complete and up-to-date picture of
communications law.
• I n t e n d e d f o r s t u d e n t s i n j o u r n a l i s m ,
telecommunications, and other communications
fields, the judicial opinions in this book have been
carefully edited to focus just on substantive points
of communications law.
• Most of the formal legal citations and judicial
footnotes have been omitted from the cases to
improve readability and enhance the focus on
truly important points.
• This book is intended as a companion to Zelezny’s
textbook COMMUNICATIONS LAW: LIBERTIES,
RESTRAINTS AND THE MODERN MEDIA, Sixth
Edition, and follows the same organization of that
text.
CONTENTS
Preface.1. Introduction.Why Study Cases? How
to Find Cases. Legal Terms. How to Read and
Brief Cases.2. The First Amendment.3. Risks to
Public Safety.4. Damage to Reputation.5. Invasion
of Privacy.6. Access to Places and Information.7.
Media and the Justice System.8. Creative Property.9.
The FCC and Broadcast Licensing.10. Electronic
Media Content.11. Obscenity and Indecency.12.
Commercial Speech.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
Web Site for Zelezny’s Communications Law:
Liberties, Restraints, and the Modern Media,
006e, 9781424069170
eBank Instructor’s Manual for Zelezny’s
Communications Law: Liberties, Restraints,
and the Modern Media, 006e, 9780538733564
CS-EBK: CASES IN COMMUNICATIONS LAW,
006e, 9781111179557
•
•
eBook: Cases in Communications Law, 006e,
9781111381998
eBook: Cases in Communications Law, 006e,
9781133379911
© 2011, 304pp, Paperback, 9780495902973
MASS COMMUNICATION
THEORY
MASS COMMUNICATION THEORY, 7E
Foundations, Ferment, and Future
Stanley J. Baran, Bryant University; Dennis K. Davis,
Pennsylvania State University
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• All statistics and examples have been updated.
• Chapter-specific updates, including an examination
of mass media industries today, trends in mass
media theory development, and the inclusion of
social media and networking, are now provided.
• The overall structure of the textbook has been
simplified into three sections and the organization
of chapters has been substantially modified.
• Chapters 10 and 11 have been designed to
increase attention to theories that are currently
used to guide research, especially in the new
digital media environment.
• Discussion of older theories has been substantially
reduced while maintaining a more extensive and
detailed history than other theory textbooks. This
made room for a wide variety of new thinking in
mass communication theory.
• New theories in this edition include: Dual Model
of Social Responsibility, Anderson and Dill’s
General Aggressive Model of Media Violence,
the Downward Spiral Model of Media Effects,
Motivated Reasoning and The Backfire Effect,
Parental Mediation Theory of Children’s Digital
Media Use, and many more.
FEATURES
MASS COMMUNICATION THEORY:
FOUNDATIONS, FERMENT, AND FUTURE,
Seventh Edition, provides a comprehensive
and historically based introduction to mass
communication theory. Clearly written with
examples, graphics, and other materials to illustrate
key theories, the text traces the emergence of
two main bodies of mass communication theory:
social/behavioral and critical/cultural. It concludes
with a discussion of how these two traditions
support the media literacy movement and might
be combined to produce a new theory of mediated
communication. The authors emphasize that media
theories are human creations typically intended
to address specific problems or issues. MASS
COMMUNICATION THEORY: FOUNDATIONS,
FERMENT, AND FUTURE helps students develop
an understanding of theory so they can make better
use of media and play a role in the development of
new media industries.
• The text is accessible and balanced, providing
thorough and effective coverage of social science
theories and cultural theories.
• Clearly written in an appealing and reader-friendly
style, the text includes helpful examples, graphics,
and other support materials to better illustrate key
theories and explore their importance.
• The authors capably present a diverse selection
of theories and perspectives while emphasizing
that media theories are human creations typically
intended to address specific problems or issues.
• Each chapter includes one or more Thinking
About Theory boxes that encourage students to
apply mass communication theories to their own
experiences, as well as to refine and discuss
their interpretation of current events such as the
war in Iraq, the war on drugs, and advertising of
prescription drugs.
www.cengageasia.com
81
CONTENTS
Preface.Section 1: FOUNDATIONS:
INTRODUCTION TO MASS COMMUNICATION
THEORY AND ITS ROOTS.1. Understanding
and Evaluating Mass Communication Theory.2.
Establishing the Terms of the Debate Over
Media: The First Trend In Media Theory -- Mass
Society and Propaganda Theories.3. Normative
Theories of Mass Communication.Section 2:
FERMENT: METHODOLOGICAL DISPUTES
DIVIDE THE DISCIPLINE.4. The Media-Effects
Trend.5. The Emergence of the Critical Cultural
Trend in North America.6. Theories of Media And
Human Development: Children and Adolescents.7.
Audience Theories: Uses and Reception.8. Theories
of Media Cognition and Information Processing.9.
Theories of the Effect of Media on Society.10.
Media And Culture Theories: Meaning Making in
the Social World.Section 3: FUTURE: RAPIDLY
CHANGING MEDIA CHALLENGE A GLOBAL
DISCIPLINE.11. The Future of Media Theory and
Research.References.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Web Site for Baran/Davis’ Mass Communication
Theory: Foundations, Ferment, and Future, 7th,
007e, 9781285764207
CS-EBK: MASS COMMUNICATION THEORY:
FOUNATIONS FERMENT & FUT, 007e,
9781285804729
Online Instructor’s Manual for Baran/Davis’
Mass Communication Theory: Foundations,
Ferment, and Future, 7th, 007e, 9781285764184
eBook: Mass Communication Theory:
Foundations, Ferment, and Future, 007e,
9781305193031
© 2015, 432pp, Paperback, 9781285052076
82
MASS MEDIA AND SOCIETY
MEDIA, CRIME, AND CRIMINAL
JUSTICE, 5E
Ray Surette, University of Central Florida
MEDIA, CRIME, AND CRIMINAL JUSTICE is the
definitive text on media and criminal justice. The
book features impeccable scholarship, a direct
and approachable style, and an engaging format-supported by visual examples and sidebar material
that complements the narrative. With the everincreasing role of media in both reporting crime
and shaping it into infotainment, the importance
of the interplay between contemporary media and
the criminal justice system is greater today than
ever before. Author Ray Surette comprehensively
surveys this interplay and showcases its impact,
emphasizing that people use media-provided
knowledge to construct a picture of the world and
then act based on this constructed reality.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Newly organized into eleven chapters, the book
follows the content and influence of the media as
it relates to the committing of crime, as well as to
the sequential components of the criminal justice
system as typically covered in undergraduate
criminal justice courses.
• Many recent examples illustrate the book’s
themes, and material covering new media and
social media as they relate to crime is emphasized.
Entire sections cover new topics such as the
production of crime news; the dynamics of
performance crime; the effect of video games;
celebrity crime news; terrorism and the media;
www.cengageasia.com
the impact of social media, self-surveillance, and
memorial criminal justice policies; and mediated
criminal justice. Other new topics include how
white-collar crime is portrayed in the media (e.g.,
Bernie Madoff) and an expanded discussion of
the CSI effect.
• The author discusses recent media crime and
justice events and associated personalities,
including Amanda Knox’s Italian murder trial, the
Sandy Hook elementary school shooting, the Jodi
Arias murder trial, the Boston marathon bombings,
“happy slapping, “ghost riding,” and copycat crime.
There are also new boxes on WikiLeaks, Bradley
Manning, and Edward Snowden.
• A new Chapter 4, “Criminogenic Media,” is
dedicated to how the media portraits described
in the book can be criminogenic and related to
real-world criminal behavior. The ongoing debates
regarding the effects of video games on player
aggression and the impact of the Internet and
social media on criminality are reviewed. The
chapter also discusses copycat crime and mediaorientated terrorism in detail.
• A new Chapter 10, “New Media, Crime, and
Justice,” discusses such topics as cybercrime,
the dark web, how new media provide the means
to commit new types of crimes (based on a
discussion of a New York cannibal police officer),
and the growth of performance crime (highlighting
Smack Cams). Additional boxes discuss how
social media have been used to further victimize
crime victims as well as help law enforcement
solve crimes by utilizing iPhones, Facebook, and
YouTube.
• Chapter 11, “Media, Crime, and Justice in the
Twenty-First Century,” wraps up the main points of
the book and offers projections about the future of
the relationship between media, crime, and justice.
It includes new discussions on competing models
of the media’s relationship to criminal justice and
the evolving mediated crime-and-justice reality
that reflects new and social media.
consumers by highlighting and correcting common
misconceptions regarding the mass media’s
effects on crime and justice.
• The author provides a scientific yet approachable
treatment of the subject, with a well-researched
and thorough review of the relevant empirical
and legal data on the criminal justice system,
the media’s influence on attitudes, the media’s
impact on crime, and media-designed programs
to reduce crime.
CONTENTS
1. Crime, Justice, and Media.2. New Media
and Social Constructionism.3. Images of Crime
and Criminality.4. Criminogenic Media.5. Crime
Fighters.6. The Courts.7. Corrections.8. Crime
Control.9. The Media and Criminal Justice Policy.10.
New Media, Crime, and Justice.11. New Media,
Crime, and Justice in the Twenty-First Century.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Careers in Criminal Justice Printed Access
Card, 001e, 9780495595229
Careers in Criminal Justice Instant Access,
001e, 9780495595236
Online Instructor’s Manual with Test Bank for
Surette’s Media, Crime, and Criminal Justice,
5th, 005e, 9781285459424
IAC CL EBOOK MEDIA CRIME &
CRIMINAL JUSTICE, 005e, 9781285459448
SSO CL EBOOK MEDIA CRIME &
CRIMINAL JUSTICE, 005e, 9781285459660
eBook: Media, Crime, and Criminal Justice,
005e, 9781285802442
CS-EBK: MEDIA CRIME & CRIMINAL
JUSTICE, 005e, 9781285803371
3P-EBK:MEDIA CRIME &
CRIMINALJUSTICE, 005e, 9781305177956
© 2015, 368pp, Paperback, 9781285459059
FEATURES
• Numerous visuals and contemporary examples
throughout the text help students make connections
to the substantive points found in each chapter.
• The book helps students become critical media
www.cengageasia.com
83
• One the most complete histories of the computer
and the story of the Internet. New coverage follows
the evolution of social networking in cyberspace,
including MySpace, Facebook, Twitter, Second
Life and YouTube.
• Profiles of influential media figures include Rosser
Reeves, Lee Clow, Paul Conrad, Ted Turner, Matt
Drudge, and Mark Zuckerberg.
• Materials focus on the ethnic and alternative
press in the Information Age and the impact of
mega media mergers on the future of media and
democracy.
AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, 3E
Anthony Fellow, California State University, Fullerton
AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, THIRD EDITION,
is a lively, engaging text that focuses on the
development of the American media and its
impact on society. Each chapter centers on the
development of a particular medium. The narrative
incorporates brief biographies of important media
figures, first-person accounts of experiences with
the media, and primary materials to keep students
engrossed in the content.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter 11 looks at the history of advertising and
its social, economic, and political impact.
• Chapter 12, The Media, Nixon and Crises in
Credibility, focuses on the Nixon Years (Vietnam
and Watergate).
• New material and social media coverage including
Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube is included in
Chapter 14.
• A box feature entitled “American Snapshots”
includes four to five paragraphs of first-person
accounts and quotes from common individuals
talking about their experiences with the media.
• American Media Classic boxes are now included.
CONTENTS
1. The Colonial Years.2. The Press and the
Revolution.3. The Press and the Founding of a
Nation.4. A Press for the Masses.5. A Divided
Nation, A Divided Media.6. The Yellow Press
and the Times.7. Magazines, Muckraking, and
Public Relations.8. American Film.9. Radio
and Its Promises.10. Television: Progress and
Problems.11. Advertising and the Selling of Products
and Presidents.12. The Media, Nixon and the Crises
in Credibility.13. The Media and National Crises.14.
The Internet Revolution and the Information
Explosion.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
© 2013, 496pp, Paperback, 9781111348120
FEATURES
• Updated Chapter 13, The Media and National
Crises, focuses on the presidency up until now.
• Includes stories of more modern heroes/
technological wizards that have ushered in
the fourth technological revolution. Chapter
14 considers the accomplishments of Charles
Babbage, John Vincent Atanasoff, Clifford Berry,
Bill Gates, Mark Zuckerberg and Steve Jobs,
among others.
84
Web Site for Fellow’s American Media History,
3rd, 003e, 9781133047230
CS-EBK: AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, 003e,
9781133345503
eBook: American Media History, 003e,
9781133824916
www.cengageasia.com
MASS MEDIA HISTORY
Bill Gates, Mark Zuckerberg and Steve Jobs,
among others.
• One the most complete histories of the computer
and the story of the Internet. New coverage follows
the evolution of social networking in cyberspace,
including MySpace, Facebook, Twitter, Second
Life and YouTube.
• Profiles of influential media figures include Rosser
Reeves, Lee Clow, Paul Conrad, Ted Turner, Matt
Drudge, and Mark Zuckerberg.
• Materials focus on the ethnic and alternative
press in the Information Age and the impact of
mega media mergers on the future of media and
democracy.
AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, 3E
Anthony Fellow, California State University, Fullerton
AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, THIRD EDITION,
is a lively, engaging text that focuses on the
development of the American media and its
impact on society. Each chapter centers on the
development of a particular medium. The narrative
incorporates brief biographies of important media
figures, first-person accounts of experiences with
the media, and primary materials to keep students
engrossed in the content.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter 11 looks at the history of advertising and
its social, economic, and political impact.
• Chapter 12, The Media, Nixon and Crises in
Credibility, focuses on the Nixon Years (Vietnam
and Watergate).
• New material and social media coverage including
Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube is included in
Chapter 14.
• A box feature entitled “American Snapshots”
includes four to five paragraphs of first-person
accounts and quotes from common individuals
talking about their experiences with the media.
• American Media Classic boxes are now included.
CONTENTS
1. The Colonial Years.2. The Press and the
Revolution.3. The Press and the Founding of a
Nation.4. A Press for the Masses.5. A Divided
Nation, A Divided Media.6. The Yellow Press
and the Times.7. Magazines, Muckraking, and
Public Relations.8. American Film.9. Radio
and Its Promises.10. Television: Progress and
Problems.11. Advertising and the Selling of Products
and Presidents.12. The Media, Nixon and the Crises
in Credibility.13. The Media and National Crises.14.
The Internet Revolution and the Information
Explosion.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
Web Site for Fellow’s American Media History,
3rd, 003e, 9781133047230
CS-EBK: AMERICAN MEDIA HISTORY, 003e,
9781133345503
eBook: American Media History, 003e,
9781133824916
© 2013, 496pp, Paperback, 9781111348120
FEATURES
• Updated Chapter 13, The Media and National
Crises, focuses on the presidency up until now.
• Includes stories of more modern heroes/
technological wizards that have ushered in
the fourth technological revolution. Chapter
14 considers the accomplishments of Charles
Babbage, John Vincent Atanasoff, Clifford Berry,
www.cengageasia.com
85
MEDIA EFFECTS
MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCH, 5E
A Basic Overview
Glenn G. Sparks, Purdue University
Packed with current examples and the latest
research available, MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCH:
A BASIC OVERVIEW, 5e, provides students with
a comprehensive introduction to the study of mass
media’s effects on society. Through an engaging
personal narrative style, the author presents media
theories in the context of fascinating research
findings. Students gain a clear understanding of
how the effects of mass media are measured and
what the latest research has concluded about
media’s influence on our lives. Completely up
to date, the Fifth Edition offers new coverage of
electronic media’s effects on sleep displacement,
TV viewing and obesity research, media violence,
emotions in cooperative video game play, first- vs.
second-order cultivation, agenda-setting theory
research, new media’s effects on imitative suicides,
Internet use statistics, screen time and face-to-face
interaction, multitasking, and much more. It also
features a new 2-color interior, 90 new research
citations, and 36 new Questions to Focus Your
Attention. In addition, 19 all-new Study Boxes
give students an in-depth look at media effects
information in real-world practice.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• More engaging and student-friendly than ever,
MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCH: A BASIC
OVERVIEW, 5e features a new 2-color interior.
• Completely up to date, the Fifth Edition reflects
the latest developments, trends, and research
86
findings from the field and includes 90 new
research citations.
• Exploring media effects information in depth, 19
all-new Study Boxes offer students an up-close
view of current research, methods, theory, and
effects data.
• Inspiring lively discussion and debate, 36 all-new
Questions to Focus Your Attention help students
zero in on the most important concepts.
• Integrating new examples, Chapter 1 “A Scientific
Approach to the Study of Media Effects” offers a
more nuanced discussion of the goals of science.
A new Study Box evaluates the claims of a braintraining product.
• Chapter 2 “Scientific Methods in Media Effects
Research” presents a new study of popular
content in young adult novels to illustrate content
analysis, while a new study on video games
illustrates the experimental method. A new Study
Box demonstrates how to evaluate the validity of
an experiment.
• Chapter 3 “A Brief History of Media Effects
Research” features new Study Boxes on the
relationship between media use and sleep
patterns as well as the colorful personalities
involved in the Decatur Study.
• Chapter 4 “Time Spent With Mass Media: Reasons
and Consequences” presents a new discussion
of uses and gratifications and new media along
with a new section on electronic media’s effects
on sleep displacement. It also contains updated
research on TV viewing and obesity and new
Study Boxes on binge viewing and the nature of
the parasocial relationship.
• Presenting a deeper discussion of media
violence, Chapter 5 “Effects of Media Violence”
delves into such subjects as media cultivation
theory, violence in YouTube videos, the “law
of emotional desensitization”, the effects of
violent video games, and why people doubt the
influence of media violence on aggression. It also
contains three new Study Boxes on the subjects
of prolonged exposure to media violence, the
decrease in violent crime, and the skepticism
surrounding the effects of media violence on
aggression.
• Chapter 6 “Sexual Content in the Media” offers
www.cengageasia.com
RESEARCH METHODS IN
MASS COMMUNICATION
new research on the effects of rape pornography
as well as a new discussion of the Annenberg
Sex and Media Study. In addition, an updated
Study Box discusses the effects of MTV’s “16 and
Pregnant” program.
CONTENTS
1. A SCIENTIFIC APPROACH TO THE STUDY
OF MEDIA EFFECTS.2. SCIENTIFIC METHODS
IN MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCH.3. A BRIEF
HISTORY OF MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCH. 4.
TIME SPENT WITH MASS MEDIA: REASONS
AND CONSEQUENCES. 5. EFFECTS OF MEDIA
VIOLENCE. 6. SEXUAL CONTENT IN THE
MEDIA. 7. MEDIA THAT STIR EMOTIONS. 8.
PERSUASIVE EFFECTS OF THE MEDIA. 9. THE
EFFECTS OF NEWS AND POLITICAL CONTENT.
10. THE EFFECTS OF MEDIA STEREOTYPES. 11.
THE IMPACT OF NEW MEDIA TECHNOLOGIES.
12. MEET MARSHALL MCLUHAN: A LESS
SCIENTIFIC APPROACH TO MEDIA IMPACT.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
Web Site for Sparks’ Media Effects Research:
A Basic Overview, 5th, 005e, 9781305077485
CS-EBK: MEDIA EFFECTS RESEARCBASIC
OVERVIEW, 005e, 9781305448254
© 2016, 336pp, Paperback, 9781305077478
CTE MASS MEDIA RESEARCH WITH
CB VITALSOURCE EBOOK, 10E
Roger D. Wimmer, Wimmer Research; Joseph R. Dominick,
University of Georgia
with the print book is valid for use in a specific
Asia territory only.CB VitalSource eBook – The
ultimate eBook experience has arrived! Easily
access our eBooks with features that will improve
your reading experience, and tools to help you take
notes and organize your studies.Quality media is
the result of meticulous research. MASS MEDIA
RESEARCH: AN INTRODUCTION, 10e, shows you
how it happens--from content analysis to surveys to
experimental research--and then equips you with
expert tips on analyzing the media you encounter
in your daily life. Reflecting the latest developments
from the field, this popular book delivers a
comprehensive overview of mass communication
research and a thorough exploration of each major
approach--including qualitative research, content
analysis, survey research, longitudinal research,
and experimental research. It also fully integrates
social media coverage, ethics, and the impact of
merging technology.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Reflecting the latest developments from the field,
MASS MEDIA RESEARCH, 10e is packed with
up-to-the-minute research, real-world examples,
and practical illustrations.
• Chapter 3 “Research Ethics” now features new
information on federal rules concerning the use
of human subjects. It also offers an insightful
www.cengageasia.com
87
discussion about the ethics of doing research
involving social media such as Facebook and
Twitter.
• Chapter 7 “Survey Research” includes updated
information on the types of survey research,
along with expanded sections on Internet (online)
research and identifying outliers in all types of
research.
• Chapter 13 “Newspaper and Magazine Research”
looks at current research concerning the impact of
tablet computers--such as the iPad--on newspaper
and magazine readership.
• Chapter 14 “Research in the Electronic Media”
includes new information about Arbitron’s
Portable People Meter and other new research
considerations related to audience ratings. In
addition, an expanded discussion explores
respondent verification for all research methods.
• Chapter 15 “Research in Advertising” features
expanded and updated discussions about new
advertising channels, such as search engines
and social media.
• Chapter 16 “Research in Public Relations”
now offers a section on social media message
analytics, a group of measures becoming more
important in public relations research.
CONTENTS
Preface.PART I: THE RESEARCH PROCESS.1.
Science and Research.2. Elements of Research.3.
Research Ethics.4. Sampling.PART II: RESEARCH
APPROACHES.5. Qualitative Research Methods.6.
Content Analysis.7. Survey Research.8. Longitudinal
Research.9. Experimental Research.PART III:
DATA ANALYSIS.10. Introduction to Statistics.11.
Hypothesis Testing.12. Basic Statistical Procedures.
PART IV: RESEARCH APPLICATIONS.13.
Newspaper and Magazine Research.14. Research in
the Electronic Media.15. Research in Advertising.16.
Research in Public Relations.Appendix Tables.
Glossary.Name Index.Subject Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
88
InfoTrac® College Edition Printed Access Card,
001e, 9780534558536
Online Instructor’s Manual for Wimmer/
Dominick’s Mass Media Research, 10th, 010e,
9781285074559
•
CS-EBK: MASS MEDIA RESEARCH, 010e,
9781285303062
© 2014, Paperback, 9789814601290
COMMUNICATION RESEARCH, 7E
Strategies and Sources, International Edition
Rebecca B. Rubin, Kent State University; Alan M. Rubin,
Kent State University; Paul M. Haridakis, Kent State
University
Designed to help students learn how to successfully
use literature and other sources in writing effective
papers, COMMUNICATION RESEARCH:
STRATEGIES AND SOURCES, International
Edition, demystifies the research process by
helping students master library skills, scholarly
writing and the latest research technology tools. In
addition, this communication research text places
special emphasis on using library resources to
help students effectively strategize, develop, and
complete communication research. The new edition
welcomes talented scholar, Paul Haridakis, as a
new coauthor on the book.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Offers updated sources and exercise questions.
• Includes boxed examples of student projects at
the end of Chapters 1-8 to illustrate how students
have applied chapter information successfully.
• Makes searching Internet and electronic databases
easier with actual screen shots from the major
search engines.
www.cengageasia.com
VISUAL COMMUNICATION
FEATURES
• Includes exercises and examples at the end of
each chapter to help students apply the text’s
concepts.
• Is the only text on the market to focus on
sources and strategies for selecting, refining, and
researching communication topics.
• Offers a strong focus on the basics of documentary
and library research, including developing
and refining research questions, writing and
organizing, beginning investigation of a topic, and
acquiring tools that make the research process
efficient.
• Includes clear descriptions of each type of
communication research source available.
• Uses updated APA style throughout, and includes
extensive coverage of how to cite Internet sources
correctly.
CONTENTS
PART I: COMMUNICATION RESEARCH
STRATEGIES.1. Studying Communication.2.
Searching the Communication Literature.3. Using
Computers to Search Electronic Databases.4. Using
the Internet for Communication Research. PART
II: COMMUNICATION RESEARCH SOURCES. 5.
General Sources. 6. Access Tools. 7. Communication
Periodicals. 8. Information Compilations. PART III:
COMMUNICATION RESEARCH PROCESSES.
9. The Process of Communication Research. 10.
Designing the Communication Research Project. 11.
Preparing Research Projects. 12. Writing Research
Papers. Appendix A: APA Style Basics. Appendix
B: Glossary.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
and Sources, 007e, 9781439065532
and Sources, 007e, 9781133380108
© 2010, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495793441
VISUAL COMMUNICATION, 6E
Images with Messages, International Edition
Paul Martin Lester, California State University, Fullerton
VISUAL COMMUNICATION: IMAGES WITH
MESSAGES, 6E, International Edition is the
only text to offer substantial coverage of issues
specific to all forms of visual communication.
Helping students analyze visual messages using
a technique similar to the one used to evaluate
words, VISUAL COMMUNICATION: IMAGES
WITH MESSAGES, 6E, International Edition offers
physiological and theoretical background on visual
perception, then moves to discussion of various
media -- including typography, graphic design,
informational graphics, photography, television,
video, and interactive -- and the visible role they play
in our lives. In addition, this edition is presented in
full color from cover to cover.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• All of the images that were originally made with
color materials are now printed in color.
• There are 80 new photos, bringing the total image
program to over 500 illustrations. These images
give life to the text’s historical references and
contemporary trends. Many of the illustrations
are described in such a way as to evoke visual
messages in the mind of the reader. This edition
features works of new artists, including R. Crumb,
Shepard Fairey, Norman Rockwell and Andy
Warhol.
• Each chapter has been updated with the most
relevant and current information and images
obtained from an international pool of artists.
A new quotation also has been added to each
www.cengageasia.com
89
chapter opening.
• Links to digital videos provide added, moving
insights to the verbal descriptions in each chapter.
• Updated and new weblinks have been incorporated
into each chapter’s discussion and also can be
accessed on the book’s website.
FEATURES
• Typographic, graphic, informational, cartoon, still,
moving, televised, computer, and web images
are analyzed within a framework of personal,
historical, technical, ethical, cultural, and critical
perspectives.
• The text incorporates specific chapters on different
channels where visual communication plays a
key role. It also covers ethics, physiology, and
perspectives for analysis.
• The informal writing style explains detailed
information in a thorough, yet easily understandable
way.
• Section One discusses the different elements of a
visual approach. It teaches design and meaning,
illustrates how to grab viewer attention and
convince others to buy a product, and warns of
the visual stereotypes that can harm and offend.
It also shows how any single image can be made
more interesting and memorable if looked at
closely.
• Section Two contains the nine media chapters that
concentrate on the ways we see visual messages.
Lester uses historical examples of cave paintings,
Aristotle and Citizen Cane, as well as modern
pieces such as The Simpsons, Twitter and the
Apple Computer Company.
CONTENTS
Preface.1. Visual Communication.Section
One.2. Visual Cues.3. Visual Theories.4. Visual
Persuasion.5. Visual Stereotypes.6. Visual
Analysis.Section Two.7. Typography.8. Graphic
Design.9. Informational Graphics.10. Cartoons.11.
Photography.12. Motion Pictures.13. Television.14.
Computers.15. The Web.16. The More You Know,
The More You See.Glossary.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
90
Web Site for Lester’s Visual Communication:
Images with Messages, 6th, 006e,
•
•
•
9781285074658
Online Instructor’s Manual for Lester’s Visual
Communication: Images with Messages, 6th,
006e, 9781285080215
eBook: Visual Communication: Images with
Messages, 006e, 9781285625317
3I-EBK: ISE VISUAL COMMUNICATION
IMAGES W/MESSAGES, 006e, 9781337008327
© 2014, 448pp, Paperback, 9781285075846
RADIO TELEVISION &
FILM
AESTHETICS
SIGHT, SOUND, MOTION, 8E
Applied Media Aesthetics
Herbert Zettl, San Francisco State University
Media aesthetics have gained prominence with the
dramatic advances in the digital technology of video
and electronic cinema, making Herb Zettl’s SIGHT
SOUND MOTION: APPLIED MEDIA AESTHETICS
more applicable than ever. The Eighth Edition
continues to be the most comprehensive book
on the market, not only describing the major
aesthetic image elements -- light and color, space,
time-motion, and sound -- but also presenting indepth coverage on how they are creatively used
in television and film. Zettl’s thorough coverage of
aesthetic theory and the application of that theory
place this contemporary and highly relevant text
in a class by itself. It equips students to think
critically about media aesthetics and apply them
www.cengageasia.com
to production situations. Richly illustrated and
now presented in full color, this edition features
strong visuals that often draw on traditional art
forms, such as painting, sculpture, and dance. A
comprehensive digital learning solution is available
through MindTap®.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Reflecting the latest practices from industry,
SIGHT, SOUND, MOTION: APPLIED MEDIA
AESTHETICS, 8e is packed with valuable insight
illustrating how to compose effective shots for
the tiny mobile media display as well as the large
screens in motion picture theaters.
• The aesthetics and principal features of stereoscopic
3D are thoroughly explained throughout the book
and examined more extensively in the chapters on
the three-dimensional field. The major technical
and aesthetic differences between 3D and virtual
reality (VR) are also spotlighted.
• More engaging than ever, all photos are now
in full color -- except those that emphasize the
aesthetics and power of black-and-white images.
• Although the classic 4 × 3 aspect ratio is still
considered, almost all screen representations
are now shown in the 16 × 9 aspect ratio of highdefinition television (HDTV). The variable aspect
ratios of smartphones are also discussed in this
context.
FEATURES
• The aesthetic liabilities of digital effects and their
potential meta-messages are highlighted.
• With its comprehensive coverage, the text
provides a solid basis for the study of media
literacy -- an educational discipline that has
become an essential prerequisite for producers
as well as consumers of media programs.
• More than 700 visual examples support Zettl’s
thorough coverage of aesthetic theory.
• Providing the most up-to-date material available,
the text reflects the latest ideas of media
aesthetics.
• Extensive information about special effects in film
and video productions is integrated throughout
the text.
• A comprehensive glossary defines all of the
fundamental media aesthetic terms. Students are
encouraged to consult the glossary before reading
the text to ensure complete understanding of the
various concepts.
CONTENTS
About the Author.Preface.Prologue.1. Applied
Media Aesthetics.2. The First Aesthetic Field:
Light.3. Structuring the First Aesthetic Field:
Lighting.4. The Extended First Field: Color.5.
Structuring Color: Function and Composition.6.
The Two-Dimensional Field: Area.7. The TwoDimensional Field: Forces Within the Screen.8.
Structuring the Two-Dimensional Field: Interplay
of Screen Forces.9. The Three-Dimensional Field:
Depth and Volume.10. Structuring the ThreeDimensional Field: Screen Volume and Effects.11.
Building Screen Space: Visualization.12. The FourDimensional Field: Time.13. The Four-Dimensional
Field: Motion.14. Structuring the Four-Dimensional
Field: Timing and Principal Motions.15. The FiveDimensional Field: Sound.16. Structuring the FiveDimensional Field: Sound Structures and Sound/
Picture Combinations.17. Visual Narrative: The
Syntax of Continuity Editing.18. Visual Narrative:
The Syntax of Complexity Editing.Glossary.
Bibliography.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Online Instructor’s Manual for Zettl’s Sight,
Sound, Motion: Applied Media Aesthetics, 8th,
008e, 9781305579620
Instructor’s Web Site for Zettl’s Sight, Sound,
Motion: Applied Media Aesthetics, 8th, 008e,
9781305579644
MindTap® Radio, Television, & Film, 1
term (6 months) Printed Access Card for Zettl’s
Sight, Sound, Motion: Applied Media Aesthetics,
8th, 008e, 9781305579668
term (6 months) Instant Access for Zettl’s Sight,
Sound, Motion: Applied Media Aesthetics, 008e,
9781305579675
MindTap® Radio, Television, & Film for
Zettl’s Sight, Sound, Motion: Applied Media
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305579682
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Radio Television
& Film, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access
for Zettl’s Sight, Sound, Motion: Applied Media
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305580961
www.cengageasia.com
91
•
•
& Film, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card for Zettl’s Sight, Sound, Motion: Applied
Media Aesthetics, 8th, 008e, 9781305580978
3P-EBK:SIGHT SOUND MOTION APPLIED
MEDIA AESTHETICS, 008e, 9781305890350
CS-EBK: SIGHT SOUND MOTION APPLIED
© 2017, 464pp, Hardback, 9781305578906
AUDIO PRODUCTION
context.
FEATURES
through MindTap®.
92
NEW TO THIS EDITION
aesthetics.
the text.
various concepts.
CONTENTS
www.cengageasia.com
Bibliography.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
008e, 9781305579620
9781305579644
8th, 008e, 9781305579668
9781305579675
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305579682
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305580961
•
© 2017, 464pp, Hardback, 9781305578906
AUDIO IN MEDIA, INTERNATIONAL
EDITION, 10E
Stanley R. Alten, Syracuse University
In AUDIO IN MEDIA, 10E, International Edition
Stanley Alten -- internationally recognized as a
scholar and expert in the area of audio production
-- continues to provide students with an introduction
to the basic techniques and principles necessary
for audio production in today’s media. The clear,
current illustrations and photos and student-friendly
writing in Alten’s market-leading text have helped
professors effectively teach this operationally
based course to thousands of introductory audioproduction students. Comprehensive, accurate,
and up-to-date, the text covers informational,
perceptual, and aesthetic aspects of sound as they
apply to each stage of the production process, from
planning to post-production.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The chapter order has been reorganized for
better continuity of subject matter. A new chapter
on Audio for the Internet is at the end of Part
2: Technology. “Premixing and Rerecording
for Television and Film” has been shifted up a
chapter, so that “Music Mixdown” now comes
after it.
• Some chapters have been restructured to facilitate
instruction of their content. For example, “Sound
and the Speaking Voice” has been combined with
“Voice-Overs” and “Narration”.
www.cengageasia.com
93
• There are two new chapters geared toward the
mobile media trend: “Production for Mobile Media”
and “Mixing for Mobile Media.” These chapters are
designed to help students learn and understand
the nuances of sound in the context of a smaller,
mobile speaker.
• A new Chapter 1, “Sound in Production,” is
designed to provide a context for the rest of the
book and includes the considerations important
in evaluating the final product.
• The chapter on “Game Sound” has been revised
with a new program of illustrations.
• All appropriate material has been updated for
current technology standards.
• There are many new illustrations throughout the
book.
FEATURES
• The tenth edition is organized into four clearly
defined sections: Principles, Technology,
Production, Postproduction.
• Although the length of the book has not increased,
there are now 25 chapters, instead of 24, to
facilitate a more focused treatment of content
and make distribution of subject matter easier
to locate and assign. As with previous editions,
the organization facilitates reading chapters in
or out of sequence, based on need and level of
background, with no disruption in continuity.
• Where possible, similar subjects are grouped into
sequential chapters for better flow. For example,
speech-related material is covered in consecutive
chapters on “Sound and the Speaking Voice,
Voice-overs and Narration,” “Dialogue,” and
“Studio Production for Radio and Television.”
Music Underscoring.18. Production for Mobile
Media.19. Game Sound.20. Music Recording.Part
IV: POSTPRODUCTION.21. Editing.22. Mixing:
An Overview.23. Premixing and Rerecording for
Television and Film.24. Music Mixdown.25. Mixing
for Mobile Media.Appendix.Glossary.Bibliography.
Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
© 2014, 624pp, Paperback, 9781133957621
CONTENTS
Part I: PRINCIPLES.1. Sound in Production.2. Sound
and Hearing.3. Acoustics and Psychoacoustics.
Part II: TECHNOLOGY.4. Loudspeakers and
Monitoring.5. Microphones.6. Mixers, Consoles, and
Control Surfaces.7. Recording.8. Synchronization
and Transfers.9. Signal Processors.10. Audio
and the Internet.Part III: PRODUCTION.11.
Sound and the Speaking Voice, Voice-Overs, and
Narration.12. Dialogue.13. Studio Production: Radio
and Television.14. Field Production: News and
Sports.15. Sound Design.16. Sound Effects.17.
94
Online Instructor’s Manual, Intl. Edition for
Alten’s Audio in Media, International Edition,
10th, 010e, 9781133957614
Web Site, Intl. Edition for Alten’s Audio in
Media, International Edition, 10th, 010e,
9781133957607
Web Site for Alten/Quin’s Audio in Media, 10th,
010e, 9781133957638
Online Instructor’s Manual for Alten/Quin’s
Audio in Media, 10th, 010e, 9781133957652
eBook: Audio in Media, 010e, 9781285688855
3I-EBK: ISE AUDIO IN MEDIA, 010e,
9781337009980
www.cengageasia.com
on Meaning.
SUPPLEMENTS
CS-EBK: ADV BK AUDIO BASICS, 001e,
9781111561062
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: Audio Basics,
001e, 9781133033233
eBook: Cengage Advantage Books: Audio Basics,
001e, 9781133379553
© 2012, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495913566
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS:
AUDIO BASICS
BROADCAST HISTORY
Stanley R. Alten, Syracuse University
Written by highly respected author Stan Alten,
AUDIO BASICS provides readers with a fundamental
understanding of the principles, technology, and
techniques of audio production. Because the
material is not medium-specific, readers can apply
techniques to sound production in any of the major
audio and audio/visual media
FEATURES
• Content is generic to facilitate a general
understanding of sound production and to better
complement the “basics” concept of the book.
• Chapters are organized for use selectively, in or
out of sequence, with no disruption in continuity.
• Each chapter is preceded by an outline of its
main headings and concluded with a list of its
main points.
• Key terms are identified in bold italic and defined
in the Glossary.
• A bulleted list of main points appears at the end of
each chapter, helping students review and refresh
their memory of key chapter topics and points.
• More than two hundred and forty illustrations
visually reinforce principles, technical concepts,
and production techniques.
CONTENTS
1. Behavior of Sound.2. The Ear and Hearing.3.
Perception of Sound.4. Studio and Control Room
Design.5. Monitoring.6. Microphones.7. Microphone
Techniques.8. Mixers, Consoles, and Control
Surfaces.9. Recording.10. Synchronization and
Transfers.11. Signal Processors.12. Editing.13.
Mixing.14. Internet Audio.15. Influences of Sound
ONLY CONNECT, 4E
A Cultural History of Broadcasting in the United States
Michele Hilmes, University of Wisconsin, Madison
ONLY CONNECT provides a comprehensive
history of American broadcasting from its earliest
days in radio, through the rise of television, to the
current era of digital media and the Internet. It views
broadcasting as a vital component of American
cultural identity, placing the development of U.S.
radio, television, and new media in the context of
social and cultural change. Each chapter opens
with a discussion of the historical period, thoroughly
traces the development of media policy, the
growth of media industries, and the history of U.S.
broadcast programming, and closes with a look at
the major ways that radio and television have been
understood and discussed throughout American
history. Students learn not just about broadcasting,
but also about U.S. history and American culture
as well.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The 4th Edition has been revised to fully incorporate
www.cengageasia.com
95
digital media.
• A whole new Chapter 13 covers the Web 2.0 era,
including analysis of the new digital media powers
and cross-media convergence culture.
• A new Conclusion looks ahead to the era of media
without borders.
• The end of chapter material has been upgraded
for teaching effectiveness. It now features “Further
Explorations” that combine print, video and online
resources; a new Key Terms and Concepts list;
and a new feature, Questions for Review and
Discussion.
SUPPLEMENTS
CS-EBK: ONLY CONNECT: CULTURAL HISTORY
OF BROADCASTING/US, 004e, 9781285300436
3P-EBK:ONLY CONNECT: CULTURALHISTORY
OF BROADCASTING IN US, 004e, 9781285499864
eBook: Only Connect: A Cultural History of
Broadcasting in the United States, 004e,
9781285703152
© 2014, 512pp, Paperback, 9781133307303
ELECTRONIC MEDIA
MANAGEMENT
FEATURES
• “Breakout Boxes” in almost every chapter
condense complicated information in a table or
chart format to appeal to visual learners.
• Hilmes presents the history of broadcasting from
a cultural perspective to take into account not
only the technology, digital and regulation factors,
but also the impact of cultural values, social
discourses, and audience formations.
• Specific “Connections” case studies in each
chapter illustrate and develop the historical forces
traced in each era to make complex material
easy to understand. These in-depth examples
of particular themes and trends encourage
students to make connections to broad industry
or regulation issues.
• Chapter-opening “Social Context” features provide
contextual material for students to grasp the
historical framework for that era of broadcasting.
• Global developments are integrated with U.S.
history throughout the book to help to students
understand the global nature of broadcasting.
CONTENTS
1. Making History.2. Before Broadcasting.3.
Broadcasting Begins, 1919 to 1926.4. The Network
Age, 1926 to 1940.5. Radio for Everyone, 1926 to
1940.6. War at Home and Abroad, 1940 to 1945.7. At
Last Television, 1945 to 1955.8. The Domesticated
Medium, 1955 to 1965.9. The Classic Network
System, 1965 to 1975.10. Rising Discontent, 1975
to 1985.11. The Big Change, 1985 to 1995.12.
Entering the Digital Era, 1995-2005.13. Chapter
13: Baby, It’s You: Web 2.0, 2005-.14. Conclusion:
Media Without Borders.
96
MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC AND
DIGITAL MEDIA, 6E
Alan B. Albarran, University of North Texas
Packed with real-life examples and case studies,
MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL
MEDIA, 6e, provides the latest information on
the management and leadership techniques and
strategies used in the electronic and digital media
industries. The text is popular with professors and
students alike for its contemporary approach and
clear, current illustrations. Succinctly written, the
Sixth Edition covers the most important aspects
for future managers, leaders, and entrepreneurs
in the rapidly evolving media industries -- and
includes an all-new chapter: “Media Management:
Manager/Leader/Entrepreneur”. Social media is
integrated throughout. New coverage highlights
trends in big data, mobile, social media, and the
cloud. In addition, end-of-chapter case studies put
the student in the role of a manager in a decision-
www.cengageasia.com
making environment.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Thoroughly revised and updated, MANAGEMENT
OF ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL MEDIA, 6e
delivers an expanded focus on management,
leadership, and entrepreneurship throughout
the text, including an all-new chapter: “Media
Management: Manager/Leader/Entrepreneur”.
• Comprehensive revisions throughout the book
reflect new trends in big data, mobile, social
media, and the cloud, and how it impacts the
media industries -- ensuring students have the
most up-to-the-minute coverage available.
• A number of new and revised case studies reflect
the changing managerial environment and the
challenges in leading media organizations, giving
students plenty of hands-on experience working
through problems and issues facing today’s
managers.
FEATURES
Financial Management.6. Managing Personnel.7.
Audiences and Audience Research.8. Content:
Strategy and Distribution.9. Marketing.10. News
and News Management.11. Regulatory Influences
on Media Management.12. Technology Influence
on Media Management.13. Media Management:
The Manager/Leader/Entrepreneur.Glossary of Key
Terms.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Online Instructor’s Manual for Albarran’s
Management of Electronic and Digital Media,
6th, 006e, 9781305106697
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Albarran’s
Management of Electronic and Digital Media,
6th, 006e, 9781305106741
CS-EBK: MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC
AND DIGITAL MEDIA, 006e, 9781305982185
eBook: Management of Electronic and Digital
Media, 006e, 9781305984042
© 2017, 368pp, Paperback, 9781305077560
• Completely up to date, the Sixth Edition includes
all the latest information on management,
leadership, and entrepreneurship across the
rapidly evolving media industries.
• Case studies at the end of each chapter present
opportunities for critical thinking through real-world
management scenarios, giving students firsthand
experience grappling with decisions they would
make as media managers.
• The book’s thorough and current coverage of all
technical and industry standards is presented in
a succinct and accessible manner. Dr. Albarran
condenses complex material into engaging,
student-friendly paragraphs.
• Reflecting the most recent developments and
practices from the field, Albarran’s contemporary
approach to management keeps pace with the
latest trends revolving around social media, big
data, and mobile applications.
CONTENTS
Preface.Abbreviations and Acronyms.1. Managing
Electronic and Digital Media.2. The Media
Business Environment: Markets, Business Models,
Mergers, Alliances, and Partnerships.3. Ethics
of Management.4. Theories of Management.5.
MEDIA PROGRAMMING, 9E
Strategies and Practices, International Edition
Susan Tyler Eastman, Indiana University; Douglas A.
Ferguson, College of Charleston
Written by recognized leaders in the field, MEDIA
PROGRAMMING, 9E, International Edition delivers
the most accurate coverage of techniques and
strategies used in the programming industry
today. Reflecting the latest developments from
real-world practice, this market-leading text covers
all aspects of media programming for broadcast
and cable television, radio, and the Internet with
clear, current illustrations and examples. It offers
in-depth coverage of emerging trends, including
www.cengageasia.com
97
multiplatform strategies, cross-media, new media,
high definition media, new programming strategies,
and wireless and pay-per-view media. This proven
text continues to focus on how programs (units of
content) are selected (or not selected), arranged,
evaluated, and promoted with the need to consider
pressures from technology, financing, regulations,
policies, and marketing.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• There are two new chapters, “Multi-Channel
Television Strategies” and “Online Television
Strategies.”
• Multiplatform strategies are introduced, and
the use of multiplatform strategies is discussed
extensively.
• New discussion on how cross-media has become
enmeshed media.
• New media and its impact on existing media is
discussed throughout the text.
• The death of analog and shift to digital are
discussed.
• The notion of “reducing, reusing, and recycling” is
discussed in regard to networks decreasing the
number of highly priced programs and replaying
or recycling existing content.
• The impact that wireless and pay-per-use models
will have on the future of media is discussed.
FEATURES
• Comprehensive: MEDIA PROGRAMMING, 9E,
International Edition continues to focus on how
programs are selected (or not selected), arranged
in schedules or menus of various kinds, evaluated
by the industry, and promoted to audiences and
advertisers. The text also considers the limits
on options arising from technology, financing,
regulations, policies, and marketing needs.
• Current: Reflecting a changing industry, one of
the text’s central themes is that the way content
is paid for determines much of its structure
and availability. Another theme is how the
mass orientation and rigid content of traditional
broadcasting has reacted to pressure from the
emerging online and mobile media.
• Complete: The new edition also illustrates that
once-clear distinctions between networks,
syndicators, and cable companies are dissolving
98
and that media conglomerates are now coopting and commercializing online and mobile
program content. Still, patterns of daily work and
living influence the availability of most media
entertainment content and realities of economics
overshadow all aspects of media programming.
CONTENTS
Part I: INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING.1. A
Scaffold for Programmers.Part II: FRAMEWORKS
FOR MEDIA PROGRAMMING.2. Prime-Time
Network Strategies.3. Multichannel Television
Strategies.4. Online Television Strategies.Part III:
UNDERSTANDING KEY PROCESSES.5. Program
and Audience Research and Ratings.6. Syndication
for Stations, Cable and Online.Part IV: TELEVISION
PROGRAMMING PRACTICES.7. Non-PrimeTime Network Programming.8. Television Station
Programming Strategies.9. Basic and Premium
Subscription Programming.10. Public Television
Programming.Part V: AUDIO PROGRAMMING
PRACTICES.11. Music Programming.12.
Informational Programming.Bibliography of Recent
Publications.Internet Media Sites.About the
Contributing Authors.Index to Program Titles.
General Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Online Instructor’s Manual for Eastman/
Ferguson’s Media Programming: Strategies and
Practices, 9th, 009e, 9781111826345
Web Site for Eastman/Ferguson’s Media
Programming: Strategies and Practices, 9th,
009e, 9781111826376
eBook: Media Programming: Strategies and
Practices, 009e, 9781285205717
3I-EBK: ISE-MEDIA PROGRAMMING:
STRATEGIES AND PRACTICES, 009e,
9781337004961
© 2013, 496pp, Paperback, 9781111835026
www.cengageasia.com
INTRODUCTION TO FILM
ESSENTIAL CINEMA
An Introduction to Film Analysis, International Edition
Jon Lewis, Oregon State University
Succinct, lively, and affordable, ESSENTIAL
CINEMA: AN INTRODUCTION TO FILM ANALYSIS,
International Edition provides a clear focus on
developing students’ skills in film analysis. Offering
the most engaging instruction available, this exciting
First Edition is packed with frame captures students
will readily relate to. It also features interviews with
film practitioners throughout, giving students insight
into real-world practice in today’s field. Videos
of the complete interviews are available through
the eBook version as well as the text website. In
addition, unique screening questions help students
apply chapter concepts to any film they watch, while
the running glossary and end-of-text illustrated
glossary ensure students have easy access to full
explanations of concepts.
FEATURES
• Extremely engaging and student friendly,
ESSENTIAL CINEMA: AN INTRODUCTION TO
FILM ANALYSIS features a higher picture-to-text
ratio than other textbooks, which translates into a
more visual mode of instruction. The majority of
the 660 pictures are frames captured from DVDs.
Thoroughly discussed in the text, the pictures help
students see principles in action and develop their
skills in close analysis.
• Included in almost every chapter, “Making Movies”
boxes feature an interview with a film practitioner
to give students real-world insights into how
filmmakers think about the concepts explored
in the chapter. A fuller version of the interview,
recorded on video, is accessible on the book’s
website and clickable in the ebook version.
• Screening questions at the end of every chapter
help students apply chapter concepts to any film
they watch. The questions also help generate
ideas for writing papers and prompt lively class
discussion.
• Bringing chapter content together, end-of-chapter
“Focus” boxes show students how to apply key
concepts in annotated images or text.
• Each chapter has a running glossary of key
terms in the margin to help students master the
vocabulary of film. An illustrated glossary at the
end of the text offers further explanations.
• Offering succinct yet comprehensive coverage,
the text features chapters on film form and style;
writing about film; documentary, experimental,
and animation; film history; and the film business.
CONTENTS
1. ANALYZING MOVIES. The Magic of Movies.
Movies as Entertainment and Art. How to “Read”
a Film.2. NARRATIVE AND GENRE.Narrative
Structure. Characters. Genre.3. MISE-EN-SCÈNE.
The Set. Costumes, Make-Up, and Hair. Blocking
and Performance. The Lights.4. CAMERAWORK.
Camera Placement. Camera Movement. Focus
and Depth. The Plastic Material: Stock, Exposure,
and Effects.5. EDITING.Elements of Editing.
Continuity Editing. Alternative Editing Styles.6.
SOUND.Sound and Image. The Voice Track. Music.
Sound Effects. Sound Editing and Mixing. 7. THE
COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL CONTEXTS.
The Business of Film. Distribution and Marketing.
Exhibition.8. DOCUMENTARY, ANIMATED, AND
EXPERIMENTAL FILMS.Documentary. Animation.
Experimental Film.9. FILM HISTORY.Hollywood.
American Independents. Europe. Non-Western
Film.10. WRITING ABOUT FILM. Essay Writing
Strategies. Research and Citation.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
CourseMate for Lewis’ Essential Cinema:
An Introduction to Film Analysis, 001e,
9781285172750
CourseMate with InfoTrac® Instant Access for
Lewis’ Essential Cinema: An Introduction to Film
Analysis, 001e, 9781285172804
www.cengageasia.com
99
•
•
•
•
CourseMate with InfoTrac® Printed Access Card
for Lewis’ Essential Cinema: An Introduction to
Film Analysis, 001e, 9781285172828
Instructor’s Web Site for Lewis’ Essential
Cinema: An Introduction to Film Analysis, 001e,
9781285172897
eBook: Essential Cinema: An Introduction to
Film Analysis, 001e, 9781285604787
3I-EBK: ISE ESSENTIAL CINEMA
INTRODUCTION TO FILM ANALYSIS, 001e,
9781337008501
© 2014, 352pp, Paperback, 9781285192925
RADIO PRODUCTION
MODERN RADIO AND AUDIO
PRODUCTION, 10E
Programming and Performance
Carl Hausman, Rowan University; Frank (Fritz) Messere,
State University of New York-Oswego; Philip Benoit,
Millersville University
More flexible than ever, MODERN RADIO AND
AUDIO PRODUCTION: PROGRAMMING AND
PERFORMANCE, 10e delivers comprehensive,
cutting-edge coverage that enables instructors to
choose whether they focus on audio, radio, or a
combination of both. Completely up to date, the
text features new material on the latest trends and
technologies along with explanations of traditional
equipment and practices. The authors’ clear writing
style, excellent descriptions and explanations, and
attention to detail make the text extremely student
friendly. In addition to new examples, illustrations,
and photos throughout, the text’s three all-new
chapters focus on writing, ethics, and mobile radio.
100
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• As the new title suggests, MODERN RADIO AND
AUDIO PRODUCTION: PROGRAMMING AND
PERFORMANCE, 10e is designed to be used
in either an audio course or a radio course-or a
course that combines both areas.
• Offering coverage that is both comprehensive and
thorough, the Tenth Edition is organized into five
parts: Audio Fundamentals, Radio Fundamentals,
Aural Communication, Specialized Production,
and the Business of Radio.
• With an updated two color interior text, the text’s
comprehensive coverage and flexible organization
enable instructors to easily pick and choose
chapters and sections to focus on radio or to
emphasize audio or to combine the two.
• Most references to and illustrations of legacy
media are now included in a condensed appendix.
• Completely up to date, the Tenth Edition reflects
the latest research and practices from the field.
It has been thoroughly updated throughout and
includes new examples, illustrations, and photos.
• An all-new Chapter 11: Writing for the Ear
accommodates instructors who use a heavy
writing component in their classes. It also makes
Part III a more rounded module to help professors
who want to focus primarily on writing.
• An all-new Chapter 20: Ethics and the
Communication Professional is packed with
examples of ethical decision-making-a must
for someone entering a career in which ethical
transgressions can be magnified by technology.
Students are enabled to think step by step through
ethical situations before they ever have to face
them on the job.
• An all-new Chapter 18: Mobile Radio and the
Battle for the Dashboard brings the text to the
border of the new frontier of radio-the digitally
controlled car dashboard.
FEATURES
• Integrating up-to-date explanations of current
technologies, MODERN RADIO AND AUDIO
PRODUCTION: PROGRAMMING AND
PERFORMANCE maintains the central theme that
radio is primarily about communicating a message
and is secondarily about hardware.
• The text’s historical perspective illustrates how
www.cengageasia.com
technologies have changed radio in the past and
explains what that might mean for our future.
VIDEO & FILM PRODUCTION
CONTENTS
1. Production in Modern Radio and Online Audio
Media.Part I: AUDIO FUNDAMENTALS.2.
Sound and Microphones.3. Consoles.4.
Playback and Recording Technology.5. Editing.
Part II: RADIO FUNDAMENTALS.6. Recorded
Program Production.7. Live, On-Air Production.8.
Computer-Driven Technology.Part III: AURAL
COMMUNICATION.9. Achieving an Effect.10.
Drama and Dramatic Elements in Radio.11. Writing
for the Ear.Part IV: SPECIALIZED PRODUCTION.12.
Commercial Production.13. News Production.14.
Remote and Sports Production.15. Advanced
Production: Multichannel, Music, and Special
Effects.Part V: The Business of Radio-Legacy and
New Media Models.16. Production, Programming,
and the Modern Format.17. Radio and the New
Digital Infrastructure.18. Mobile Radio and the Battle
for the Dashboard.19. Entrepreneurial Radio.20.
Ethics and the Communication Professional.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Online Instructor’s Manual for Hausman/Benoit/
Messere’s Modern Radio and Audio Production:
Programming and Performance, 10th, 010e,
9781305077515
Web Site for Hausman/Benoit/Messere’s Modern
Radio and Audio Production: Programming and
Performance, 10th, 010e, 9781305077522
CS-EBK: MODERN RADIO PRODUCTION/
PROGRAMMING/PRFRMNC, 010e,
9781305448407
eBook: Modern Radio and Audio Production:
Programming and Performance, 010e,
9781305741119
© 2016, 448pp, Paperback, 9781305077492
through MindTap®.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
www.cengageasia.com
101
context.
Bibliography.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
FEATURES
aesthetics.
the text.
various concepts.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONTENTS
102
•
•
008e, 9781305579620
9781305579644
8th, 008e, 9781305579668
9781305579675
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305579682
Aesthetics, 008e, 9781305580961
© 2017, 464pp, Hardback, 9781305578906
www.cengageasia.com
of color has been moved from the camera chapter
to the design chapter.
• This edition discusses the basic equipment
features as well as perceptual and production
principles of stereo 3D. Zettle also covers
all important new equipment, including 3D
camcorders, 4K and 8K digital cinema cameras,
portable switchers, LED lighting instruments, and
digital lighting control systems.
FEATURES
TELEVISION PRODUCTION
HANDBOOK, 12E
In the field-defining text TELEVISION PRODUCTION
HANDBOOK, author Herbert Zettl emphasizes
how production proceeds in the digital age-from
idea to image-and how it moves through the three
major phases, from preproduction to production
to postproduction. In this context, Zettl describes
the necessary tools, considers what they can
and cannot do, and explains how they are used
to ensure maximum efficiency and effectiveness.
This edition features the latest digital equipment
and production techniques, including stereo 3D,
3D camcorders, 4K and 8K digital cinema cameras,
portable switchers, LED lighting instruments, and
digital lighting control systems.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Since the last edition, digital technology has
established itself so firmly in all facets of television
production equipment that the difference between
analog and digital signals no longer justifies
an entire chapter. Consequently, the previous
edition’s Chapter 5, “Analog and Digital Television,”
has been removed and the remaining information
about digital processes has been integrated into
several other chapters.
• Coverage of videotape production has been
removed, as it is typically now used out of
necessity rather than choice.
• Material has been honed and clarified, pared to
eliminate unnecessary repetition, and in some
cases relocated to create even more cohesive
learning units. For example, the major discussion
• Topics are organized to reflect an actual production
sequence as much as possible.
• This text is designed for beginning students and
those who are more adept at television production.
To keep less advanced readers from getting
bogged down by the multitude of technical details,
each chapter has two sections. Section 1 contains
the basic information about a specific topic;
Section 2 presents more detailed material. The
two sections can be assigned and read together
or independently.
• Given the pervasiveness of digital tools and more
user-friendly equipment, emphasis has shifted
from describing what the tools are to explaining
what to do with them in each production phase.
• Repetition is one way to facilitate learning
television production vocabulary. Key terms
are explained at the beginning of each chapter,
then used in context within the chapter, and
summarized again in the main points and glossary
sections.
• Several hundred full-color pictures and diagrams
help to clarify the narrative.
CONTENTS
1. The Television Production Process. 2. The
Producer In Preproduction.3. The Script.4. The
Director In Preproduction. 5. The Television Camera.
6. Lenses. 7. Camera Operation And Picture
Composition.8. Audio: Sound Pickup.9. Audio:
Sound Control. 10. Lighting. 11. Techniques Of
Television Lighting. 12. Video-Recording Systems
And Procedures. 13. Switching, Or Instantaneous
Editing. 14. Design. 15. Television Talent. 16. The
Director In Production. 17. Field Production And Big
Remotes. 18. Postproduction Editing: How It Works.
19. Editing Functions And Principles.
www.cengageasia.com
103
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
104
Instructor’s Companion Web Site for Zettl’s
Television Production Handbook, 12th, 012e,
9781285464886
Student Workbook for Zettl’s Television
Production Handbook, 12th, 012e,
9781285464879
ExamView® for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 12th, 012e, 9781285464923
CourseMate for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 012e, 9781285764597
CS-EBK: TELEVISION PRODUCTION
HANDBOOK, 012e, 9781285805412
for Zettl’s Television Production Handbook,
012e, 9781285764573
CourseMate, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 12th, 012e, 9781285764603
MindTap Reader for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 012e, 9781285845098
Access for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 012e, 9781285864921
Access Card for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 12th, 012e, 9781285864945
months) Instant Access for Zettl’s Television
Production Handbook, 012e, 9781285864990
(6 months) Printed Access Card for Zettl’s
9781285865003
MindTap® Radio/TV/Film for Zettl’s Television
MindTap® Radio/TV/Film, 1 term (6 months)
Printed Access Card for Zettl’s Television
MindTap® Radio/TV/Film, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Zettl’s Television Production
Handbook, 012e, 9781285856407
Online Instructor’s Manual with Answer Key for
Zettle’s Television Production Handbook, 12th,
012e, 9781305091849
Blackboard MindLink for MindTap® Radio/
TV/Film Instant Access for Zettl’s Television
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Radio/TV/
Film, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Zettl’s Television Production Handbook, 012e,
9781305103313
•
•
•
Blackboard MindLink for MindTap® Radio/
TV/Film Printed Access Card for Zettl’s
9781305103320
LMS Integrated for MindTap® Radio/TV/Film, 1
9781305103337
eBook: Television Production Handbook, 012e,
9781305225954
© 2015, 528pp, Hardback, 9781285052670
FILM PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE, 6E
Creating the Accomplished Image
Bruce Mamer,
FILM PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE (FPT):
CREATING THE ACCOMPLISHED IMAGE, 6e,
is aimed at the basic production course taken by
radio/tv/film majors. FPT, 6e, delivers a technical
and aesthetic introduction to media production that
couples video production techniques with strong
emphasis on incorporating motion picture film into
a project’s workflow. The text serves as a primer
for all students, but is especially valuable to those
students with limited background in the field of
media production. FPT, 6e explores cutting-edge
technologies as well as traditional Hollywood
techniques, covering lighting, cameras, editing,
crew organization, and the production process. It
also lays out the basic, conventional approach to
scene structure in a straightforward and methodical
manner.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• In order to reflect the impact of the recent DSLR
revolution, more digital camera technologies are
www.cengageasia.com
discussed, including high end cameras such as
the Red and the Alexa, as well as some of the
Sony models.
• A new chapter entirely devoted to digital video
provides students insight into the changing
industry.
• Chapter 10 has been extensively reworked to
include updated information on digital audio
information in order to reflect the current realities
of the industry.
• A revised Chapter 18 includes discussions of
workflows and expanded coverage of the digital
intermediate process.
• Chapters have been reorganized to follow a more
natural flow of film production.
• Chapters on the technical characteristics of video
will fully address transferring film to video, further
considerations of matchback information, and the
possible pitfalls of transferring video into nonlinear
editing systems.
• Explanations of workflows and the integration of
films and video have been updated.
FEATURES
• The sixth edition continues to explore the
relationship of film and video during preproduction,
production, and production.
• Emphasizing the Hollywood style of filmmaking,
FILM PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE: CREATING
THE ACCOMPLISHED IMAGE, Sixth Edition,
is organized around five sections that focus on
producing a film from start to finish: Blocking for
the Camera, The Camera, Video and Sound,
Lighting and Exposure, and Editing.
• The text focuses on film and explores current
digital camera technologies.
CONTENTS
PART I: BLOCKING FOR THE CAMERA.1.
Creating the Shots.2. Constructing the Scene.3.
Crew Organization.4. Previsualization.PART
II: THE CAMERA.5. The Camera Body.6. The
Lens.7. Capturing the Film Image.8. The Video
Camera.PART III: SOUND.9. Video Origination and
Film Transfer.10. Sound.11. Composition.PART
IV: LIGHTING AND EXPOSURE.12. Concepts
and Equipment.13. Exposure and Latitude.14.
Planning the Lighting.15. Executing the Lighting.
PART V: EDITING.16. Principles, Procedures,
and Equipment.17. Cutting Picture and Sound.18.
Finishing Film/Finishing Video.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
CS-EBK: FILM PRODUCTION TECHNIQUE:
CREATING THE ACCOMP IMAGE, 006e,
9781285301327
eBook: Film Production Technique: Creating the
Accomplished Image, 006e, 9781285954530
© 2014, 528pp, Paperback, 9780840030917
VIDEO BASICS, 7E
Herbert Zettl draws on his expertise and field
experience to bring you the seventh edition
of VIDEO BASICS, the handiest and most
authoritative, current, and technically accurate
student guide to video production available.
Meeting the need for a briefer book, this text distills
comprehensive video instruction so that it can be
covered in a single semester. The book moves
students from video concepts and processes to
production tools and techniques and, finally, to the
production environment (studio and field, inside
and outside) and its effects. A more conceptual
framework leads students from the idea (what to
create) to the image (how to create) on video.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• All chapters of this edition have been updated and,
wherever necessary, the text streamlined and the
concepts clarified.
• High-definition video (HDV) was eliminated
because it has been replaced by true highdefinition television (HDTV) even in small
www.cengageasia.com
105
consumer camcorders.
• Some of the content in Chapter 3 (Image
Formation and Digital Video) has been rearranged
and some eliminated to make this admittedly
demanding chapter as painless as possible for
the reader.
• Super HDTV scanning modes, normally used for
digital cinema, are introduced.
• DSLR cameras and some mounting equipment
are now discussed.
• 3D video is explained in Chapter 4 (Video Camera)
and Chapter 6 (Looking Through the Viewfinder).
• LED lighting equipment and its studio use have
been added.
• Tapeless recording media and nonlinear editing
are stressed throughout the text.
FEATURES
• VIDEO BASICS acknowledges that digital video is
now an established medium. References to analog
are made only to help explain the digital process
or the analog equipment that is still in use.
• All chapters have been updated and streamlined
and the concepts clarified. To explain some of the
often-puzzling terminology of digital television and
the various scanning systems, Chapter 3 explores
the major differences between the scanning,
sampling, and compression standards of digital
television (DTV), high-definition video (HDV), and
high-definition television (HDTV).
CONTENTS
Part I: PRODUCTION: PROCESSES AND PEOPLE.
1. Production Process.2. Production Team: Who
Does What When?Part II: IMAGE CREATION:
DIGITAL VIDEO AND CAMERA. 3. Image Formation
and Digital Video.4. Video Camera.5. Operating the
Camera.6. Looking Through the Viewfinder.Part III:
IMAGE CREATION: SOUND, LIGHT, GRAPHICS,
AND EFFECTS. 7. Audio and Sound Control.8. Light,
Color, and Lighting.9. Graphics and Effects.Part IV:
IMAGE CONTROL: SWITCHING, RECORDING,
AND EDITING.10. Switcher and Switching.11.
Video Recording.12. Postproduction: Linear and
Nonlinear Editing.13. Editing Principles.Part V:
PRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT: STUDIO, FIELD,
AND SYNTHETIC. 14. Production Environment:
Studio.15. Production Environment: Field, and
106
Synthetic.Part VI: PRODUCTION CONTROL:
TALENT AND DIRECTING.16. Talent, Clothing,
and Makeup.17. Putting It All Together: Directing.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
Instructor’s Manual for Zettl’s Video Basics, 7th,
007e, 9781111835859
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Zettl’ Video
Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781111836238
Student Workbook for Zettl’s Video Basics, 7th,
007e, 9781111837105
CourseMate Printed Access Card for Zettl’s
Video Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781111969066
CourseMate Instant Access for Zettl’s Video
Basics, 007e, 9781111969073
CourseMate for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e,
9781111969080
Interactive eBook for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e,
9781111969097
Interactive Quizzing for Zettl’s Video Basics,
007e, 9781133351887
Gateway Printed Access Card for Zettl’s Video
Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781133351894
Gateway, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access Code
for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e, 9781133351900
Gateway, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e, 9781133351917
Gateway Printed Access Card for Zettl’s Video
Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781133351924
CS-EBK: VIDEO BASICS, 007e, 9781133345992
eBook: Video Basics, 007e, 9781133974031
MindTap Reader for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e,
9781285036120
In Store eBook Printed Access Card for Zettl’s
Video Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781285090450
Quizzing with Flash Cards Instant Access for
Zettl’s Video Basics, 9781285788074
Quizzing with Flash Cards for Zettl’s Video
Basics, 007e, 9781285788081
Quizzing Instant Access for Zettl’s Video Basics,
9781285791876
Quizzing for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e,
9781285791883
Flash Cards Instant Access for Zettl’s Video
•
•
Basics, 9781285795676
Flash Cards for Zettl’s Video Basics, 007e,
9781285795683
LMS Integrated CourseMate with eBook 1 term
(6 months) Instant Access for Zettl’s Video
Basics, 7th, 007e, 9781305947672
© 2013, 448pp, Paperback, 9781111344467
of modern moviemaking.
• The authors have increased their focus on the
aesthetic and practical considerations of every
aspect of moviemaking, from multi-camera and
fast camera shooting to high-definition television
and editing visual effects.
• This edition includes more information on modern
forms of editing beyond typical Hollywood
continuity editing, such as the increasing use of
digital sound techniques.
• The section on visual effects has been reorganized
to reflect their importance in modern movies.
• Students will discover updated information from
the quickly-evolving area of digital cinema, as well
as new considerations for mobile media.
FEATURES
DIGITAL MOVIEMAKING,
Lynne S. Gross, California State University, Fullerton; Larry
W. Ward, California State University, Fullerton
DIGITAL MOVIEMAKING, International Edition
guides students of any level through the technical and
aesthetic aspects of moviemaking by highlighting
the decisions that are made throughout the creative
process as well as the strategies filmmakers
develop to bring their vision to life. Throughout
the text, author Lynn S. Gross emphasizes the
directorial and storytelling functions of narrative
film and beyond—from the forethought and care
required for each facet of production to the technical
information that anyone engaged in making
movies should know. This edition reflects the
rapidly-evolving nature of digital cinema, with new
information on cutting-edge equipment, techniques,
and formats that places students at the forefront of
moviemaking today.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Discussions of new equipment such as the Red
One camera, more efficient lights, and software
for image stabilization and scene synching are
incorporated throughout the text, offering students
up-to-the minute information on the possibilities
• The text’s organization balances the duality of
the moviemaking process through the alternating
presentation of a technical chapter followed by an
aesthetic chapter.
• A four-page, full-color insert illustrates the role of
color in moviemaking, including example shots
from modern movies that effectively use color
and light.
• Reflecting the most current technological trends
in the field, DIGITAL MOVIEMAKING presents
sections on authoring DVDs, using high-definition
television equipment, and inexpensively creating
visual effects.
• A chapter on digital cinema titled “The Final Stages
of Moviemaking” offers students suggestions for
the distribution and exhibition of their movies, as
well as information on how filters, color correction,
and compositing are utilized in postproduction.
• More than 15 downloadable forms useful for movie
production are available on the Book Companion
Website.
CONTENTS
1. Overview of Moviemaking.2. Planning the
Movie.3. Cameras.4. Approaches to Image
Capturing.5. Lighting.6. Approaches to Lighting.7.
Microphones and Recorders.8. Approaches to
Sound Recording.9. Directing.10. Editing.11.
Approaches to Editing.12. Enhanced Sound and
Picture.13. Approaches to Enhanced Sound and
Picture.14. The Final Stages of Moviemaking.
www.cengageasia.com
107
Glossary.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
eBank Instructor’s Manual for Gross/Ward’s Digital
Moviemaking, 6th, 006e, 9780495090687
Web Site for Gross/Ward’s Digital Moviemaking,
6th, 006e, 9780495090694
© 2009, 304pp, Paperback, 9780495571346
VOICE & ARTICULATION
audio tapes contain all exercises from the text
with time for student responses. They are offered
for sale to students and adopters who wish to use
them in their classroom.
• Only text on the market to include extensive
information on regional and national accents
(Chapters 12 and 13, Appendix A), extremely
beneficial to schools that have high enrollments
of non-native speakers.
• Strong Chapter 2 on Breathing provides more indepth coverage than any other text for the course.
CONTENTS
VOICE AND ARTICULATION, 5E
Kenneth C. Crannell, Emerson College
Crannell’s text offers students a chance to both learn
and do. First, students read to discover how their
vocal apparatus works and find ways to recognize
a variety of speech patterns. Then, as they practice
with the numerous and varied exercises provided in
the text, they develop the skills needed for personal
and professional success.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New drills and exercises with a CD to accompany
the text.
• More diversity in the selections from world
literature.
• Revision of Chapter 11 (Application to the Speech
Occasion) with a detailed discussion of various
speaking occasions possible in the professional
and personal development.
• Extensive use of the internet and YouTube for
visuals and support information.
FEATURES
• Only text on the market to offer book-specific
audiotapes created by the text’s author. These
108
PART I: VOICE. 1. Motivation and Expectation. 2.
Breathing. 3. The Voice. 4. Vocal Relaxation. 5.
Common Voice Problems. PART II: SPEECH. 6.
The Production of Vowels. 7. The Production of
Consonants. 8. Pronunciation. 9. Vocal Dynamics.
10. Kinetics. 11. Application to the Speech
Occasion. 12. The Four Major Dialects of American
English. 13. Stage Speech and Selected Foreign
Accents. APPENDICES: A. English Pronunciation
for Asian-Language Speakers. B. News Copy and
Commercials. C. Voice and Speech Evaluation
Forms. GLOSSARY. INDEX OF NAMES AND
TOPICS. INDEX OF AUTHORS AND SELECTIONS.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CS-EBK: VOICE & ARTICULATION, 005e,
9781111561222
Instructor’s Manual for Crannell’s Voice and
Articulation, 5th, 005e, 9781111346010
Communications CourseMate for Crannell’s
Voice and Articulation, 005e, 9781111475062
Communications CourseMate with eBook
Instant Access Code for Crannell’s Voice and
Articulation, 005e, 9781111475079
Communications CourseMate with eBook
Instant Printed Access Card for Crannell’s Voice
and Articulation, 5th, 005e, 9781111475086
eBook: Voice and Articulation, 005e,
9781111936792
eBook: Voice and Articulation, 005e,
9781133381570
MindTap Reader for Crannell’s Voice and
Articulation, 005e, 9781133434160
© 2012, 432pp, Paperback, 9780534514990
www.cengageasia.com
WRITING FOR RADIO,
TELEVISION & FILM
backgrounds.
• New boxed material highlights, illustrates and
entertains students as it reinforces chapter
concepts.
FEATURES
WHEN WORDS COLLIDE, 9E
Lauren Kessler, University of Oregon; Duncan McDonald,
University of Oregon
Offering solutions for today’s cross-platform, multimedia writing environment, Kessler and McDonald’s
WHEN WORDS COLLIDE, 9e is praised by
students and professors alike for its straightforward
presentation of grammar and writing guidelines.
This versatile handbook works for both beginning
and continuing media writers, providing concise,
clear explanations and examples, as well as quick
and accurate answers to common grammar and
usage questions. The unique “from writer to writer”
perspective guides students step by step through
the writing process. The Ninth Edition emphasizes
the importance of language skills to help students
quickly learn to create effective prose. Its simplified
rules appeal to students from a broad variety of
backgrounds. In addition, engaging new boxed
features reinforce key concepts.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• More student friendly than ever, WHEN WORDS
COLLIDE, 9e features a vivid new two-color
interior that makes text material easier to read,
follow and understand.
• A renewed emphasis on the importance of
language skills helps students quickly learn to
create crisp, clear and compelling prose.
• Simplified grammatical rules and regulations
throughout the book put grammar mastery
within reach for students-no matter what their
• Beginning with Chapter 1: “Grammar Lives!”,
WHEN WORDS COLLIDE, 9e focuses on the
dynamic, evolving, cross-platform, multi-media
environment for today’s writers.
• This versatile handbook can be used both as an
easy-to-use reference tool and as a grammar/
usage textbook-making it a meaningful addition
to any writer’s bookshelf long after the course is
complete.
• Timeless and appropriate examples compare
correct with incorrect uses, enabling students to
see as well as hear the difference.
• Chapter 2: “Ten Little Secrets, Ten Big Mistakes”
engages students with the writing process right
from the beginning of the text and provides them
with effective tips and tactics for successful writing.
• The text’s two appendices focus on homonyms
and homophones as well as troublesome verb
forms, giving students additional insight into
unraveling the complexities of English grammar.
• Throughout the text, students will enjoy the
authors’ clear, concise explanations of important
grammar issues delivered in a lighthearted,
conversational tone.
CONTENTS
PART I: UNDERSTANDING GRAMMAR AND
STYLE.1. Grammar Lives!2. Ten Little Secrets:
Ten Big Mistakes.3. The Sentence. 4. Power
UP with the Verb!5. Working with the Verb: The
Captain’s View.6. Making the Case for Agreement.
7. Punctuation: Your Symphony of Signals and
Stops.8. Clarity and Conciseness.9. Style. PART
II: YOUR SPEEDY GRAMMAR AND WORD USE
GUIDE.Appendix A: Homonyms, Homophones,
Spell-Checks, Oh My!Appendix B: Irregular (Make
That Troublesome) Verb Forms.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
Student Workbook for Kessler/McDonald’s
When Words Collide, 9th, 009e, 9781285764351
Online Answer Key for Kessler/McDonald’s
www.cengageasia.com
109
•
•
•
•
•
•
Web Site for Kessler/McDonald’s When Words
Collide, 9th, 009e, 9781285764375
CS-EBK: WHEN WORDS COLLIDE, 009e,
9781285803470
Cengage Advantage Books: When Words Collide
with Student Workbook, 009e, 9781285764429
3P-EBK:WHEN WORDS COLLIDE, 009e,
9781305178458
Student Workbook for Kessler/McDonald’s
eBook: When Words Collide, 009e,
9781305549166
© 2016, 224pp, Spiral, 9781285052472
on social media allows today’s students to
understand the continued importance of clear
writing and shows them how their digital skills can
transfer to career opportunities.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The eleventh edition includes new and updated
material on writing for the Internet, particularly
as related to social media. Guidance pertaining
to writing on Facebook, LinkedIn, and Twitter
keep the book current and ensure that students
understand the relevance of what they are
studying.
• Chapter 4, “Commercials and Announcements,”
has been updated to include material on writing
effective commercials for social media.
• Chapter 11, “Professional Opportunities,” has
been revised to reflect the use of LinkedIn and
other social media, and includes additional tips
on seeking and handling interviews in the rapidly
evolving communications job market.
• New examples of scripts include political spots
reflecting the 2012 national elections.
FEATURES
WRITING FOR TELEVISION, RADIO,
AND NEW MEDIA, 11E
Robert L. Hilliard, Emerson College, Emeritus
WRITING FOR TELEVISION, RADIO, AND
NEW MEDIA has been the leading work in its
field for more than fifty years. Its frequently
updated revisions, including the eleventh edition,
combine the best principles and examples of
the past with those of contemporary practice. Its
thorough coverage of concepts, approaches, and
techniques concentrates on the key media formats
of commercials; news and sports; documentaries;
reality programs; talk shows; interviews; music
programs; corporate, educational, and children’s
formats; and drama and sitcoms. The text also
presents basic information that writers need to
know about production techniques, demographics,
copyrights, and career opportunities. New material
110
• Examples are oriented to the college-age reader
and include contemporary news events, music
script/log examples with current top performers
and hits, and references to Internet social sites.
• Material on writing for the Internet includes
commentary from writers and directors with
examples of their work, an examination of the
convergence of the Internet with other distribution
technologies, and expert analysis of how new
technologies are applicable to the Internet.
• Thorough coverage of core topics includes an
overview of mass media and basic elements of
production, an overview of format and style, and
writing techniques for a variety of traditional and
new media formats. The text addresses all key
format subject areas that students and other
readers are most likely to encounter.
• The text presents an outline of the basic principles of
production so that students have an understanding
of the medium for which they are writing.
• Professional opportunities in commercials,
copywriting, news, corporate media, playwriting,
and other writing fields are discussed.
www.cengageasia.com
• Chapter 10, “The Play,” presents thorough and
insightful coverage on writing screenplays,
including video drama and audio drama.
CONTENTS
Preface.1. The Mass Media. 2. Basic Elements of
Production. 3. Format and Style. 4. Commercials and
Announcements. 5. News and Sports. 6. Features,
Documentaries, and Reality Programs. 7. Interviews
and Talk Programs. 8. Music, Variety, and Comedy.
9. Corporate, Educational, and Children’s Programs.
10. The Play. 11. Professional Opportunities.
A Practical Guide
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
Online Instructor’s Manual for Hilliard’s Writing
for Television, Radio, and New Media, 11th,
011e, 9781285764320
Web Site for Hilliard’s Writing for Television,
Radio, and New Media, 11th, 011e,
9781285764344
CS-EBK: WRITING FOR TELEVISION RADIO
& NEW MEDIA, 011e, 9781285804620
eBook: Writing for Television, Radio, and New
Media, 011e, 9781305229358
© 2015, 528pp, Paperback, 9781285465074
COPYWRITING FOR THE ELECTRONIC
MEDIA, 6E
Milan D. Meeske, Professor Emeritus, University of Central
Florida
COPYWRITING FOR THE ELECTRONIC MEDIA:
A PRACTICAL GUIDE, Sixth Edition, prepares
students to write effective copy for all types of
electronic media, with an emphasis on commercial
writing and a valuable real-world orientation to this
exciting field. Equally appropriate for introductory
electronic media writing courses and more
specialized seminars on radio and television writing,
the text begins by introducing basic principles
and techniques of good copywriting, including a
brief review of basic grammar, before moving on
to dozens of focused skill-building exercises and
more than 80 writing assignments. Numerous
examples of actual scripts, storyboards, PSAs, and
promotional spots help students understand key
concepts as they learn to write short, persuasive
messages for radio, television, and new media. The
sixth edition includes a new chapter on “Getting the
First Job,” expanded discussion of target audiences
and copy platforms, and an increased focus on
the role of the Internet and its impact on radio and
television advertising--all vital considerations for
students as they prepare for work as professional
writers.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A revised and expanded Grammar Review
illustrates grammar principles as they apply to
broadcast writing, helping students refresh these
essential skills.
• A new chapter, “Getting the First Job,” helps
students prepare for entry-level professional work.
www.cengageasia.com
111
• An expanded and clarified discussion of target
audiences and how to develop a copy platform
helps students understand and apply these critical
but complex advertising concepts.
• An increased emphasis on the role of the Internet,
as well as its impact on radio and television
advertising, provides students with useful
insights into the current state of the industry and
considerations likely to affect them as working
professionals.
• N u m e r o u s i l l u s t r a t i o n s , r e v i s e d s c r i p t
considerations, and an expanded bibliography
help students understand key concepts.
FEATURES
• This highly practical text prepares students to write
copy for all types of electronic media. The text
explores basic principles and techniques of good
copywriting and promotes rapid skill development
through more than 80 exercises and writing
assignments based on realistic situations typical
of entry-level copywriting positions.
• The text’s engaging and enjoyable style make
course material easier to grasp, and a good
balance of explanatory material, examples, and
exercises helps even beginning writers to learn
important concepts and skills, such as how to write
effectively using the AIDA formula.
• Numerous examples of actual scripts, storyboards,
PSAs, and promotional spots help students
understand key concepts and learn to write short,
persuasive messages for radio, television, and
new media.
• Equally appropriate for introductory electronic
media writing courses and more specialized
seminars on radio and television writing, the text
provides broad coverage of fundamental concepts
and techniques, as well as unique material on
copywriting style, consumer behavior, and legal
and ethical aspects of copywriting.
• Reflecting the growing trend of cost cutting in
the broadcast industry, chapters on broadcast
news, the Internet, and corporate media explore
new writing opportunities and prepare students
who might need to manage an unusually diverse
workload.
Part 1: THE BROADCAST COPYWRITER.1. The
Broadcast Copywriter.Part 2: COPYWRITING
ELEMENTS.2. Copywriting Style--Basic
Mechanics.3. The Legal and Ethical Implications
of Writing Copy.Part 3: ADVERTISING BASICS.4.
Consumer Behavior.5. Motivation.6. Organizing
the Broadcast Commercial.7. Broadcast Copy
Preparation.Part 4: RADIO COPYWRITING.8. The
Radio Commercial: The Mechanics.9. Types of Radio
Copy.Part 5: TELEVISION COPYWRITING.10.
The Television Commercial: The Mechanics.11.
Types of Television Commercials.Part 6: THE
ELECTRONIC MEDIA: OTHER WRITING
NEEDS.12. Promotion.13. Public Service, Issue,
and Political Announcements.14. The Broadcast
Campaign.15. Writing News Stories.16. Writing for
the Internet.17. Corporate Programs.18. Getting
the First Job.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
© 2009, 336pp, Paperback, 9780495411178
CONTENTS
112
eBank Instructor’s Manual for Meeske’s
Copywriting for the Electronic Media: A Practical
Guide, 5th, 005e, 9780495391098
www.cengageasia.com
THEATRE
scene list.
• New “Breathing for Change” exercises focus on
altering the actor’s physical and emotional state
to maximize success on and off the stage.
• “Partner Rapport” features reveal new strategies
for getting on the same wavelength with another
actor when you are working on a scene or exercise
together.
ACTING
FEATURES
ACTING, 7E
Onstage and Off
Robert Barton, University of Oregon
Extremely practical and student friendly, ACTING:
ONSTAGE AND OFF, 7e demonstrates how
offstage performance can be effectively adapted
for the theatre, as well as how onstage training
can be applied toward leading a full life outside
the theatre. Barton’s humorous and conversational
writing style helps students learn all phases of
actor training, including scene study, auditioning,
observation, and mind, voice and body relaxation
techniques. Examples from daily life-instead
of dramatic literature-ensure thorough student
understanding and spark lively class discussion
based on everyday experiences. The Seventh
Edition features insightful words of wisdom from
a variety of successful classic and contemporary
actors. In addition new “Breathing for Change”
exercises help students practice altering their
physical and emotional state to perform, while
“Partner Rapport” features new strategies for
connecting with other actors in a scene.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Continuing to offer students valuable insight
from seasoned and up-and-coming performers
alike, the Seventh Edition includes new words of
wisdom from a host of classic and contemporary
practitioners.
• Chapter 7, “Scene Study” includes an updated
• ACTING: ONSTAGE AND OFF demonstrates how
offstage performance can be effectively adapted
for the theatre as well as how onstage training
can be applied toward leading a full life outside
the theatre. This basic approach focuses on life
experience rather than on dramatic literature for
background material and positions fundamentals
such as auditioning as basic skills that can be
applied to many areas of life.
• Accessible and conversational, the author’s downto-earth writing style uses original terms-rather
than invented vocabulary-for acting concepts
and emphasizes the actor’s responsibility for inrehearsal active contribution and out-of-rehearsal
exploration.
• A wealth of actor testimony from well-known
performers includes insight from both proven
veterans and successful newcomers near the
ages of the students.
• ACTING: ONSTAGE AND OFF delivers a clear
interpretation of Stanislavski-the father of actor
training as we know it-for modern readers.
• Numerous exercises and approaches allow flexible
selection and adaptation. Exercises can easily be
cut back in scope while written assignments can
be adapted into thought-provoking discussion
questions and improvisations in those instances
where a minimum of academic work is deemed
appropriate.
• “Offstage Actions” provide a framework for
those who intend to use this training in venues
outside the theatre. The material also includes
professional skills to supplement personal ones.
CONTENTS
Preface.About the Author.1. Acting Acknowledged.2.
Relaxed Readiness.3. Individual Inventory.4.
Stanislavski’s System.5. Stanislavski Stretched.6.
www.cengageasia.com
113
Truth/Technique.7. Scene Study.8. Performance
Process.9. Acting Anticipated.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Web Site for Barton’s Acting: Onstage and Off,
7th, 007e, 9781305077454
Online Instructor’s Manual for Barton’s Acting:
Onstage and Off, 7th, 007e, 9781305078215
CS-EBK: ACTING ONSTAGE AND OFF, 007e,
9781305448285
eBook: Acting: Onstage and Off, 007e,
9781305550674
© 2016, 416pp, Paperback, 9781305077447
ACTING IS BELIEVING, 12E
Kenneth L. Stilson, Southeast Missouri State University; Larry
D. Clark, University of Missouri, Columbia; Charles McGaw,
Late of the Goodman School of Drama, a School of the Art
Institute of Chicago
Emphasizing that “an actor must believe to make
his audience believe,” ACTING IS BELIEVING
remains one of the classic texts that continues
to set the standard in the field for actors in the
twenty-first century. Charles McGaw and Larry
D. Clark’s earlier editions influenced generations
of actors, and this Twelfth Edition has once again
been completely updated by Kenneth Stilson to
inspire future acting professionals. An expanded
and updated theoretical grounding and numerous
new and revised exercises help acting student apply
the key concepts of a Stanislavski-based training
program as interpreted through the eyes of today’s
artists. The final chapter helps students “get the job”
by discussing the latest approaches to auditioning,
114
marketing, and surviving in the competitive theatre
industry.
• Acting theory has been clarified and updated
throughout the text.
• Existing exercises have been modified and edited,
and new exercises have been added to keep the
text current and relevant to today’s students.
• A majority of the published monologues as well
as many of the references have been replaced to
help clarify theoretical material.
• More than thirty percent of the photographs and
visual elements have been updated.
• The popular appendix, “Learning the Lingo,”
has been completely revised, expanded, and
reinstated into the text to serve as a quick
reference guide for students.
• Chapter 2, “Approaching the Creative State,” has
been streamlined to make it more practical to use
as part of the nightly transformation process from
self to character.
• Chapter 7, “Investigating the Subconscious,” has
been completely rewritten and expanded to further
enhance clarity.
• Because the business of theatre is constantly
evolving, Chapter 13, “Getting the Job,” has
been updated to discuss the latest approaches
to auditioning, marketing, and surviving in the
competitive theatre industry.
FEATURES
• ACTING IS BELIEVING walks students through
an easy-to-learn three-part structure: The Actor,
The Actor and The Play, and The Actor and The
Production. The acting theory remains grounded
in Stanislavski-based training, while evolving to
speak to today’s students pursuing careers in
theatre, film, and television.
• Modified, updated, and new exercises keep this
classic text on the cutting edge of today’s actor
training.
CONTENTS
Preface.Part I: THE ACTOR.1. Training Your Talent.2.
Approaching the Creative State.3. Discovering
Physical Actions.4. Defining Simple Objectives.5.
Developing Your Powers of Observation.6.
www.cengageasia.com
Exploring Circles of Attention.7. Investigating the
Subconscious.Part II: THE ACTOR AND THE
PLAY.8. Creating a Character.9. Interpreting the
Lines.10. Communicating the Subtext.Part III: THE
ACTOR AND THE PRODUCTION.11. Transforming
into Character.12. Preparing Undirected Scene
Study.13. Getting the Job.Endnotes.Appendix.
Bibliography.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
Web Site for McGaw/Stilson/Clark’s Acting is
Believing, 12th, 012e, 9781285760797
CS-EBK: ACTING IS BELIEVING, 012e,
9781285803876
eBook: Acting is Believing, 012e, 9781305180352
© 2015, 352pp, Hardback, 9781285465050
CENGAGE ADVANTAGE BOOKS: THE
ACTOR’S CHECKLIST, 4E
Rosary O’Neill, Loyola University
Based on the Constantin Stanislavki method of
acting, THE ACTOR’S CHECKLIST examines
Stanislavki’s eight principles in an easily understood
checklist format. This exciting acting guide
also includes insights from other famous acting
teachers, including Uta Hagen, Sanford Meisner,
Lee Strasberg, Michael Chekov, and Stella Adler.
Providing techniques for use in both classroom
and production situations, this edition features new
chapters on time, place, and history, as well as a
new appendix that covers movement and vocal
warmups.
provide clarity for the actor.
• A History chapter provides instruction on creating
details of each character’s backstory.
• An appendix of improvisations, games, and
exercises gives the actor and teacher access to
improvisations that will create inner stillness and
outward alertness.
• An appendix of movement and vocal warmups
helps the actor perfect his/her instrument and
inhabit the body fully.
FEATURES
• An introduction describing the book’s purpose,
chapter progression, stage acting vs. film acting,
and more provides students with a comprehensive
overview of the text and course.
• Updated and new exercises that require little or
no preparation time or props give students new
opportunities to apply concepts.
• Checklists based on Stanislavski’s method are
included to help students build a solid foundation
in acting and to inspire strong performances.
• Each chapter is loaded with practical exercises
that put the acting concepts into action.
• Numerous play excerpts are included to
demonstrate specific acting concepts.
• An appendix on key terms references where they
are discussed and defined within the text.
CONTENTS
Introduction.PART I.1. Objective.2. Action.3.
Obstacles.4. Inner Images.5. The Score.PART
II.6. Character.7. The Place.8. Time.9. Given
Circumstances.10. History.11. Auditions.Appendix
A.Appendix B.Appendix C.Appendix D.Appendix
E.Appendix F.Appendix G.
© 2014, 256pp, Paperback, 9781133308652
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Time and Place chapters have been separated to
www.cengageasia.com
115
INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE
THE ESSENTIAL THEATRE, 11E
Oscar G. Brockett, University of Texas, Austin; Robert J. Ball,
University of the Incarnate Word; John Fleming, Texas State
University; Andrew Carlson, University of Texas at Austin
Noted as one of the most comprehensive,
authoritative surveys of the theatre in academia,
THE ESSENTIAL THEATRE, 11th Edition,
engages your students and gets them excited
about theatre. Drawing from the expertise of
the authors as dedicated teachers, published
scholars, and practicing artists, this text is ideal
for an introductory theatre course. It’s vibrant and
numerous representations of current and classic
performances encourage students to become
active theatergoers and fans. The Eleventh Edition
includes an all-new chapter devoted to musical
theatre, while the thoroughly revised chapter
on acting covers the diversity of contemporary
approaches. The text also includes numerous new
photos, new “Then and Now” boxes, and expanded
use of dates to provide context for artists’ major
works. In addition, a companion anthology, PLAYS
FOR THE THEATRE, 11th Edition, contains scripts
that serve as a foundation for discussion of the
various types of theatrical experience explored in
the text.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An all-new chapter devoted entirely to musical
theatre covers the developments, significant
figures, major works, and various incarnations
that comprise the most popular genre of theatre.
• The chapter on acting has been completely
revised to present a diversity of contemporary
116
approaches to acting.
• Ten new “Then and Now” text boxes link select
topics in theatre history to the present-day. These
insightful boxed features--and accompanying
photos--spotlight the way the past continues to
influence the present, not only in theatre but also
in popular culture, including films, contemporary
comedy, and even flash mobs.
• Many of the more than 80 vivid new photos feature
contemporary productions as well as actors and
actresses that students will recognize from film
and television illustrating that theatre does not
exist in isolation but rather is an art form that
is a vibrant part of the cultural makeup of the
contemporary entertainment industry.
• The 11th Edition extends the Enhanced 10th
edition’s use of dates for major figures and works.
The dates are not intended for memorization, but
rather provide a sense of context of where a work
fits within an artist’s lifetime as well as--via implied
comparison to the “Theatre in a Broad Context”
timelines--where it fits within a sociological
context.
FEATURES
• Expanded versions of the “Theatre in a Broad
Context” timelines help students situate theatrical
events and developments within a larger historical
context. A timeline has been added to cover Asian
and African theatre in Chapter 11 as well as the
new Chapter 10: Musical Theatre.
• Based on instructor and student feedback as well
as the authors’ own experiences as teachers,
the material in Part 2 is organized to make the
historical overview of theatre’s many expressions
more clear, as Chapters 6, 7, 8, and 9 feature
increased attention to the major playwrights of the
modern and contemporary periods and all plays
include a date of first production, thereby offering
a clearer sense of context.
• Providing easy reference, the examination of
the differences between the early modernist
movements of realism, symbolism, expressionism,
surrealism, futurism, and dadaism is included in a
feature box that contrasts all the different features
of each.
• Chapters 14–18 include a series of questions to
help students attending a performance more fully
www.cengageasia.com
consider and analyze the work of the different
theatre artists.
• Numerous “Practitioners and Theorists” boxes
are included in the later chapters to give students
more perspectives on the different kinds of
designers--scene, costume and makeup.
CONTENTS
Preface.PART I: FOUNDATIONS.1. The Nature
of Theatre.2. The Audience and Criticism.3. The
Play.PART II: VARIETIES OF THEATRICAL
EXPERIENCE.4. Festival Theatre: Greek, Roman,
and Medieval Theatre Experiences.5. Creating a
Professional Theatre: Elizabethan England, Italian
Commedia dell’Arte, and Seventeenth-Century
France.6. Theatre in the 1800s.7. Modernism in the
Twentieth Century: 1900–1960.8. Decentralization
and Subsidization: New Directions.9. Contemporary
Theatre and Its Diversity.10. Musical Theatre.11.
Asian and African Theatre.PART III: THEATRICAL
PRODUCTION.12. Theatrical Space and Production
Design.13. Playwriting and Dramaturgy.14. Directing
and Producing.15. Acting.16. Scene Design.17.
Costume Design and Makeup.18. Lighting and
Sound Design.Glossary.Bibliography.Index.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Instructor’s Companion Website for Brockett/
Ball’s The Essential Theatre, 11th, 011e,
9781305491755
Brockett/Ball’s The Essential Theatre, 11th,
011e, 9781305411364
Cognero Instant Access for Brockett/Ball’s The
Essential Theatre, 011e, 9781305578876
Cognero for Brockett/Ball’s The Essential
Theatre, 011e, 9781305578883
CS-EBK: ESSENTIAL THEATRE, 011e,
9781305982222
E-BOOK: ESSENTIAL THEATRE, 011e,
9781305995758
© 2017, 496pp, Paperback, 9781305411074
THEATRE, 7E
A Way of Seeing
Milly S. Barranger, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill
Consistently praised as “streamlined” and “clear
and student friendly,” THEATRE: A WAY OF
SEEING offers the beginning theatre student an
exciting, full-color introduction to all aspects of
theatre. It presents the experience of theatre, who
sees it, what is seen, and where and how it is seen
largely from the viewpoint of audiences exposed to
a complex, living art that involves people, spaces,
plays, designs, staging, forms, language, and
productions. The book includes the appropriate
coverage of the history, diversity, and most critical
moments in theatre in a way that encourages
students to experience theatre as “a performing art
and humanistic event.”
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• All chapters have been revised to incorporate new
subjects, artists, productions, and photographs.
For instance, the overview of solo texts and
performance art (Chapter 6) includes Spalding
Gray, Anna Deavere Smith, and others. Analyses
of play structures, stage conventions, and
language include examples from works by
playwrights ranging from William Shakespeare
and Henrik Ibsen to Sam Shepard and Robert
Wilson.
• Chapters 11 and 12 on theatrical design have
been expanded to include the emergence of
women designers in the commercial theatre,
and the increasing use of puppetry in design and
staging.
• Chapters 13 and 14 have been updated to feature
www.cengageasia.com
117
new producers and the choreographer-directors
who are shaping American drama and musicals
along with the new producing organizations whose
purpose is to bring diversity to America’s stages.
• Chapter 15 on theatre criticism has been
expanded to include both pioneering critics and
national critics who influence the audience interest
in shows from Chicago to Seattle to the web.
• Issues of cultural and ethnic diversity in
performance have been incorporated throughout
the book to illustrate this dynamic at work in world
theatre.
• Newly named “Focus” boxes (“Focus on Theatre,”
“Focus on People in Theater”) present new and
updated content to complement the ongoing
discussion of playwrights, artists, creative
teams, producers, staging conventions, hip hop
expressions, and theatrical business (such as
“open calls”).
• New colorful photographs illustrate the artists
and productions being discussed, illuminating the
content and enhancing the book’s visual appeal.
FEATURES
• The unique organization clearly outlines and
answers “What is theatre?” “Who ‘makes’
theatre?” and “How do we see and experience
theatre?”
• “Model” or representative plays are included as
examples of trends, styles, and forms of theatrical
production to assist readers and theatre-goers.
Ranging from the Greeks to the moderns, these
representative plays include Oedipus the King,
Macbeth, The Cherry Orchard, The Caucasian
Chalk Circle, The Glass Menagerie, A Streetcar
Named Desire, Death of a Salesman, The Life of
Galileo, The Bald Soprano, Buried Child, Fences,
Juan Darién, the CIVIL warS, and Glengarry Glen
Ross. The musical stage is represented by such
musicals as Oklahoma!, West Side Story, Hair,
and Miss Saigon.
• All discussions in the book are supported by
artists’ insights, artists, and writers talking
about their work, texts and scenes from plays,
biographical sketches, diagrams and definitions,
and colorful photographs of Eastern and Western
stages and productions.
118
CONTENTS
Part I: THEATRE’S SEEING PLACES.1. Discovering
Theatre.2. The Seeing Place.3. Alternative
Theatrical Spaces.Part II: PLAYWRIGHTS,
PERSPECTIVES, AND FORMS.4. Image
Maker: The Playwright.5. Theatrical Writing:
Perspectives and Forms.6. Structures of Seeing.
7. Drama’s Conventions.8. Stage Language.Part
III: THEATRE’S PRACTITIONERS.9. Image Maker:
The Actor.10. Image Maker: The Director.11.
Image Makers: Designers: Scenery, Costumes,
Makeup, Masks, Wigs, and Puppets. 12. Image
Makers: Designers: Lighting and Sound.13. Image
Makers: Producers.Part IV: AMERICAN MUSICAL
THEATRE.14. The American Musical.Part V.
THEATRE’S CRITICS.15. Viewpoints.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
www.cengageasia.com
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Barranger’s
Theatre: A Way of Seeing, 7th, 007e,
9781285463353
Online Instructor’s Manual for Barranger’s
9781285463322
Instructor’s Web Site for Barranger’s Theatre:
A Way of Seeing, 7th, 007e, 9781285463346
CourseMate, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way of Seeing,
7th, 007e, 9781285463377
CourseMate for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way of
Seeing, 007e, 9781285463384
for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way of Seeing, 007e,
9781285463391
MindTap Reader for Barranger’s Theatre: A
Way of Seeing, 007e, 9781285751030
CS-EBK: THEATRE:, 007e, 9781285803388
months) Printed Access Card for Barranger’s
9781285865041
Access Card for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way
of Seeing, 7th, 007e, 9781285865058
Access for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way of
Seeing, 007e, 9781285865065
months) Instant Access for Barranger’s Theatre:
A Way of Seeing, 007e, 9781285865072
•
•
•
•
SSO COGNERO THEATRE: A WAY OFSEEING
W/INFOTRAC, 007e, 9781285974910
Instant Access for Barranger’s Theatre: A Way
of Seeing, 007e, 9781285978048
3P-EBK:THEATRE:, 007e, 9781305147065
eBook: Theatre: A Way of Seeing, 007e,
9781305180048
© 2015, 416pp, Paperback, 9781133309895
THE ART OF THEATRE, 3E
Then and Now
William Missouri Downs, University of Wyoming; Lou Anne
Wright, University of Wyoming; Erik Ramsey, Ohio University
THE ART OF THEATRE: THEN AND NOW, Third
Edition, explores issues of cultural diversity and
creativity, presents a full day-in-the-life of theatre,
and offers comprehensive coverage of theatre
history. The authors make timely and relevant
connections between theatre and the familiar world
of television and film to help students understand
how the living art of theatre relates to and influences
today’s screen entertainment. For flexibility in
the way you teach, THE ART OF THEATRE is
available in two versions. This full version contains
17 chapters, six of which cover theatre history
in both Western and non-Western contexts, and
concludes with a chapter on “The Musical”. THE
ART OF THEATRE: A CONCISE INTRODUCTION
features 12 chapters and a briefer treatment of
theatre’s history, and also features a chapter on
“The Musical”.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• This edition includes several new “Spotlight”
boxes, including one that highlights how theatre
and art help us find structure and meaning in life.
Others explore how technology may be creating a
cultural divide and how theatre can help close the
gap, and how creativity relates to the imagination.
• The authors include improved guidelines on
theatre etiquette, such as rules on twittering and
texting during a performance.
• Chapter 5 (“A Day in the Life of a Theatre”) now
includes important detailed information on how
difficult it is to make a living as a theatre artist.
• Chapter 10 (“A Creative Life”) contains many
expanded sections on how creativity applies not
only to the theatre, but to a student’s everyday
interaction with education and the world.
• Several additions in Part 3, “A Concise History,”
include expanded coverage of theatre in India,
more on Aristotelian Scholasticism, in-depth
coverage of women on stage in Elizabethan
times, and a new section on the Puritans and their
intolerance to the theatre.
• Over 50 new brightly colored photographs help
illustrate important concepts.
FEATURES
• Organized into three distinct sections--”Theatre
Literacy”, “The Arts within the Art”, and “A Concise
History”--the text provides flexibility to organize
the course in various ways. This full version
contains 17 chapters, including six chapters
covering theatre history in Western and nonWestern contexts, and concluding with a chapter
on musical theatre. THE ART OF THEATRE: A
CONCISE INTRODUCTION contains 12 chapters,
paring back historical coverage to one chapter on
theatre’s key movements (realism, absurdism,
etc.) and then offers one featuring musical theatre.
• THE ART OF THEATRE gives students a firm
background in the primary arts and techniques
needed to create a theatre performance, providing
a nuts-and-bolts how-to look while developing an
appreciation of the art. The text investigates how
cultural diversity manifests itself in U.S. theatre
today, and how theatre can give a voice to groups
who are ignored. It also outlines basic audience
etiquette and introduces play analysis.
• There is thorough coverage of diversity in theatre.
The theme of diversity is woven into the text
narrative, examples, quotations, and photos.
www.cengageasia.com
119
Chapter 3 (“Theatre and Cultural Diversity”)
discusses diversity in modern U.S. theatre.
Chapter 11 (“Non-Western Theatre”) discusses
African, Indian, Chinese, Japanese, and Islamic
theatre. “Spotlight on Diversity” boxes describe
ethnic and cultural diversity in the theatre,
exposing students to some of the many voices
in theatre. Some examples include “The Life and
Death of Ken Saro-Wiwa” (Chapter 1), “ColorBlind Casting” (Chapter 8), and “The Life of a
Playwright: Sarah Ruhl” (Chapter 6).
• An entire chapter on creativity (Chapter 10, “A
Creative Life”) compares technique and talent,
describes the attributes of creative people,
provides tips students can use to enhance their
creativity, and outlines the steps of creative
problem-solving.
CONTENTS
Part I: THEATRE LITERACY.1. Theatre, Art, and
Entertainment.2. Stage vs. Screen.3. Theatre and
Cultural Diversity.4. Experiencing and Analyzing
Plays.Part II: THE ARTS WITHIN THE ART.5. A Day
in the Life of a Theatre.6. The Playwright and the
Script.7. The Art of Acting.8. The Art of Directing.9.
The Art of Design.10. A Creative Life.Part III: A
CONCISE HISTORY.11. Non-Western Theatre.12.
The Greeks to the Rise of Christianity.13. The
Dark Ages to the Dawn of the Renaissance.14.
The Renaissance.15. The Restoration, the
Enlightenment, and Romanticism.16. Modern
Theatre.17. The Musical.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
120
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Downs/Wright/
Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: Then and Now,
3rd, 003e, 9781111836610
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Downs/
Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: Then and
Now, 3rd, 003e, 9781111836900
Web Site for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The
Art of Theatre: Then and Now, 3rd, 003e,
9781111946074
CourseMate with InfoTrac® Printed Access Card
for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre:
Then and Now, 3rd, 003e, 9781111946036
Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Then and Now, 003e, 9781111946043
CourseMate for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
The Art of Theatre: Then and Now, 003e,
9781111946050
Interactive eBook for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
9781111946067
eBook: The Art of Theatre: Then and Now, 003e,
9781133876441
MindTap Reader for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
9781285036274
Then and Now, 9781285788135
Quizzing with Flash Cards for Downs/Wright/
003e, 9781285788142
Quizzing, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Then and Now, 9781285791937
Quizzing for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of
Theatre: Then and Now, 003e, 9781285791944
Then and Now, 9781285795737
Flash Cards for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
9781285795744
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate, 1 term (6
months) Printed Access Card for Downs/Wright/
3rd, 003e, 9781285838779
Blackboard MindLink for CourseMate, 1 term
(6 months) Instant Access for Downs/Wright/
003e, 9781285838786
MindLink for CourseMate, 1 term (6 months)
Instant Access for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
9781305664265
3F-EBK:THE ART OF THEATRE: THEN AND
NOW, 003e, 9781305891425
© 2013, 496pp, Paperback, 9781111348304
www.cengageasia.com
• Chapter 10 (“A Creative Life”) contains many
expanded sections on how creativity applies not
only to the theatre, but to a student’s everyday
interaction with education and the world.
• Over 30 new brightly colored photographs help
illustrate important concepts.
FEATURES
THE ART OF THEATRE, 3E
A Concise Introduction
William Missouri Downs, University of Wyoming; Lou Anne
Wright, University of Wyoming; Erik Ramsey, Ohio University
THE ART OF THEATRE: A CONCISE
INTRODUCTION, Third Edition, explores issues
of cultural diversity and creativity, presents a full
day-in-the-life of theatre, and offers briefer coverage
of theatre history. Timely and relevant connections
between theatre and the familiar world of television
and film help students understand how the living
art of theatre relates to and influences today’s
screen entertainment. For flexibility in the way
you teach, THE ART OF THEATRE is available
in two versions. This Concise version contains
12 chapters, paring back historical coverage to
one chapter on theatre’s key movements (such as
realism and absurdism) and then offers one chapter
featuring musical theatre. THE ART OF THEATRE:
THEN AND NOW contains 17 chapters, including
six chapters covering theatre history in Western
and non-Western contexts, and concluding with a
chapter on musical theatre.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• This edition includes several new “Spotlight”
boxes, including one that highlights how theatre
and art help us find structure and meaning in life.
Others explore how technology may be creating a
cultural divide and how theatre can help close the
gap, and how creativity relates to the imagination.
• The authors include improved guidelines on
theatre etiquette, such as rules on twittering and
texting during a performance.
• Chapter 5 (“A Day in the Life of a Theatre”) now
includes important detailed information on how
difficult it is to make a living as a theatre artist.
• Organized into three distinct sections--”Theatre
Literacy,” “The Arts within the Art,” and “A Concise
History”--the text provides flexibility to organize
the course in various ways. This Concise version
contains 12 chapters, paring back historical
coverage to one chapter on theatre’s key
movements (realism, absurdism, etc.) and then
offers one featuring musical theatre. THE ART
OF THEATRE: THEN AND NOW contains 17
chapters, including six chapters covering theatre
history in Western and non-Western contexts,
and concluding with a chapter on musical theatre.
• This book gives students a firm background in the
primary arts and techniques needed to create a
theatre performance, providing a nuts-and-bolts
how-to look while developing an appreciation
of the art. The text investigates how cultural
diversity manifests itself in U.S. theatre today, and
how theatre can give a voice to groups who are
ignored. Is also outlines basic audience etiquette
and introduces play analysis.
• There is through coverage of diversity in theatre.
The theme of diversity is woven into text narrative,
examples, quotations, and photos. Chapter 3
(“Theatre and Cultural Diversity”) discusses
diversity in modern U.S. theatre. “Spotlight on
Diversity” boxes describe ethnic and cultural
diversity in the theatre, exposing students to a
variety of voices. Some examples include “The
Life and Death of Ken Saro-Wiwa” (Chapter 1),
“Color-Blind Casting” (Chapter 8), and “The Life
of a Playwright: Sarah Ruhl” (Chapter 6).
• Chapter 10, “A Creative Life,” is devoted to
creativity and features a comparison of technique
and talent, describes the attributes of creative
people, provides tips students can use to enhance
their creativity, and outlines the steps of creative
problem-solving.
• You can create a customizable, printed anthology
of plays for your course by choosing from a large
www.cengageasia.com
121
selection of plays--including many discussed
in the “Stage to Screen” boxes of this text--at
Sundance Choice Drama (http://www.textchoice.
com/sundance). With your customized anthology,
students pay only for the plays you assign!
CONTENTS
Part I: THEATRE LITERACY.1. Theatre, Art, and
Entertainment.2. Stage vs. Screen.3. Theatre and
Cultural Diversity.4. Experiencing and Analyzing
Plays.PART II: THE ARTS WITHIN THE ART.5.
A Day in the Life of a Theatre.6. The Playwright
and the Script.7. The Art of Acting.8. The Art of
Directing.9. The Art of Design.10. A Creative Life.
Part III: STYLES, GENRES AND ISMS.11. The
Many Types of Theatre.12. The Musical.
•
•
•
•
•
© 2013, 336pp, Paperback, 9781111348311
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
122
Instructor’s Resource Manual for Downs/Wright/
3rd, 003e, 9781111836610
PowerLecture with ExamView® for Downs/
Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: Then and
Now, 3rd, 003e, 9781111836900
CourseMate with InfoTrac® Printed Access
Card for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of
Theatre: A Concise Introduction, 3rd, 003e,
9781111945992
Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: A
Concise Introduction, 003e, 9781111946005
CourseMate for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The
Art of Theatre: A Concise Introduction, 003e,
9781111946012
Interative eBook for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s
The Art of Theatre: A Concise Introduction,
003e, 9781111946029
Instructor’s Web Site for Downs/Wright/
Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: A Concise
Introduction, 3rd, 003e, 9781133351795
CS-EBK: THE ART OF THEATRE: ACONCISE
INTRODUCTION, 003e, 9781133345480
eBook: The Art of Theatre: A Concise
Introduction, 003e, 9781133876632
MindTap Reader for The Art of Theatre: A
Concise Introduction, 003e, 9781285066745
Concise Introduction, 9781285788159
Quizzing with Flash Cards for Downs/Wright/
Ramsey’s The Art of Theatre: A Concise
Introduction, 003e, 9781285788166
Quizzing, 1 term (6 months) Instant Access for
Concise Introduction, 9781285791951
Quizzing for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The
9781285791968
A Concise Introduction, 9781285795751
Flash Cards for Downs/Wright/Ramsey’s The
9781285795768
3F-EBK:THE ART OF THEATRE: A CONCISE
INTRODUCTION, 003e, 9781305891418
SCENE DESIGN/LIGHTING
SCENE DESIGN AND STAGE
LIGHTING, INTERNATIONAL EDITION,
10E
W. Oren Parker, Late, Carnegie Mellon University; R. Craig
Wolf, San Diego State University; Dick Block, Carnegie
Mellon University
Packed with professional information and cuttingedge technologies, SCENE DESIGN AND STAGE
LIGHTING, International Edition, remains the
industry’s most reliable resource for information
on scenery, lighting, sound, and technology, and
is now presented in a full-color edition (a first in the
market). Emphasizing collaboration, the exciting
new tenth edition has two new chapters on digital
integration in scene design and lighting design
(Chapters 12 and 13), a new chapter on getting
work in the profession (Chapter 28), and mirrors
the best of real-world practices. The book retains
www.cengageasia.com
its strong emphasis on modern technology, with
many changes and updates in the lighting design
and sound design chapters. The text also includes
insightful interviews with professional lighting and
scenery designers and spotlights examples of
contemporary work. Reflecting current professional
practice, SCENE DESIGN AND STAGE LIGHTING,
International Edition, offers in-depth coverage of a
broad range of topics, making it the most detailed
and comprehensive text available in the scenic,
lighting, and sound design fields.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Text now in full color. A first in the market,
SCENE DESIGN AND STAGE LIGHTING, Tenth
Edition, is now offered in full color. Vibrant color
production photographs of set designs and lighting
designs support the text and spotlight examples
of contemporary work, in a format students are
used to seeing in everyday practice.
• Two new chapters on digital integration in the
theater. Chapter 12 (“Theatrical Use of Media”)
and Chapter 13 (“Automation in the Theatre”)
focus on the use of media and digital technology
in set design, lighting design, and sound design.
• New chapter on getting work in the profession.
Chapter 28 (“Getting Work in the Profession”) is
brand new to this edition and offers suggestions
and advice on how to get work in the industry
after graduation.
• Numerous new production photographs.
Approximately 50 percent of the production
photographs, set designs, light plots, and sound
designs are new to this edition, with an emphasis
on showing the most cutting-edge examples.
FEATURES
• Expanded coverage of current electronic drawing
systems CAD and SketchUp. The changing nature
of the field is reflected in the discussion of the
growing use of computers in design, drafting,
and technical production. In addition, 50 percent
of drafting samples are new and are a mixture of
hand and computer drafting, including samples
drawn on the popular SketchUp application.
• Modernized and expanded lighting design
coverage is now more concentrated and focused
and includes the most recent information available
on lighting instruments, control, projection, and
effects. Expanded coverage of new light sources
includes HMI, low voltage, and LEDs. The text
also features numerous new lighting equipment
photographs.
• Approximately 50 percent of the designs pictured
are new.
• Scenery tools and building techniques are
completely modern, including low-tech and
contemporary technology in moving scenery,
stronger emphasis on the use of metals in scenery
construction, discussions of mechanized versus
automated scenery, and more color examples of
scene painting, including progression of specific
textures. There are also new interviews with
professional scenic designers.
• A classic text for stage design and lighting, SCENE
DESIGN AND STAGE LIGHTING, Tenth Edition’s
two major strengths are its comprehensiveness
and readability. Extremely student friendly and
engaging, it covers a wide range of topics in great
detail, with information for introductory and more
advanced courses--equipping readers with tools
they will use throughout their careers.
• Emphasizing modern technology, the text is the
most detailed and comprehensive book available
in the scenic, lighting, and sound design fields.
Thorough coverage in the lighting section reflects
current practice and technology.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction.Part I: SCENE DESIGN AND
TECHNOLOGY.2. Scene Design and the Theatre
Space.3. Scene Design as a Visual Art.4. The
Design Process.5. Color in the Design.6. Drafting
the Design.7. The Scene Shop, Tools, and
Equipment.8. Building the Scenery.9. Painting
Scenery.10. Handling Scenery.11. Properties and
the Designer.Part II: DIGITAL AGE INTEGRATION:
SCENERY AND LIGHTING.12. Theatrical Use
of Media.13. Automation in the Theatre.Part III:
STAGE LIGHTING.14. Introduction to Stage
Lighting.15. Distribution.16. Color and Light.17.
Lighting Instruments.18. Practicals and Effects.19.
Design: Choices and Process.20. Design: The
Light Plot, Paperwork, and Production.21. Lighting
Control.22. Stage Lighting and Electricity.23.
Light Sources.24. Design Techniques.25. Lighting
www.cengageasia.com
123
Design as a Profession.Part IV: SOUND FOR THE
THEATER.26. Sound and Music in the Theatre.27.
Sound Systems and Equipment.Part V: GETTING
WORK IN THE PROFESSION.28. Getting Work in
the Profession.
SUPPLEMENTS
•
•
•
Web Site for Parker/Wolf/Block’s Scene Design
and Stage Lighting, 10th, 010e, 9781133044659
eBook: Scene Design and Stage Lighting, 010e,
9781285702674
3I-EBK: ISE SCENE DESIGN ANDSTAGE
LIGHTING, 010e, 9781337008679
© 2014, 672pp, Paperback, 9781111834784
• All new coverage of LED light sources, in Chapter
2 on Light and Vision, Chapter 5 on Color, and
Chapter 10 on Instrumentation.
• Expanded coverage of computer visualization
techniques in Chapter 8, Design Development.
• New color plates illustrate the color rendering
properties of LEDs as compared to incandescent,
fluorescent, and HID sources.
• Chapter 11, Organization and Control, includes
new examples drawing on hybrid consoles
for the control of mixed rigs of automated and
conventional luminaires.
• Chapter 12, Drafting the Finished Plot and
Section, has been significantly overhauled to
reflect current professional practice and the use
of both Vectorworks and AutoCad.
• Significant updates to technical content throughout
the text.
• Subheadings make the text easier to follow –
added at the request of several adopters and
reviewers.
FEATURES
• Expansion of the “Functions” section of Chapter
3 based on user feedback.
• Color Theory is now in a new position in the text,
immediately following Elements of Composition.
LIGHTING AND THE DESIGN IDEA,
CONTENTS
Linda Essig, Arizona State University; Jennifer Setlow,
Arizona State University
LIGHTING AND THE DESIGN IDEA, 3E,
International Edition emphasizes the design
process-the process by which lighting designers
turn their ideas about a piece into the medium of
stage lighting. The technological tools of stage
lighting are covered, with a focus on using those
tools within the design process. A new chapter
provides real-world advice on positioning oneself
for a career in performance lighting.
1. Stage Lighting: Context and Process.2. Light
and Vision.3. Functions and Properties of Light
on the Stage.4. Elements of Composition.5.
Color.6. Conceptual Framework.7. Lighting Design
Research.8. Design Development.9. Lighting
Positions.10. Instrumentation.11. Organization
and Control.12. Drafting the Finished Plot and
Section.13. Execution of the Design.14. Cuing.15.
Lighting Design and Your Future.Appendix:
Principles of Electricity.Glossary.Index.
© 2013, 336pp, Paperback, 9781111836870
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW Chapter 15, Lighting Design and Your
Future. This new chapter provides real-world
advice on positioning oneself for a career in
performance lighting, sample resumes and cover
letters, and other helpful tools for making the
transition from student to working professional.
124
www.cengageasia.com
Combined Author/Title Index
A
Acting, 7e p.113
Acting is Believing, 12e p.114
Adler/Proctor II, Looking Out, Looking In, 15e p.16
Albarran, Management of Electronic and Digital Media,
6e p.96
Alten, Audio in Media, International Edition, 10e p.93
Alten, Cengage Advantage Books: Audio Basics p.95
American Media History, 3e p.84/p.85
Archee, Communicating as Professionals, 3e p.6/p.33
Argumentation and Debate, International Edition, 13e p.2
Audio in Media, International Edition, 10e p.93
Downs, The Art of Theatre, 3e: Then and Now p.119
Downs, The Art of Theatre, 3e: A Concise Introduction
p.121
Drewniany/Jewler, Creative Strategy in Advertising,
International Edition, 11e p.66
E
Eastman/Ferguson, Media Programming, 9e p.97
Essential Cinema p.99
Essig/Setlow, Lighting and the Design Idea, International
Edition, 3e p.124
B
F
Baran/Davis, Mass Communication Theory, 7e p.81
Barranger, Theatre, 7e p.117
Barton, Acting, 7e p.113
Baxter/Babbie, The Basics of Communication Research
(with InfoTrac®) p.62
Biagi, Media/Impact, 12e p.73
Bowles, Creative Editing, International Edition, 6e p.76
Brockett/Ball/Fleming/Carlson, The Essential Theatre,
11e p.116
Business and Professional Communication in a Digital
Age, International Edition p.5
Business and Professional Communication in the Global
Workplace, International Edition, 3e p.8
Fellow, American Media History, 3e p.84/p.85
Film Production Technique, 6e p.104
Freeley/Steinberg, Argumentation and Debate,
C
Campbell, The Rhetorical Act, 5e p.54
Cases in Communications Law, 6e p.80
Cengage Advantage Books: The Speaker’s Compact
Handbook, 5e p.38.
Cengage Advantage Books: Audio Basics p.95
Cengage Advantage Books: Building a Speech, 8e p.57
Cengage Advantage Books: The Actor’s Checklist, 4e p.115
Cengage Advantage Books: This is PR, 11e p.67
Cengage Advantage Series: Essentials of Public Speaking,
6e p.45
COMM 4, 4e p.28
Communicate!, 15e p.23
Communicating as Professionals, 3e p.6/p.33
Communicating for Results, 10e p.3
Communication in Our Lives, 7e p.29
Communication Mosaics, 8e p.24
Communication Research, 7e p.61/p.88
Communication Theories in Action, 3e p.9
Coopman/Lull, Public Speaking, 3e p.47
Copywriting for the Electronic Media, 6e p.77/p.111
Crannell, Voice and Articulation, 5e p.108
Creative Editing, International Edition, 6e p.76
Creative Strategy in Advertising, International Edition, 11e p.66
CTE Communication Between Cultures with CB
VitalSource eBook, 8e p.14
CTE Communication Mosaics, 7e p.31
CTE Interpersonal Communication, 7e p.19
CTE Invitation to Public Speaking - National Geographic
Edition with CB VitalSource eBook, 5e p.56
CTE Mass Media Research with CB VitalSource eBook,
10e p.87
G
Gendered Lives, 12e p.10
Goodall, Jr./Goodall, Business and Professional
Communication in the Global Workplace, International
Edition, 3e p.8
Griffin/Bone, Invitation to Human Communication National Geographic, 2e p.26
Griffin, CTE Invitation to Public Speaking - National
Geographic Edition with CB VitalSource eBook, 5e p.56
Griffin, Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook p.58
Gross, Digital Moviemaking, International Edition, 7e p.107
H
Hamilton, Cengage Advantage Series: Essentials of Public
Speaking, 6e p.45
Hamilton, Communicating for Results, 10e p.3
Hausman/Messere/Benoit, Modern Radio and Audio
Production, 10e p.100
Hendrix/Hayes/Kumar, Public Relations Cases,
Hilliard, Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media,
11e p.110
Hilmes, Only Connect, 4e p.95
I
In Mixed Company, 9e p.63
Intercultural Communication, 14e p.12
Interpersonal Communication, 8e p.18
Invitation to Human Communication - National Geographic,
2e p.26
Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook p.58
IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card), 3e p.15
J
Jaffe, Public Speaking, 8e p.41
D
K
Diggs-Brown, Strategic Public Relations p.71
Diggs-Brown, The PR Styleguide, 3e p.69
Digital Moviemaking, International Edition, 7e p.107
Keith/Lundberg, Public Speaking, 2e p.39
Kessler/McDonald, When Words Collide, 9e p.109
Knapp/Hall/Horgan, Non-verbal Communication in Human
www.cengageasia.com
125
Combined Author/Title Index
Interaction, International Edition, 8e p.34
L
Larson, Persuasion, 13e p.37
Lester, Visual Communication, 6e p.89
Lewis, Essential Cinema p.99
Lighting and the Design Idea, International Edition, 3e p.124
Looking Out, Looking In, 15e p.16
M
Major Principles of Media Law, 2016 p.79
Mamer, Film Production Technique, 6e p.104
Management of Electronic and Digital Media, 6e p.96
Mass Communication Theory, 7e p.81
Media, Crime, and Criminal Justice, 5e p.82
Media Effects Research, 5e p.86
Media/Impact, 12e p.73
Media Now, 9e p.74
Media Programming, 9e p.97
Meeske, Copywriting for the Electronic Media, 6e p.77/p.111
Metcalfe, Cengage Advantage Books: Building a Speech,
8e p.57
Miller, Organizational Communication, 7e p.35
Modern Radio and Audio Production, 10e p.100
N
Newsom/Haynes, Public Relations Writing, 11e p.64
Newsom, Cengage Advantage Books: This is PR, 11e p.67
Non-verbal Communication in Human Interaction,
O
O’Neill, Cengage Advantage Books: The Actor’s Checklist,
4e p.115
Only Connect, 4e p.95
Organizational Communication, 7e p.35
Overbeck/Belmas/Shepard, Major Principles of Media Law,
2016 p.79
P
Parker/Wolf/Block, Scene Design and Stage Lighting,
Persuasion, 13e p.37
Public Relations Cases, International Edition, 9e p.68
Public Relations Writing, 11e p.64
Public Speaking, 2e p.39
T
Television Production Handbook, 12e p.103
The Art of Theatre, 3e: Then and Now p.119
The Art of Theatre, 3e: A Concise Introduction p.121
Theatre, 7e p.117
The Basics of Communication Research, p.62
The Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age, 16e p.51
The Essential Theatre, 11e p.116
The PR Styleguide, 3e p.69
The Rhetorical Act, 5e p.54
The Speaker’s Handbook, 11e p.43
U
Understanding Interpersonal Communication, 2e p.21
V
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber, Communicate!, 15e p.23
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber, SPEAK 2 (with CourseMate
with SpeechBuilder Express™ 3.0 1-Semester,
InfoTrac® Printed Access Card), 2e p.50
Verderber/Sellnow/Verderber, The Challenge of Effective
Speaking in a Digital Age, 16e p.51
Verderber/Verderber/Sellnow, COMM 4 (with Online, 1
term (6 months) Printed Access Card), 4e p.28
Video Basics, 7e p.105
Visual Communication, 6e p.89
Voice and Articulation, 5e p.108
W
R
Rothwell, In Mixed Company, 9e p.63
Rubin, Communication Research, 7e p.61/p.88
S
Samovar/Porter/McDaniel/Roy, CTE Communication
Between Cultures with CB VitalSource eBook, 8e p.14
Samovar/Porter/McDaniel/Roy, Intercultural
Communication, 14e p.12
Scene Design and Stage Lighting, International Edition,
10e p.122
126
Sight, Sound, Motion, 8e p.90/p.92/p.101
Sivulka, Soap, Sex, and Cigarettes, 2e p.70
Soap, Sex, and Cigarettes, 2e p.70
Sparks, Media Effects Research, 5e p.86
SPEAK 2 (with CourseMate with SpeechBuilder Express™
3.0 1-Semester, InfoTrac® Printed Access Card),
2e p.50
Sprague/Stuart/Bodary, Cengage Advantage Books: The
Speaker’s Compact Handbook, 5e p.38
Sprague/Stuart/Bodary, The Speaker’s Handbook,
11e p.43
Stilson/Clark/McGaw, Acting is Believing, 12e p.114
Strategic Public Relations p.71
Straubhaar/LaRose/Davenport, Media Now, 9e p.74
Surette, Media, Crime, and Criminal Justice, 5e p.82
Waldeck/Kearney/Plax, Business and Professional
Communication in a Digital Age, International
Edition p.5
West/Turner, IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed
Access Card), 3e p.15
West/Turner, Understanding Interpersonal Communication,
2e p.21
When Words Collide, 9e p.109
Wimmer/Dominick, CTE Mass Media Research with CB
VitalSource eBook, 10e p.87
Wood, Communication in Our Lives, 7e p.29
Wood, Communication Mosaics, 8e p.24
Wood, Communication Theories in Action, 3e p.9
Wood, CTE Communication Mosaics, 7e p.31
Wood, CTE Interpersonal Communication, 7e p.19
Wood/Fixmer-Oraiz, Gendered Lives, 12e p.10
Wood, Interpersonal Communication, 8e p.18
Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media, 11e p.110
www.cengageasia.com
ORDER FORM / PRICE LIST
QTY
YEAR ISBN NO.
AUTHOR TITLE/EDITION
PAGE NO.
PRICE(USD)
A
__
2015
9781285465050
Stilson
Acting is Believing, 12e
p.114
180.95
__
2016
9781305077447
Barton
Acting, 7e
p.113
180.95
__
2013
9781111348120
Fellow
American Media History, 3e
p.84/p.85
219.95
__
2014
9781285083575
Freeley
Argumentation and Debate, International Edition, 13e
p.2
244.95
__
2014
9781133957621
Alten
Audio in Media, International Edition, 10e
p.93
285.95
__
2013
9781133309840
Waldeck
Business and Professional Communication in a Digital
Age, International Edition
p.5
122.95
__
2010
9780495567400
Goodall, Jr.
Business and Professional Communication in the Global
Workplace, International Edition, 3e
p.8
218.95
__
2011
9780495902973
Zelezny
Cases in Communications Law, 6e
p.80
124.95
__
2017
9781305280281
Sprague
Cengage Advantage Books: The Speaker’s Compact
Handbook, 5e
p.38
39.95
__
2012
9780495913566
Alten
Cengage Advantage Books: Audio Basics
p.95
137.95
__
2013
9781111348373
Metcalfe
Cengage Advantage Books: Building a Speech, 8e
p.57
75.95
__
2014
9781133308652
O’Neill
Cengage Advantage Books: The Actor’s Checklist, 4e
p.115
49.95
__
2013
9781133307617
Newsom
Cengage Advantage Books: This is PR, 11e
p.67
129.95
__
2015
9781285159454
Hamilton
Cengage Advantage Series: Essentials of Public
Speaking, 6e
p.45
61.95
__
2016
9781305659582
Verderber
COMM 4 (with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card), 4e
p.28
75.00
__
2017
9781305502819
Verderber
Communicate!, 15e
p.23
218.95
__
2013
9780170214971
Archee
Communicating as Professionals, 3e
p.6/p.33
__
2014
9781285171838
Hamilton
Communicating for Results, 10e
p.3
216.95
__
2015
9781285075976
Wood
Communication in Our Lives, 7e
p.29
213.95
__
2017
9781305403581
Wood
Communication Mosaics, 8e
p.24
188.95
__
2010
9780495793441
Rubin
Communication Research, 7e
p.61/p.88
137.95
__
2004
9780534566395
Wood
Communication Theories in Action, 3e
p.9
188.95
__
2009
9780495411178
Meeske
Copywriting for the Electronic Media, 6e
p.77/p.111
247.95
__
2011
9780538743709
Bowles
Creative Editing, International Edition, 6e
p.76
263.95
__
2014
9781285080277
Drewniany
Creative Strategy in Advertising, International Edition,
11e
p.66
261.95
__
2013
9789814591959
Samovar
CTE Communication Between Cultures with CB
VitalSource eBook, 8e
p.14
TBA
__
2014
9789814601566
Wood
CTE Communication Mosaics, 7e
p.31
TBA
__
2013
9789814609807
Wood
CTE Interpersonal Communication, 7e
p.19
TBA
__
2014
9789814617055
Griffin
CTE Invitation to Public Speaking - National Geographic
Edition with CB VitalSource eBook, 5e
p.56
TBA
B
C
75.50
• Prices quoted here are correct at time of printing and are subject to change without prior notice
QTY
__
YEAR ISBN NO.
2014
9789814601290
Wimmer
2009
9780495571346
2014
PAGE NO.
PRICE(USD)
CTE Mass Media Research with CB VitalSource eBook,
10e
p.87
TBA
Gross
Digital Moviemaking, International Edition, 7e
p.107
257.95
9781285192925
Lewis
Essential Cinema
p.99
104.95
2014
9780840030917
Mamer
Film Production Technique, 6e
p.104
242.95
2017
9781305280274
Wood
Gendered Lives, 12e
p.10
168.95
__
2016
9781285444604
Rothwell
In Mixed Company, 9e
p.63
177.95
__
2015
9781285077390
Samovar
Intercultural Communication, 14e
p.12
199.95
__
2016
9781285445830
Wood
Interpersonal Communication, 8e
p.18
188.95
__
2017
9781305502826
Griffin
Geographic, 2e
p.26
123.95
__
2011
9781439035863
Griffin
Invitation to Public Speaking Handbook
p.58
106.95
__
2017
9781305668775
West
IPC 3 (with Online, 1 term (6 months) Printed Access
Card), 3e
p.15
75.00
__
2013
9781111836870
Essig
Lighting and the Design Idea, International Edition, 3e
p.124
149.95
__
2017
9781305076518
Adler
Looking Out, Looking In, 15e
p.16
170.95
__
2016
9781305076983
Overbeck
Major Principles of Media Law, 2016
p.79
172.95
__
2017
9781305077560
Albarran
Management of Electronic and Digital Media, 6e
p.96
222.95
__
2015
9781285052076
Baran
Mass Communication Theory, 7e
p.81
231.95
__
2016
9781305077478
Sparks
Media Effects Research, 5e
p.86
152.95
__
2016
9781305080355
Straubhaar
Media Now, 9e
p.74
235.95
__
2013
9781111835026
Eastman
Media Programming, 9e
p.97
236.95
__
2015
9781285459059
Surette
Media, Crime, and Criminal Justice, 5e
p.82
122.95
__
2017
9781305580985
Biagi
Media/Impact, 12e
p.73
235.95
__
2016
9781305077492
Hausman
Modern Radio and Audio Production, 10e
p.100
205.95
2014
9781285083513
Knapp
Non-verbal Communication in Human Interaction,
International Edition, 8e
p.34
205.95
__
2014
9781133307303
Hilmes
Only Connect, 4e
p.95
216.95
__
2015
9781285164205
Miller
Organizational Communication, 7e
p.35
186.95
__
2013
9781133490531
Larson
Persuasion, 13e
p.37
216.95
__
2013
9781111836825
Hendrix
Public Relations Cases, International Edition, 9e
p.68
205.95
__
2017
9781305500006
Newsom
Public Relations Writing, 11e
p.64
201.95
__
2017
9781305261648
Keith
Public Speaking, 2e
p.39
93.95
D
__
E
__
F
__
G
__
I
L
M
N
__
O
P
QTY
YEAR ISBN NO.
PAGE NO.
PRICE(USD)
__
2015
9781285432823
Coopman
Public Speaking, 3e
p.47
128.95
__
2016
9781285445854
Jaffe
Public Speaking, 8e
p.41
101.95
__
2014
9781111834784
Parker
Scene Design and Stage Lighting, International Edition,
10e
p.122
236.95
__
2017
9781305578906
Zettl
Sight, Sound, Motion, 8e
p.90/p.92/p.101
289.95
__
2012
9781133311133
Sivulka
Soap, Sex, and Cigarettes, 2e
p.70
119.95
__
2015
9781285077055
Verderber
SPEAK 2 (with CourseMate with SpeechBuilder
Express™ 3.0 1-Semester, InfoTrac® Printed Access
Card), 2e
p.50
69.95
__
2012
9781111840167
Diggs-Brown
Strategic Public Relations
p.71
170.95
__
2015
9781285052670
Zettl
Television Production Handbook, 12e
p.103
265.95
__
2013
9781111348304
Downs
The Art of Theatre, 3e: Then and Now
p.119
199.95
__
2013
9781111348311
Downs
The Art of Theatre, 3e: A Concise Introduction
p.121
192.95
__
2004
9780534507787
Baxter
The Basics of Communication Research (with InfoTrac®)
p.62
192.95
__
2015
9781285094847
Verderber
The Challenge of Effective Speaking in a Digital Age, 16e
p.51
218.95
__
2017
9781305411074
Brockett
The Essential Theatre, 11e
p.116
221.95
__
2013
9780840028921
Diggs-Brown
The PR Styleguide, 3e
p.69
106.95
__
2015
9781133313793
Campbell
The Rhetorical Act, 5e
p.54
208.95
__
2016
9781285444611
Sprague
The Speaker’s Handbook, 11e
p.43
147.95
__
2015
9781133309895
Barranger
Theatre, 7e
p.117
122.95
2011
9780495908753
West
Understanding Interpersonal Communication, 2e
p.21
212.95
__
2013
9781111344467
Zettl
Video Basics, 7e
p.105
231.95
__
2014
9781285075846
Lester
Visual Communication, 6e
p.89
229.95
__
2012
9780534514990
Crannell
Voice and Articulation, 5e
p.108
211.95
__
2016
9781285052472
Kessler
When Words Collide, 9e
p.109
139.95
__
2015
9781285465074
Hilliard
Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media, 11e
p.110
225.95
S
T
U
__
V
W
Cengage Learning Asia Offices and Contacts
151 Lorong Chuan
#02-08 New Tech Park
Singapore 556741
T (65) 6410 1200
F (65) 6410 1208
[email protected]
cengageasia.com
PT. Cengage Learning Indonesia
COSA Building, 2nd Floor
Jalan Tomang Raya No. 70
Jakarta Barat, 11430
Indonesia
T (62) 21 569 58815
F (62) 21 569 52371
[email protected]
Cengage Learning (Beijing) Education
Technology Co., Ltd.
Room 1201, South Tower
Building C, Raycom Info Tech Park
No. 2 Kexueyuan South Road
Haidian District, Beijing
P.R. China 100190
T (86) 10 8286 2095/96/97
F (86) 10 8286 2089
[email protected]
cengage.com.cn
Cengage Learning K.K.
No. 2 Funato Building, 5F
1-11-11 Kudankita
Chiyoda-ku
Tokyo 102-0073
Japan
T (81) 3 3511 4390
F (81) 3 3511 4391
[email protected]
cengage.jp
Cengage Learning (Beijing) Education
Technology Co., Ltd.
(Shanghai Branch)
Room 211, Jing’an Modern
Industry Tower
No. 68, Changping Road
Jing An District, Shanghai
P.R. China 200041
T (86) 21 5466 6400
F (86) 21 6215 8001
[email protected]
cengage.com.cn
Cengage Learning Hong Kong Limited
Units 808–810, 8/F
Tins Enterprises Centre
777 Lai Chi Kok Road
Cheung Sha Wan, Kowloon
Hong Kong
T (852) 2612 1833
F (852) 2408 2498
[email protected]
Cengage Learning Korea Ltd.
14F, YTN Newsquare,
76, Sangamsan-ro, Mapo-gu
Seoul, 121-904
Korea, South
T (82) 2 330 7000
F (82) 2 330 7001
[email protected]
cengage.co.kr
(Malaysia Branch)
Co. Reg No: 993622K
GST Reg No: 001445896192
Lot A-3A-42, Block A, 3A floor
IOI Boulevard, Jalan Kenari 5
Bandar Puchong Jaya, 47170 Puchong
Selangor, Malaysia
T (60) 3 8076 9699
F (60) 3 8076 9692
[email protected]
(Philippine Branch)
Unit 1103, 11th Corporate Center
11th Avenue, corner Triangle Drive
North Bonifacio, Bonifacio Global City
Taguig City, Philippines 1634
T (63) 2 869 9660/61/62
F (63) 2 869-8123
[email protected]
(Taiwan Branch)
9F-1 No.87 Cheng Chou Road
Da Tong District
103 Taipei
Taiwan
T (886) 2 2558 0569
F (886) 2 2558 0360
[email protected]
cengage.tw
Cengage Learning Indo-China Limited
408/32 Phaholyothin Place Building
8th Floor, Phaholyothin Avenue
Samseannai, Phayathai
Bangkok 10400
Thailand
T (66) 2 619 0433–5
F (66) 2 619 0436
[email protected]
Cengage Learning Vietnam
Company Limited
Suite 1111, 11th Floor
Zen Plaza Building
54–56 Nguyen Trai Street, District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
Vietnam
T (84) 8 3925 7877
F (84) 8 3925 7881
[email protected]
For territories not listed above, please contact Cengage Learning in Singapore

order form / price list

Transcription

Similar documents

attached pdf. - Department of English

Simply by - Mayflower Theatre

FrINge MuSIc tHeatre FILM

Calendar - Capilano Courier

2015-2016 season - The Ensemble Theatre

Mirvish Productions

Program

A PDF - Orpheum Theatre

LGT_60-65_Layout 1 - Leisure Group Travel

The Wizard of Oz is presented with special permission from Tams